JP2022093569A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine capable of favorably improving an attention degree to a game.

SOLUTION: A pachinko machine 10 acquires reservation information for special symbols on the basis of entry of a game ball in an upper actuation hole or a lower actuation hole, and executes win/loss determination on the basis of the reservation information. When it turns out a jackpot result in the win/loss determination, the game state is transferred to an opening/closing execution mode. Further, when a game ball enters a through-gate, the game machine acquires reservation information for normal symbols and executes win/loss determination on the basis of the reservation information. When it turns out an opening result in the win/loss determination, the game is transferred to a support state where an electric generator provided at the lower actuation hole becomes an open state. Information related to the win/loss determination in the normal symbol side is notified to a symbol display device, where execution modes of the notification processing are different according to game states.

SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 1

COPYRIGHT: (C)2022,JPO&INPIT

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

For example, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine, a lottery for whether or not to shift to a predetermined gaming state such as a winning gaming state is performed when the gaming ball enters the starting ball entry portion provided in the gaming area. It will be done. Further, for example, in a display device provided in a gaming machine, a variable display of a pattern is started, and a stop result corresponding to the lottery result is displayed at the final stop display of the variable display, which is a display effect for one game. Is executed (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2004-81853

Here, it is necessary to raise the degree of attention to the game in the gaming machine, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

The present invention has been made in view of the above-exemplified circumstances and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably increasing the degree of attention to gaming.

The present invention
A game ball launching means that launches a game ball into the game area based on a predetermined firing operation,
A first ball entry section provided in the game area where a game ball can enter,
A first information acquisition means for acquiring the first information based on the fact that the game ball has entered the first ball entry portion.
A first information storage means for storing the first information acquired by the first information acquisition means, and a first information storage means.
A first determination means for performing a first determination as to whether or not the first information stored in the first information storage means corresponds to a predetermined first correspondence information.
Equipped with
At least a first gaming state and a second gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state are set as the gaming state.
Based on the fact that the result of the first determination by the first determination means is the first correspondence result that the first information to be determined corresponds to the first correspondence information, the gaming state is changed to the first. A state transition means for transitioning from a gaming state to a second gaming state,
The first game round is to start the game rounding operation by a predetermined notification means and end the game rounding operation as a notification result corresponding to the result of the first determination of the first determination means. (1) A game turn control means that controls the predetermined notification means so that the game turn operation of each game turn is performed according to the first information stored in the information storage means.
In a gaming machine equipped with
A second ball entry section, which is provided in the game area separately from the first ball entry section and in which a game ball can enter,
A variable state that is provided in the game area and can be displaced into an accepting state in which the game ball is easily accepted into the first entry portion and a non-acceptance state in which the game ball is less likely to be accepted into the first entry portion than in the acceptance state. Acceptance means and
A second information acquisition means for acquiring the second information based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second entry portion.
A second information storage means for storing the second information acquired by the second information acquisition means, and a second information storage means.
A second determination means that makes a second determination as to whether or not the second information stored in the second information storage means corresponds to the second correspondence information that is predetermined.
Based on the fact that the result of the second determination by the second determination means is the second correspondence result that the second information to be determined corresponds to the second correspondence information, the variable acceptance means is described. A variable control execution means that executes variable acceptance control from the non-acceptance state to the acceptance state and then to the non-acceptance state.
A second determination notification means for executing a notification process for performing notification for the second determination of the second determination means by the predetermined notification means or a notification means different from the predetermined notification means.
Equipped with
The second determination notification means is
Regarding the predetermined second information acquired by the second information acquisition means, the information corresponding to the result of the second determination when the predetermined second information is the target of the second determination is the predetermined second information. 2 The destination specifying means for executing the process of specifying the information at the timing before the target of the second determination, and
Based on the fact that the specific result by the prior identification means becomes a predetermined special result, the second determination in the case where the predetermined second information which is the specific target becomes the target of the second determination. A special notification executing means for executing the special notification corresponding to the result by the predetermined notification means or a notification means different from the predetermined notification means.
Equipped with
The gaming machine is
A grasping means for grasping the game state and
Based on the grasping result by the grasping means, the changing means for changing the execution mode of the notification process of the second determination notification means and the changing means.
It is characterized by having.

According to the present invention, it is possible to suitably increase the degree of attention to the game.

It is a front view which shows the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a perspective view which shows the main composition of a pachinko machine in an unfolded manner. It is a perspective view which shows the main composition of a pachinko machine in an unfolded manner. It is a front view which shows the structure of a game board. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of a pachinko machine. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the display content on the display screen of a symbol display device. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the contents of various counters used for a winning or failing lottery. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the pass / fail table. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the distribution table. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the distribution table. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt processing in MPU of a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the winning process for through. It is a flowchart which shows the winning process for a working opening. It is a flowchart which shows the information acquisition process. It is a flowchart which shows the normal process in MPU of a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the game time control process. It is a flowchart which shows the data setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation start processing. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process of a variation display time. It is a flowchart which shows the game state transition process. It is a flowchart which shows the opening and closing process of a big prize opening. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process for each round. It is a flowchart which shows the transition process at the end of the open / close execution mode. It is a flowchart which shows the process for electric service support. It is a flowchart which shows the normal figure game times control process. It is a flowchart which shows the ordinary figure fluctuation start processing. It is a flowchart which shows the normal figure game state transition process. It is a flowchart which shows the opening and closing process of an accessory. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process for each round. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the relationship between the normal game times and the support state. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the relationship between each opening result, opening and closing mode, length of each waiting time, and its effect. It is a flowchart which shows the start process of a support state. It is a flowchart which shows the termination process of a support state. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure for performing various productions. It is a block diagram for demonstrating the hold storage area. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the outline of the variation display of a special figure game times. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the area inside the frame and the area outside the frame of a display screen. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the outline of the re-variation effect. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the outline of the special figure hold notice. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the outline of the re-variation effect in the special figure hold notice. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation display control processing in MPU of a staging control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the process for starting special figure fluctuation. It is a flowchart which shows the effect setting process for a big hit. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the relationship between a stop line and address information. It is a flowchart which shows the effect setting process for the reach generation. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the relationship between a stop line and a stop symbol. It is a flowchart which shows the staging setting process for normal deviation. It is a flowchart which shows the process for special figure fluctuation. It is a flowchart which shows the process for ending the special figure variation. It is a flowchart which shows the confirmation process for holding a special figure in MPU of a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process of a special figure hold command. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure hold control process in MPU of the staging control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure hold notice setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the notice setting process for a big hit. It is a flowchart which shows the notice setting process for disconnection. It is a flowchart which shows the effect setting process for special figure hold notice. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the relationship between a stop line and a stop symbol. It is a flowchart which shows the replacement process. It is a flowchart which shows the stop result correction processing. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st correction process. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the correction table. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd correction process. It is a flowchart which shows the 3rd correction process. It is a flowchart which shows the ordinary figure variation display control process in MPU of an effect control device. (A) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the outline of the normal drawing game times, and (b) is the flowchart which shows the processing for starting the normal drawing change. It is a flowchart which shows the process for support state in MPU of a staging control device. (A) It is a flowchart which shows the process for holding a normal figure in MPU of a main control unit, and (b) is explanatory drawing for explaining the command for holding a normal figure. (A) It is a flowchart which shows the ordinary figure hold control process in MPU of the staging control device, and (b) is explanatory drawing for explaining the outline of the ordinary figure hold notice. (A) It is a flowchart which shows the ordinary figure hold notice setting process, and (b) is explanatory drawing for explaining the selection table of the hold image. It is a flowchart which shows the situation grasp process on the special figure side. It is a flowchart which shows the timing change process. It is a flowchart which shows the situation grasp process on the special figure side in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the situation grasp process on the special figure side in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the ordinary figure hold control process in the MPU of the staging control apparatus in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the effect setting process for a special figure. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the overlap relationship between a support state and an open / close execution mode. In the fifth embodiment, (a) a flowchart showing a process for changing a normal map, (b) a flowchart showing a process corresponding to a hold command during a change, and (c) and (d) for explaining a special effect. It is an explanatory diagram of. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the variation example of the waiting time in a support state.

<First Embodiment>
Hereinafter, an embodiment of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter referred to as “pachinko machine”), which is a type of gaming machine, will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10, and FIGS. 2 and 3 are perspective views showing the main configurations of the pachinko machine 10 in an expanded manner. Note that, in FIG. 2, for convenience, the configuration in the gaming area of the pachinko machine 10 is omitted.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 forming an outer shell of the pachinko machine 10 and a gaming machine main body 12 rotatably attached to the outer frame 11 in the forward direction. .. The outer frame 11 is formed by connecting wooden plates and the like on all four sides and has a rectangular frame shape. The pachinko machine 10 is installed in the game hall by attaching and fixing the outer frame 11 to the island equipment.

The gaming machine main body 12 includes an inner frame 13, a front door frame 14 arranged in front of the inner frame 13, and a back pack unit 15 arranged behind the inner frame 13. The inner frame 13 of the gaming machine main body 12 is rotatably supported with respect to the outer frame 11. Specifically, the inner frame 13 can rotate forward with the left side as the rotation base end side and the right side as the rotation tip side in front view.

As shown in FIG. 2, the front door frame 14 is rotatably supported on the inner frame 13, and can be rotated forward with the left side as the rotation base end side and the right side as the rotation tip side in front view. It is said that. Further, as shown in FIG. 3, the back pack unit 15 is rotatably supported on the inner frame 13, and the left side is the rotation base end side and the right side is the rotation tip side when viewed from the front. It is supposed to be movable.

As shown in FIG. 3, the gaming machine main body 12 is provided with a locking device 16 at its rotating tip, and has a function of locking the gaming machine main body 12 to an outer frame 11 so that it cannot be opened. In addition, it has a function of locking the front door frame 14 to the inner frame 13 so that it cannot be opened. Each of these locked states is released by performing an unlocking operation using the unlocking key on the cylinder lock 17 exposed on the front surface of the pachinko machine 10.

Next, the configuration of the front side of the gaming machine main body 12 will be described.

The inner frame 13 is mainly composed of a resin base 21 having an outer shape substantially the same as that of the outer frame 11. A substantially elliptical window hole 23 is formed in the central portion of the resin base 21. A game board 24 is detachably attached to the resin base 21. The game board 24 is made of plywood, and the game area formed on the front surface of the game board 24 is exposed to the front side of the inner frame 13 through the window hole 23 of the resin base 21.

Here, the configuration of the game board 24 will be described with reference to FIG. The game board 24 is formed with a plurality of large and small openings that penetrate in the front-rear direction by being processed by a router. Each opening has a general winning opening 31, a variable winning device 32, an upper operating port (non-priority entry section) 33, a lower operating opening (priority entry section) 34, a through gate 35, a variable display unit 36, and a main display section. 43, a display unit 44 for accessories, and the like are provided, respectively.

When a ball enters the general winning opening 31, the variable winning device 32, the upper operating port 33, and the lower operating port 34, it is detected by a detection sensor (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 24. A predetermined number of prize balls are paid out based on the detection result. In this case, when a ball is entered into the general winning opening 31, 10 game balls are paid out, and when a ball is entered into the variable winning device 32, 15 game balls are paid out. Is executed, and when a ball enters the upper operating port 33, three game balls are paid out, and when a ball enters the lower operating port 34, four game balls are paid out. Is executed.

The number of game balls to be paid out is not limited to the above. However, in order to enhance the advantage of the lower operating port 34 with respect to the upper operating port 33, it is preferable to set a larger number of payouts related to the lower operating port 34 than the number of payouts related to the upper operating port 33. On the contrary, from the viewpoint of not increasing the advantage of the support state described later too much, it is preferable to set the number of payouts related to the upper working port 33 to be larger than the number of payouts related to the lower working port 34. Further, in order to enhance the advantage of the variable winning device 32 for each of the operating ports 33 and 34, it is preferable to set a larger number of payouts for the variable winning device 32 than for the number of payouts for each of the operating ports 33 and 34.

In addition, an out port 37 is provided at the lowermost portion of the game board 24, and a game ball that does not enter various winning openings or the like is discharged from the game area PE through the out opening 37. Further, a large number of nails 38 are planted on the game board 24 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the game ball, and various members (accessories) such as a windmill are arranged.

Here, the entry ball means that the game ball passes through a predetermined opening, and is not only discharged from the game area after passing through the opening, but also discharged from the game area after passing through the opening. Aspects that are not included are also included. However, in the following description, in order to clearly distinguish the ball from entering the game ball into the out port 37, the game ball enters the variable winning device 32, the upper operating port 33, the lower operating port 34, or the through gate 35. Is also expressed as a prize.

The variable display unit 36 is provided so as to include the central portion of the game area PE. Since the peripheral edge of the variable display unit 36 protrudes in front of the pachinko machine 10 from the surface of the game board 24, the area where the game ball launched into the game area PE can flow down is partitioned. Specifically, in the game area PE, the upper region PE1 which is a region above the predetermined height position of the variable display unit 36 and the upper region PE1 which is continuously below the variable display unit 36 and above the variable display unit 36. The left region PE2, which is the left region, the right region PE3, which is a region to the right of the variable display unit 36 and is continuous below the upper region PE1, and the left region PE2 and the right region PE3, respectively. On the other hand, it is continuously partitioned below the variable display unit 36 into a lower region PE4 which is a region below the variable display unit 36.

When the player operates the launch handle 54 with a rotation amount in the first range, which is less than the reference rotation amount, as the first launch operation, the game ball flows down to the left of the lateral center position in the upper region PE1. Start out. In this case, the game ball flows down in the order of upper region PE1 → left side region PE2 → lower region PE4. On the other hand, as the second launch operation, the player operates the launch handle 54 with a rotation amount in the second range that is equal to or greater than the reference rotation amount, so that the player can play the game on the right side of the center position in the lateral direction in the upper region PE1. The ball begins to flow down. In this case, the game ball flows down in the order of the upper region PE1 → the right region PE3 → the lower region PE4. That is, by adjusting the amount of rotation of the firing handle 54, the player can play the game so that the game ball flows down the left side region PE2 of the left side region PE2 and the right side region PE3, and the right side region PE3. The game can be played so that the game ball flows down.

The upper operating port 33 and the lower operating port 34 are unitized as an operating port device and installed in the lower region PE4 of the game board 24. That is, the game ball can reach the upper operating port 33 and the lower operating port 34 regardless of whether the player is performing the first firing operation or the second firing operation. Both the upper working port 33 and the lower working port 34 are opened upward. Further, both the operating ports 33 and 34 are arranged in the vertical direction so that the upper operating port 33 faces upward. The lower working port 34 is provided with an electric accessory 34a as a guide piece made of a pair of left and right movable pieces.

The electric accessory 34a will be described. The electric accessory 34a is in a closed state (non-accepting state, non-supporting state or non-guided state) in which it is difficult for the game ball to win in the lower operating port 34, and an open state (accepting state, in which the game ball is easier to win than in the closed state). It can be switched to the support state or the guide state).

The operating port case constituting the upper operating port 33 projects toward the front side and has a substantially trapezoidal shape when viewed from the front, and the upper side length <lower side length. At this time, the upper side length of the operating port case (that is, the left-right width of the upper operating port 33) is set to be slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball, and the lower side length is left and right when the electric accessory 34a is in the closed state. It is said that the length is larger than the distance between the electric accessories 34a. Further, when the electric accessory 34a is in the closed state, the installation intervals of both operation ports 33 and 34 are set so that the distance between the operation port case and the upper end portion of the electric accessory 34a is slightly shorter than the diameter of the game ball. It has been adjusted.

According to the above configuration, the game ball cannot win the lower operating opening 34 in the closed state of the electric accessory 34a, and the lower operating opening 34 can be won by opening the electric accessory 34a. In particular, at this time, during the operation in which the electric accessory 34a shifts from the closed state to the open state, the operating port case of the upper operating port 33 has a substantially trapezoidal shape as described above, which becomes an obstacle. Until the object 34a is sufficiently opened, it is impossible to win a prize in the lower operating port 34, and the prize can be won only when the electric accessory 34a is almost fully opened. That is, the game ball that has fallen from above hits the side surface of the operating port case and is repelled to the outside, and does not directly win the lower operating opening 34. As a result, when the electric accessory 34a is opened in a very short time, it becomes extremely difficult to win a prize in the lower operating port 34, and only when the open state of the electric accessory 34a is continued, the lower operating port 34 is entered. Winning will be easier.

In addition to the configuration in which the operating port case of the upper operating port 33 has a substantially trapezoidal shape as described above, the operating port case of the upper operating port 33 may have a two-stage configuration with a narrow upper part and a wide lower part, or the upper operating port 33. A substantially C-shaped guide piece may be provided on both the left and right sides of the case, or an obstacle nail may be planted diagonally below the operating port case.

The variable winning device 32 is installed in the lower region PE4 in the game board 24. That is, the game ball can reach the variable winning device 32 regardless of whether the player is performing the first firing operation or the second firing operation. The variable winning device 32 includes a large winning opening 32a leading to the back side of the game board 24, and also includes an opening / closing door 32b for opening and closing the large winning opening 32a. The opening / closing door 32b is normally in a closed state in which the game ball cannot win or is difficult to win, and a predetermined opening / closing door 32b is likely to win a prize when the transition to the opening / closing execution mode (opening / closing execution state) is won in the internal lottery. It can be switched to the open state. Here, the open / close execution mode is a mode in which the game shifts when a big hit or a special loss is won. The open / close execution mode will be described in detail later. As an opening mode of the variable winning device 32, the variable winning device 32 is repeatedly opened with a predetermined time (for example, 30 sec) elapsed or a predetermined number (for example, 10) of winnings as one round and a plurality of rounds (for example, 15 rounds) as an upper limit. There is an aspect to be done.

Two through gates 35 are provided in the game board 24 on the left side region PE2 and the right side region PE3 with the variable display unit 36 interposed therebetween. That is, when the player is performing the first launch operation, the game ball can reach the through gate 35 on the side provided in the left side region PE2, and the player performs the second launch operation. If so, the game ball can reach the through gate 35 on the side provided in the right side region PE3. Both through gates 35 are configured to allow game balls to pass through, and the game balls that have won the through gate 35 in the game area PE are discharged to the game area PE as they are. Then, the game ball that has won (passed through) the through gate 35 then flows down to the lower region PE4. That is, the game ball that has won the through gate 35 can win the upper operating port 33, the lower operating port 34, and the variable winning device 32.

The main display unit 43 and the accessory display unit 44 are provided on the decorative member 39 arranged along the outer edge on the lower side of the game area. The decorative member 39 extends from the surface of the gaming board 24 to the front of the pachinko machine 10. More specifically, the front surface of the decorative member 39 faces the window panel 62 provided on the front door frame 14 so that the game area can be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko machine 10, and further, the front surface of the decorative member 39 faces the window panel 62. The distance between them is narrower than one game ball. This prevents the game ball from falling in front of the front surface of the decorative member 39.

The main display unit 43 and the accessory display unit 44 are provided so as to be exposed from the front surface of the decorative member 39. That is, the main display unit 43 and the accessory display unit 44 can be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the window panel 62 of the front door frame 14, and the game ball can be seen in front of both the display units 43 and 44. It is prevented from falling. In addition, on the upper surface of the decorative member 39, a part of the above-mentioned general winning openings 31 is installed in a state of being opened upward.

When the variable winning device 32 is in the open / close execution mode (or in the open / close execution mode) due to the big hit winning, the main display unit 43 has the large winning opening 32a of the variable winning device 32 in the open / close execution mode. The round display unit RS for clearly indicating the number of times the is opened, the first result display unit AS for clearly indicating the result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning of the upper operating port 33, and the lower operating port 34. A second result display unit BS for clearly indicating the result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning of the prize is set.

The round display unit RS starts displaying the number of times of opening when the opening / closing execution mode starts, and ends the display when the opening / closing execution mode ends.

In the first result display unit AS, the variation display of the pattern is performed triggered by the winning of the upper operating port 33, and as a result of stopping the variation display, the internal lottery performed based on the winning of the upper operating port 33 is performed. The result is clearly indicated by the display. If the result of the internal lottery based on the winning of the upper operating port 33 is the winning result corresponding to the transition to the open / close execution mode, the predetermined stop result is displayed on the first result display unit AS and is displayed in a variable manner. After is stopped, the mode shifts to the open / close execution mode.

In the second result display unit BS, the variation display of the pattern is performed triggered by the winning of the lower operating port 34, and as a result of stopping the variation display, the internal lottery performed based on the winning of the lower operating port 34 is performed. The result is clearly indicated by the display. If the result of the internal lottery based on the winning of the lower operating port 34 is the winning result corresponding to the transition to the open / close execution mode, the predetermined stop result is displayed on the second result display unit BS and is displayed in a variable manner. After is stopped, the mode shifts to the open / close execution mode.

Here, based on the winning of any of the operating ports 33 and 34, the variation display is started on the corresponding result display units AS and BS, the predetermined stop result is displayed, and the variation display is stopped. It corresponds to one game. However, one game round is not limited to the above content, and for example, a single result display unit is provided, and even if a prize is awarded to any of the actuation ports 33 and 34, the single result display unit is provided. In the configuration in which the variation display is performed in the result display unit, the variation display is started in the single result display unit, and the game is played until the variation display is stopped while the predetermined stop result is displayed. It will be once.

The accessory display unit 44 is a display unit for clearly showing the result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning of the through gate 35. In this case, the accessory display unit 44 performs a variable display of the pattern triggered by winning a prize in the through gate 35, and as a result of stopping the variable display, an internal lottery performed based on the winning in the through gate 35 is performed. The result of is specified by the display. If the result of the internal lottery based on the winning of the through gate 35 is the winning result corresponding to the transition to the electric service open state, the predetermined stop result is displayed on the accessory display unit 44 and is displayed in a variable manner. After it is stopped, it shifts to the electric service open state. In the electric service open state, the electric accessory 34a provided in the lower actuating port 34 is in the open state in a predetermined manner.

Here, based on the winning of the through gate 35, the variable display is started on the accessory display unit 44, the predetermined stop result is displayed, and the variable display is stopped until the accessory display unit 44 is stopped. Corresponds to one game in. Hereinafter, in order to distinguish from the game times in the result display units AS and BS described above, the game times in the accessory display unit 44 are also referred to as normal game times, and the games in the main display unit 43 (result display units AS and BS). The times are also called special figure game times.

The main display unit 43 and the accessory display unit 44 are composed of a segment display device having a plurality of segments, but the present invention is not limited to this, and other display devices such as a liquid crystal display device may be used. May be good.

The variable display unit 36 is provided with a symbol display device 41 for variable display (or variable display or switching display) of the symbol. Further, in the variable display unit 36, a center frame 42 is arranged so as to surround the symbol display device 41. The upper portion of the center frame 42 extends forward of the pachinko machine 10. As a result, the game ball is prevented from falling in front of the display screen of the symbol display device 41, and the inconvenience that the visibility of the display screen is not deteriorated due to the fall of the game ball does not occur. ..

The symbol display device 41 is configured as a liquid crystal display device provided with a liquid crystal display, and the display content is controlled by a display control device described later. On the symbol display device 41, for example, symbols are displayed side by side in the upper, middle, and lower directions, and these symbols are variably displayed so as to be scrolled in the left-right direction. In this case, the variation display in the symbol display device 41 is started based on the winning of the upper operating port 33 or the lower operating port 34. That is, when the variable display is performed on the first result display unit AS, the variable display is performed on the symbol display device 41, and when the variable display is performed on the second result display unit BS, the variable display is performed accordingly. At the same time, the symbol display device 41 performs variable display. Then, for example, the game times for shifting to the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to 15 rounds in which the large winning opening 32a of the variable winning device 32 is opened 15 times as the opening / closing execution mode are set in advance in the symbol display device 41. A predetermined combination of symbols is stopped and displayed on the valid line.

In the symbol display device 41, not only the variable display of the special figure game times corresponding to the result display units AS and BS, but also the variable display of the normal figure game times corresponding to the accessory display unit 44 is performed. Then, the position and size of the variable display area on the display screen, the variable symbol, etc. are set differently between the special figure game times and the normal figure game times, and the variable display and the normal figure game of the special figure game times are set. The fluctuation display of the times can be visually distinguished from each other. The areas where the special figure game times and the normal figure game times are performed will be described in detail later.

A first reserved light emitting unit 45 corresponding to the first result display unit AS and the symbol display device 41 is provided on the upper left portion on the front surface side of the center frame 42. The number of game balls that have won a prize in the upper operating port 33 is reserved up to four, and the reserved number is displayed by lighting the first reserved light emitting unit 45. Further, in the upper right portion on the front side of the center frame 42, a second reserved light emitting unit 46 corresponding to the second result display unit BS and the symbol display device 41 is provided. The number of game balls that have won a prize in the lower operating port 34 is reserved up to four, and the reserved number is displayed by lighting the second reserved light emitting unit 46. As described above, since the upper part of the center frame 42 extends to the front of the pachinko machine 10, the visibility of the first reserved light emitting unit 45 and the second reserved light emitting unit 46 is not hindered by the falling of the gaming ball. ing.

At the lower part of the center frame 42, a third reserved light emitting unit 47 corresponding to the accessory display unit 44 is provided. The number of times the game ball has passed through the through gate 35 is reserved up to four times, and the number of reserved games is displayed by lighting the third reserved light emitting unit 47.

An inner rail portion 51 and an outer rail portion 52 are attached to the game board 24, and a guide rail is formed by the inner rail portion 51 and the outer rail portion 52, and the game is launched from the game ball launch mechanism 53. The ball is guided to the upper part of the game area. As shown in FIG. 2, the game ball launch mechanism 53 is attached below the window hole 23 in the resin base 21, and the game ball is launched by operating the launch handle 54 provided on the front door frame 14. The operation is done.

The front door frame 14 is provided so as to cover the entire front surface side of the inner frame 13. As shown in FIG. 1, the front door frame 14 is formed with a window portion 61 so that almost the entire area of the game area can be visually recognized from the front. The window portion 61 has a substantially elliptical shape, and the window panel 62 described above is fitted therein. The window panel 62 is formed colorless and transparent by glass, but is not limited to this, and may be formed colorless and transparent by synthetic resin.

Light emitting means such as various lamps are provided around the window portion 61. A display light emitting unit 63 is provided above the window unit 61 as a part of the various light emitting units. Further, on both the left and right sides of the display light emitting unit 63, speaker units 64 for outputting sound effects and the like according to the game state are provided.

Below the window portion 61 in the front door frame 14, an upper bulging portion 65 and a lower bulging portion 66 bulging toward the front side are arranged side by side. An upper plate 71 opened upward is provided inside the upper bulging portion 65, and a lower plate 72 also opened upward is provided inside the lower bulging portion 66. The upper plate 71 has a function of temporarily storing the game balls paid out from the payout device described later and guiding them to the game ball launching mechanism 53 side while arranging them in a row. Further, the lower plate 72 has a function of storing the surplus game balls in the upper plate 71. The game balls paid out from the payout device 96 of the back pack unit 15 are discharged to the upper plate 71 and the lower plate 72 through the passage forming unit 73 provided on the back surface of the front door frame 14.

Next, the configuration of the back side of the gaming machine main body 12 will be described.

As shown in FIG. 3, a main control device 81 and an effect control device 82 are mounted on the back surface of the inner frame 13 (specifically, the game board 24).

The main control device 81 includes a main control board having a function of controlling the main control of the game (main control circuit) and a function of monitoring the power supply (power failure monitoring circuit), and the main control board is made of a transparent resin material. It is configured to be housed in a substrate box 83 made of the above. The board box 83 includes a box base (front case body) having a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape and a box cover (back case body) that covers an opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are inseparably connected by a box coupling portion 85 as a separation preventing means (or a coupling means), whereby the substrate box 83 is sealed. Since they are inseparably connected by the box coupling portions 85, the substrate box 83 needs to be destroyed or partially cut when the internal space of the substrate box 83 is opened. A plurality of box coupling portions 85 are provided on the long side portions of the substrate box 83, and at least one of them is used to perform the coupling processing.

Any configuration can be applied to the box joint portion 85 as long as the box base and the box cover cannot be opened, but by inserting a locking claw into the elongated hole constituting the box joint portion 85, the box base can be connected to the box base. It is designed so that it cannot be opened with the box cover. The joining process by the box joining portion 85 prevents unauthorized opening after the joining, and makes it possible to detect such a situation early and easily even if the illegal opening is performed. Even after opening, it is possible to perform the opening process again. That is, the coupling process is performed by inserting the locking claw into at least one elongated hole among the plurality of box coupling portions 85. When the board box 83 is opened, such as when a defect occurs in the housed main control board or when the main control board is inspected, the box coupling portion 85 into which the locking claw is inserted and the other box coupling portion 85 are used. Cut the connecting part of the box and the connecting part with the box body. As a result, the box base of the board box 83 and the box cover are separated, and the internal main control board can be taken out. After that, when the coupling process is performed again, the locking claw is inserted into the elongated hole of the other box coupling portion 85. If the history of opening the board box 83 is left in the board box 83, it is possible to easily discover that the board box 83 has been opened illegally by looking at the board box 83.

A plurality of bonding pieces 86 are provided on one short side of the board box 83 so as to project to the side thereof. These coupling pieces 86 have a one-to-one correspondence with a plurality of coupled pieces 87 formed on the mounting base of the main control device 81, and the coupling piece 86 and the coupling piece 87 form a board box 83 and a mounting base. The binding process is performed between.

As a trace means for detecting the unauthorized opening of the board box 83, a sealing sticker may be attached so as to straddle the boundary between the box base and the box cover. In this case, when the seal sticker is peeled off from the affixed portion, the adhesive layer of the seal sticker remains on the substrate box 83 side, and a trace thereof remains. Further, the seal seal is provided with an IC tag that transmits a response wave containing identification information to a ring wave of a predetermined frequency, and when the seal seal is removed, the antenna of the IC tag is cut off and the response is described above. It may be configured so that the transmission of waves is impossible.

The staging control device 82 includes a staging control board that controls voice, lamp display, and a display control device (not shown) according to instructions from the main control device 81, and the staging control board is a board box made of a transparent resin material or the like. It is housed and configured in 84.

As shown in FIG. 3, the back pack unit 15 includes a back pack 91, and a payout mechanism unit 92 and a control device collective unit 93 are attached to the back pack 91. The back pack 91 is made of a transparent synthetic resin, and has a protective cover portion 94 that protrudes rearward and has a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape so as to cover the main control device 81, the staging control device 82, and the like from the rear. ing.

The payout mechanism unit 92 is arranged so as to bypass the protective cover unit 94, and is a tank 95 in which game balls supplied from the island equipment of the game field are sequentially replenished, and a game stored in the tank 95. It is equipped with a payout device 96 for paying out balls. The game ball paid out from the payout device 96 is discharged to the upper plate 71 or the lower plate 72 through a payout passage (not shown) provided on the downstream side of the payout device 96. Further, the payout mechanism unit 92 is mounted with a back pack board provided with a power switch for turning on and off the power supply, for example, while supplying a main power supply of AC 24 volts.

Further, the back pack 91 is provided with an external output terminal 99 on the rotation shaft side of the back pack unit 15 and on the upper edge side. The external output terminal 99 includes an output terminal for outputting a signal when the number of game balls is insufficient in the tank 95 or the like, an output terminal for outputting a signal each time a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out, and a predetermined number of game balls. An output terminal for outputting a signal each time it is rented, an output terminal for outputting a signal when the gaming machine main body 12 is opened, an output terminal for outputting a signal when the front door frame 14 is opened, and a state transition such as an opening / closing execution mode. An output terminal for outputting a signal (or while transitioning to a state) is provided. Then, through these output terminals, a signal regarding the state on the frame side is output to the management control device on the game hall side. It should be noted that an output terminal for outputting a signal each time a predetermined number of game balls are rented is not required in a so-called cash machine.

The control device collective unit 93 includes a payout control device 97, a power supply, and a launch control device 98. The payout control device 97 and the power supply and launch control device 98 are arranged so as to be stacked in the front-rear direction so that the payout control device 97 is behind the pachinko machine 10.

The payout control device 97 is configured by accommodating a payout control board that controls the payout device 96 in a board box. In this case, the same fraud suppression means as the board box 83 of the main control device 81 may be applied to the board box of the payout control device 97.

The power supply and launch control device 98 is configured by accommodating a power supply and a launch control board in a board box, and the board generates and outputs predetermined power required by various control devices and the like, and is further determined by a player. The launch of the game ball is controlled by operating the firing handle 54. In addition, the pachinko machine 10 has a storage and retention function for various data, and can maintain the state at the time of a power failure even in the unlikely event of a power failure, and can return to the state at the time of a power failure when recovering from the power failure. It has become like.

<Electrical configuration>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to the block diagram of FIG.

The MPU 202 is mounted on the main control board 201 provided in the main control device 81. The MPU 202 is a ROM 203 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 202, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 203 is executed. A certain RAM 204, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, various counter circuits as a random number generator, and the like are built-in.

The MPU 202 is provided with an input port and an output port, respectively. A power failure monitoring board 205, a payout control device 97, various detection sensors 211a to 211e, etc. provided in the main control device 81 are connected to the input side of the MPU 202. In this case, a power supply and a launch control device 98 are connected to the power failure monitoring board 205, and power is supplied to the MPU 202 via the power failure monitoring board 205. Further, as a part of various detection sensors 211a to 211e, a winning ball entry section (payout compatible ball entry section) such as a general winning opening 31, a variable winning device 32, an upper operating port 33, a lower operating port 34, and a through gate 35, etc. A plurality of detection sensors provided in the above are connected, and a winning determination (ball entry determination) for each ball entry portion is performed in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81. Further, in the MPU 202, the jackpot generation lottery is executed based on the winning of the upper operating port 33 and the lower operating port 34, and the support generation lottery is executed based on the winning of the through gate 35.

A power failure monitoring board 205, a payout control device 97, and an effect control device 82 are connected to the output side of the MPU 202. For example, a prize ball command is output to the payout control device 97 based on the winning determination result for the winning ball corresponding to the prize. In this case, the command information storage area 225 of the ROM 203 is referred to when the prize ball command is output. Then, when the winning to the general winning opening 31 is specified, the prize ball command corresponding to the payout of 10 game balls is output, and when the winning to the variable winning device 32 is specified, 15 prizes are output. A prize ball command corresponding to the payout of the game ball is output, and when a prize is specified for the upper operating port 33, a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of the three game balls is output and the lower operating port 34 is output. When the prize is specified, the prize ball command corresponding to the payout of four game balls is output.

The effect control device 82 is provided with effect commands for various special figures such as variation commands, type commands, variation end commands, opening commands, and ending commands related to the special figure game times, and variation commands and type commands related to the normal figure game times. , Various end command, opening command, ending command, and other production commands for general drawing are output. In this case, the command information storage area 225 of the ROM 203 is referred to when outputting these various commands. Details of these various commands will be described later. It should be noted that each of the above commands is configured as information on a predetermined number of bytes, and includes various information as information on the predetermined number of bytes.

Further, on the output side of the MPU 202, a variable winning drive unit 32c for opening and closing the opening / closing door 32b of the variable winning device 32, an electric accessory driving unit 34b for opening / closing the electric accessory 34a of the lower operating port 34, and a main display unit. 43 and the display unit 44 for accessories are connected. Various driver circuits are provided on the main control board 201, and the MPU 202 executes drive control of various drive units through the driver circuits.

That is, in the open / close execution mode, the drive control of the variable winning drive unit 32c is executed in the MPU 202 so that the large winning opening 32a is opened and closed. Further, when the electric accessory 34a is won in the open state, the drive control of the electric accessory drive unit 34b is executed in the MPU 202 so that the electric accessory 34a is opened and closed. Further, in each special figure game, the display control of the first result display unit AS or the second result display unit BS in the main display unit 43 is executed in the MPU 202, and the main display control is performed in the open / close execution mode of the variable winning device 32. The display control of the round display unit RS on the display unit 43 is executed. Then, the display control of the accessory display unit 44 is executed in the MOU 202 during the normal game game, and the support state is executed in the accessory display unit 44 in the support state in which the open state of the electric accessory 34a is won. Display control indicating winning is executed.

Furthermore, an external output terminal 99 is connected to the output side of the MPU 202, and through this external output terminal 99, the management control device (hall computer HC) on the game hall side is informed of the entry into various ball entry sections and a big hit. Information about the lottery result such as is output. This makes it possible to grasp the state of the pachinko machine 10 and the like with the hall computer HC.

The power failure monitoring board 205 relays between the main control board 201 and the power supply and launch control device 98, and monitors the DC stable 24 volt voltage, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply and launch control device 98. The payout control device 97 controls the payout of prize balls and rental balls by the payout device 96 based on the prize ball command input from the main control device 81.

The power supply and the launch control device 98 are connected to, for example, a commercial power supply (external power supply) in a game hall or the like. Then, based on the external power supplied from the commercial power source, the operating power required for each of the main control board 201, the payout control device 97, and the like is generated, and the generated operating power is supplied. Further, the power supply and the launch control device 98 are responsible for launch control of the game ball launch mechanism 53, and the game ball launch mechanism 53 is driven when predetermined launch conditions are satisfied.

The staging control device 82 is a display light emitting unit 63 and a speaker unit provided in each of the reserved light emitting units 45 to 47 provided in the variable display unit 36 and the front door frame 14 based on various commands input from the main control device 81. The 64 is driven and controlled, and the display control device 212 is controlled.

The display control device 212 executes the display control of the symbol display device 41 based on the command input from the effect control device 82. In this case, the staging control device 82 determines the variation display time of the symbol in the symbol display device 41 and the type of the combination of the symbols to be finally stopped and displayed based on various commands input from the main control device 81. Execute a lottery for the presence or absence of reach and the content of the reach effect.

Here, the display contents of the symbol display device 41 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 6 is a diagram showing a display screen G of the symbol display device 41.

As shown in FIG. 6A, the display screen G of the symbol display device 41 has three symbols, upper, middle, and lower, in the substantially central portion of the display screen G as an area for variable display of the special figure game times. Columns Z1, Z2, and Z3 are set. Each symbol row Z1 to Z3 is configured by arranging a main symbol and a sub symbol in a predetermined order. Specifically, in the upper symbol row Z1, nine types of main symbols "1" to "9" are arranged in descending order of numbers, and one sub symbol is arranged between each main symbol. .. In the lower symbol row Z3, nine types of main symbols "1" to "9" are arranged in ascending order of numbers, and one sub symbol is arranged between each main symbol. That is, the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 are composed of 18 symbols. On the other hand, in the middle symbol column Z2, nine types of main symbols "1" to "9" are arranged in ascending order of numbers, and then between the main symbol of "9" and the main symbol of "1". The main symbol of "4" is additionally arranged in the above, and one sub symbol is arranged between each of these main symbols. That is, only in the middle symbol row Z2, 10 main symbols are arranged and composed of 20 symbols. Then, on the display screen G, the symbols of each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are variably displayed so as to scroll in a predetermined direction with periodicity. Further, as shown in FIG. 6B, on the display screen G, three symbols are stopped and displayed for each symbol row, and as a result, a total of nine symbols of 3 × 3 are stopped and displayed. It is supposed to be done.

Further, five effective lines, that is, a left line L1, a middle line L2, a right line L3, a right-down line L4, and a right-up line L5 are set on the display screen G. Then, the variable display is stopped in the order of the upper symbol row Z1 → the lower symbol row Z3 → the middle symbol row Z2, and all the symbol rows Z1 are formed in a state where a combination of symbols with the same number is formed on any of the effective lines. When the variation display of ~ Z3 is completed, the jackpot moving image is displayed as the occurrence of the normal jackpot result or the 15R probability variation jackpot result described later.

In this pachinko machine 10, the main symbols with odd numbers (1, 3, 5, 7, 9) correspond to "specific symbols", and when a 15R probability variation jackpot result occurs, the same specific symbol The combination is stopped and displayed. In addition, the main symbols with even numbers (2, 4, 6, 8) correspond to "non-specific symbols", and when a normal jackpot result occurs, the combination of the same non-specific symbols is stopped and displayed. To.

Further, in the case of the explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result described later, the variation display of all the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 is completed in the state where the combination of the symbols with different numbers is formed, and then the explicit moving image is displayed. It is designed to be displayed. Further, in the case of an unspecified 2R probability variation jackpot result or a special deviation result, which will be described later, the variation display of all the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 is completed in a state where a combination of symbols with different numbers is formed, and then the variation display is completed. , Common videos are displayed.

The mode of variable display of symbols in the symbol display device 41 is not limited to the above, and is arbitrary, such as the number of symbol rows, the direction of variable display of symbols in the symbol row, the number of symbols in each symbol row, and the like. Can be changed as appropriate.

The first reserved display area Ga corresponding to the first reserved light emitting unit 45 is set on the left side at the lower part of the display screen G, and corresponds to the second reserved light emitting unit 46 on the right side at the lower part of the display screen G. The second reserved display area Gb is set.

In the first hold display area (non-priority side hold display area) Ga, the same number of unit hold display areas Ga1 to Ga4 as the maximum number of holds when the game ball wins the upper operating port 33 are arranged side by side in the left-right direction. It is displayed as a partition. Specifically, when the game ball wins the upper operating opening 33, the maximum number of holdings is 4, and in correspondence with this, the first holding display area Ga includes the first unit holding display areas Ga1 and the second. The unit hold display area Ga2, the third unit hold display area Ga3, and the fourth unit hold display area Ga4 are set.

For example, when the number of holdings when the game ball wins in the upper operating port 33 is 1, a predetermined holding image is displayed only in the first unit holding display area Ga1, and the game ball is placed in the upper operating port 33. When the number of reserved images is four, a predetermined reserved image is displayed in all of the first unit reserved display area Ga1 to the fourth unit reserved display area Ga4.

Further, in the second hold display area (priority side hold display area) Gb, the same number of unit hold display areas Gb1 to Gb4 as the maximum number of holds when the game ball wins the lower operating port 34 are arranged side by side in the left-right direction. It is displayed in a section so that it can be displayed. Specifically, when the game ball wins the lower operating port 34, the maximum number of holdings is 4, and in correspondence with this, the second holding display area Gb includes the first unit holding display area Gb1 and the second. The unit hold display area Gb2, the third unit hold display area Gb3, and the fourth unit hold display area Gb4 are set.

For example, when the number of holdings when the game ball wins in the lower operating port 34 is 1, the holding image is displayed only in the first unit holding display area Gb1, and the game ball wins in the lower operating opening 34. When the number of reserved images is 4, the reserved image is displayed in all of the 1st unit reserved display area Gb1 to the 4th unit reserved display area Gb4.

The area that does not overlap with the above-mentioned symbol columns Z1 to Z3 and the reserved display areas Ga and Gb on the display screen G, more specifically, the upper part of the display screen G is a normal figure display area as a variable display area of the normal figure game times. P is set. The normal figure display area P is composed of a plurality of (two) display units, and variable display is possible by switching the display color in each of these display units. Further, the normal symbol display area P is smaller than the variable display area in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, and each display unit in the normal symbol display area P is smaller than each symbol (main symbol and sub symbol).

The normal map display area P corresponds to the accessory display unit 44, and when the variable display is performed by the accessory display unit 44, the variable display is also performed in the normal map display area P. Then, the result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning of the through gate 35 is displayed on the accessory display unit 44 together with the accessory display unit 44.

On the right side of the upper part of the display screen G (more specifically, the right side of the normal figure display area P), a third hold display area Gc corresponding to the third hold light emitting unit 47 is set.

The third hold display area Gc is divided and displayed so that the same number of unit hold display areas Gc1 to Gc4 as the maximum number of holds when the game ball wins the through gate 35 are arranged side by side in the left-right direction. Specifically, when the game ball wins the through gate 35, the maximum number of holdings is 4, and in correspondence with this, the 3rd holding display area Gc includes the 1st unit holding display area Gc1 and the 2nd unit. The hold display area Gc2, the third unit hold display area Gc3, and the fourth unit hold display area Gc4 are set.

For example, when the number of holdings when the game ball wins the through gate 35 is 1, a predetermined holding image is displayed only in the first unit holding display area Gc1, and the game ball wins the through gate 35. When the number of reserved images is 4, a predetermined reserved image is displayed in all of the 1st unit reserved display area Gc1 to the 4th unit reserved display area Gc4.

<About various counters>
Next, the operation of the pachinko machine 10 configured as described above will be described.

The MPU 202 uses various counter information during the game to perform a big hit generation lottery, a display setting of the main display unit 43, a symbol display setting of the symbol display device 41, a display setting of the accessory display unit 44, and the like. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 7, a jackpot random number counter C1 used for a lottery for generating jackpots, and a jackpot type counter C2 used for determining a jackpot type such as a probabilistic jackpot result or a normal jackpot result. The reach random number counter C3 used for the reach lottery when the symbol display device 41 deviates and fluctuates, the random number initial value counter CINI used for setting the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1, and the first result display unit AS of the main display unit 43. And the second result display unit BS and the first variation type counter CS1 for determining the variation display time of the symbol sequences Z1 to Z3 in the symbol display device 41 are used. Further, when determining the opening random number counter C4 used for lottery as to whether or not the electric accessory 34a of the lower operating port 34 is to be in the electric combination open state, and the opening type in which the opening pattern of the electric accessory 34a is set. The open type counter C5 to be used and the second variable type counter CS2 for determining the variable display time of the accessory display unit 44 and the accessory display unit 44 in the symbol display device 41 are used.

Each of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS1, C4 to C5, and CS2 is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time the counter is updated, and the counter returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is updated at short intervals, and the updated value is appropriately stored in the lottery counter buffer 231 set in a predetermined area of the RAM 204. In the lottery counter buffer 231, the information corresponding to the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the first variable type counter CS1 is when a prize is generated in the upper operating port 33 or the lower operating port 34. It is stored in the reserved ball storage area 232 as the acquisition information storage means.

The holding ball storage area 232 includes a holding area RE including a holding area Ra for the first result display unit and a holding area Rb for the second result display unit, and a first execution area AE1. The holding areas Ra and Rb include a first area Ra1, Rb1, a second area Ra2, Rb2, a third area Ra3, Rb3, and a fourth area Ra4, Rb4, respectively, and have an upper working port 33 or a lower working port 34, respectively. Each numerical information of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the first variable type counter CS1 stored in the lottery counter buffer 231 is one of the pending information according to the winning history. Stored in the area of. The reserved information corresponds to special information.

In this case, in the first area Ra1, Rb1 to the fourth area Ra4, Rb4, when the upper operating port 33 or the lower operating port 34 is awarded a plurality of times in succession, the first area Ra1, Rb1 → the first. Numerical information is stored in the order of 2 areas Ra2, Rb2 → 3rd area Ra3, Rb3 → 4th areas Ra4, Rb4 in chronological order. By providing each of the four areas in this way, up to four winning histories of the game balls to the upper operating port 33 or the lower operating port 34 can be reserved and stored. Further, a total reserved number storage area is provided in the reserved ball storage area 232, and the number of winning histories stored in the upper operating port 33 or the lower operating port 34 is specified in the total reserved number storage area. Information to do is stored.

The first execution area AE1 is an area for moving each value stored in the first areas Ra1 and Rb1 of the hold areas Ra and Rb when the variable display of the main display unit 43 is started, and is a special feature of 1. At the start of the game round, a hit / fail determination is made based on various numerical information stored in the first execution area AE1.

More specifically, the jackpot random number counter C1 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of, for example, 0 to 599, reach the maximum value (that is, 599), and then return to 0. In particular, when the jackpot random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the jackpot random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 599). The jackpot random number counter C1 is periodically updated and stored in the reserved ball storage area 232 of the RAM 204 at the timing when the game ball wins in the upper operating port 33 or the lower operating port 34. More specifically, it is stored in the holding area Ra for the first result display unit of the RAM 204 at the timing when the game ball wins in the upper operating port 33, and the second result display unit of the RAM 204 at the timing when the game ball wins in the lower operating port 34. It is stored in the reserved area Rb.

The value of the random number that wins the big hit is stored as a hit / miss table (hit / miss information group) in the hit / miss table storage area 221 as the hit / miss information group storage means in the ROM 203. Here, the contents of the pass / fail table will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 8, as the hit / miss table for the special figure, the hit / miss table for the special figure (the hit / miss information group for the low probability) for the low probability mode of FIG. 8 (a) and the high probability of the high probability of FIG. 8 (b). A special figure pass / fail table for the mode (high probability pass / fail information group) is set. That is, in the pachinko machine 10, a low probability mode (low probability state) and a high probability mode (high probability state) are set as the lottery mode in the winning / failing lottery means.

Under the gaming state in which the winning / failing table for the low probability mode is referred to in the lottery for the special figure, as shown in FIG. 8A, the value of the random number that wins the big hit is two. On the other hand, under the gaming state in which the winning / failing table for the high probability mode is referred to at the time of the lottery, as shown in FIG. 8B, the value of the random number that wins the big hit is 20. If the winning probability in the high probability mode is higher than that in the low probability mode, the number and value of the random numbers to be won are arbitrary.

Further, in each lottery mode, the lottery result is a result other than the value of the random number that is a big hit, but in this pachinko machine 10, two types of a special loss result and a normal loss result are set as the loss result. Has been done. These differences will be described later.

The jackpot type counter C2 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 29, reach the maximum value (that is, 29), and then return to 0. Here, in the present embodiment, a plurality of jackpot results are set. These plurality of big hit results are (1) the mode of opening / closing control of the variable winning device 32 in the opening / closing execution mode, (2) the lottery mode in the winning / failing lottery means after the opening / closing execution mode ends, and (3) the lower after the opening / closing execution mode ends. By providing differences in the three conditions of the support mode in the electric accessory 34a of the operating port 34, a plurality of jackpot results are set.

Here, as an aspect of opening / closing control of the variable winning device 32 in the opening / closing execution mode, the frequency of winning the variable winning device 32 from the start to the end of the opening / closing execution mode is relatively high or low. A high-frequency winning mode and a low-frequency winning mode are set. Specifically, in the high-frequency winning mode, the large winning opening 32a is opened and closed 15 times (high-frequency use times) from the start to the end of the open / close execution mode, and one opening is 30 sec (high-frequency time). ) Has elapsed, or until the number of winnings in the large winning opening 32a reaches 10 (high frequency number). On the other hand, in the low frequency winning mode, the large winning opening 32a is opened and closed twice (low frequency use) from the start to the end of the open / close execution mode, and one opening is 0.2 sec (low frequency time). Is continued until the elapse of the game or until the number of winnings in the large winning opening 32a reaches 6 (low frequency number).

In this case, in the pachinko machine 10, in the situation where the firing handle 54 is operated by the player, the gaming ball launching mechanism 53 is set so that one gaming ball is launched toward the gaming area every 0.6 sec. Drive controlled. On the other hand, in the low frequency winning mode, the opening time of one large winning opening 32a is 0.2 sec as described above. That is, in the low-frequency winning mode, the opening time of one large winning opening 32a is shorter than the firing cycle of the game ball. Therefore, in the open / close execution mode in which the low frequency winning mode is applied, the winning of the game ball does not substantially occur.

The number of times the large winning opening 32a is opened and closed in the high-frequency winning mode and the low-frequency winning mode, and the opening limit time for one opening and the opening limit number for one opening are in the low-frequency winning mode in the high-frequency winning mode. As long as the frequency of winning a prize in the variable winning device 32 increases from the start to the end of the opening / closing execution mode, the value is not limited to the above value and is arbitrary. Specifically, if the high-frequency winning mode has a larger number of openings and closings than the low-frequency winning mode, the opening limit time for one opening is long, or the opening limit number for one opening is set to be large. good.

However, in order to clarify the difference in benefits between the high-frequency winning mode and the low-frequency winning mode, in the open / close execution mode related to the low-frequency winning mode, the variable winning device 32 does not substantially win a prize. It is good to have a configuration. For example, in the high frequency winning mode, the product of the firing cycle of the game ball and the opening limit number is set shorter than the opening limit time for one opening, while in the low frequency winning mode, one opening is set. The product of the firing cycle of the game ball and the open limit number may be set longer than the open limit time. Further, even if the firing interval of the game ball and the opening time of one large winning opening 32a are not the above, in the low frequency winning mode, the latter is set to be shorter than the former. It is possible to easily realize a configuration in which a prize is not substantially generated in the variable winning device 32.

As a support mode in the electric accessory 34a of the lower operating port 34, the electric accessory 34a of the lower operating port 34 is compared in a situation where the launch of the game ball is continued in the same manner with respect to the game area. Low-frequency support mode (low-frequency support state or low-frequency guide state) and high-frequency support mode (high-frequency support state or high-frequency guide state) so that the frequency of opening states per unit time is relatively high or low. And are set.

Specifically, in the low-frequency support mode and the high-frequency support mode, the probability of winning the support state (electrical role open state) in the electric accessory open lottery using the open random number counter C4 is the same (for example, both 1 /). Although it is 2), in the high frequency support mode, the number of times that the electric accessory 34a is opened when the electric role open state is won is set more than in the low frequency support mode, and one more time. The opening time of is set long. In this case, when the electric accessory open state is won in the high frequency support mode and the electric accessory 34a is opened multiple times, the electric accessory 34a is closed from the end of one open state to the start of the next open state. The time is set shorter than the one-time opening time. Furthermore, in the high-frequency support mode, the minimum secured time for the next electric accessory opening lottery to be held after one electric accessory opening lottery is set is shorter than in the low-frequency support mode. Has been done. The difference in the opening / closing mode of the electric accessory 34a when the support state is won depending on the height of the support mode will be described in detail later.

As described above, in the high frequency support mode, the probability that the lower operating port 34 will be won is higher than in the low frequency support mode. In other words, in the low frequency support mode, the probability of winning the upper operating port 33 is higher than that of the lower operating port 34, but in the high frequency support mode, the lower operating port 34 is more likely than the upper operating port 33. The probability of winning a prize increases. Then, when a prize is won in the lower operating port 34, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out. Therefore, in the high frequency support mode, the player plays a game while not reducing the number of balls held so much. be able to.

The configuration for increasing the frequency of the high-frequency support mode to be in the electric service open state per unit time is not limited to the above, for example, the electric accessory open lottery. It may be configured to increase the probability of winning the electric service open state in. Further, the high-frequency support mode and the low-frequency support mode may be set by differentiating any one of the conditions of the number of times, the opening time, and the winning probability, or any combination of the conditions.

The jackpot type counter C2 is periodically updated and stored in the reserved ball storage area 232 of the RAM 204 at the timing when the game ball wins in the upper operating port 33 or the lower operating port 34. More specifically, it is stored in the holding area Ra for the first result display unit of the RAM 204 at the timing when the game ball wins in the upper operating port 33, and the second result display unit of the RAM 204 at the timing when the game ball wins in the lower operating port 34. It is stored in the reserved area Rb.

The distribution destination of the game result for the jackpot type counter C2 is stored as a distribution table (distribution information group) in the distribution table storage area 222 as the distribution information group storage means in the ROM 203. Here, the contents of the distribution table will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 9, as the distribution table, the distribution table (first distribution information group) for the first result display unit of FIG. 9A and the second result display unit of FIG. 9B are shown. A distribution table (second distribution information group) for use is set.

In the distribution table for the first result display unit, as shown in FIG. 9A, the distribution destination of the game result is a normal jackpot result (low probability corresponding special game result) and an unspecified 2R probability variation jackpot result (non-explicit). Explicit high probability correspondence game result or latent probability change state), explicit 2R probability change jackpot result (explicit high probability correspondence game result or sudden probability change state result), 15R probability change jackpot result (high probability correspondence special game result) are set. Has been done.

The normal jackpot result is a jackpot result in which the open / close execution mode becomes the high-frequency winning mode, and after the open / close execution mode ends, the win / fail lottery mode becomes the low-probability mode and the support mode becomes the high-frequency support mode. However, this high-frequency support mode shifts to the low-frequency support mode when the number of special figure games reaches the end reference number (specifically, 100 times) after the transition. In other words, the normal jackpot result is a jackpot result that shifts the gaming state to the normal jackpot state (low probability corresponding special gaming state).

The unspecified 2R probability variation jackpot result is a jackpot result in which the open / close execution mode becomes the low frequency winning mode, and after the open / close execution mode ends, the win / fail lottery mode becomes the high probability mode and the support mode becomes the low frequency support mode. be. In other words, the unspecified 2R probability variation jackpot result is a jackpot result that shifts the gaming state to the unspecified 2R probability variation jackpot state (unspecified high probability corresponding gaming state).

The explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result is a jackpot result in which the open / close execution mode becomes the low frequency winning mode, and after the open / close execution mode ends, the win / fail lottery mode becomes the high probability mode and the support mode becomes the high frequency support mode. .. The high-frequency support mode continues until the lottery result in the winning / losing lottery becomes a big hit state and the state shifts to the big hit state. In other words, the explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result is a jackpot result that shifts the gaming state to the explicit 2R probability variation jackpot state (explicit high probability corresponding gaming state).

The 15R probability variation jackpot result is a jackpot result in which the opening / closing execution mode becomes the high-frequency winning mode, and after the opening / closing execution mode ends, the winning / failing lottery mode becomes the high-probability mode and the support mode becomes the high-frequency support mode. The high-frequency support mode continues until the lottery result in the winning / losing lottery becomes a big hit state and the state shifts to the big hit state. In other words, the 15R probability variation jackpot result is a jackpot result that shifts the gaming state to the 15R probability variation jackpot state (high probability corresponding special gaming state).

In relation to each of the above game states, the normal game state means a state in which the winning / failing lottery mode is a low probability mode and the support mode is a low frequency support mode.

In the distribution table for the first result display unit, among the values of the jackpot type counter C2 of "0 to 29", "0 to 9" corresponds to the normal jackpot result, and "10 to 14" is not specified. It corresponds to the 2R probability variation jackpot result, "15-19" corresponds to the explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result, and "20-29" corresponds to the 15R probability variation jackpot result.

As described above, since the unspecified 2R probability variation jackpot result and the explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result are set as the probability variation jackpot results, the modes of the probability variation jackpot results are diversified. That is, when comparing the three types of probability variation jackpot results, the degree of advantage for the player is that the 15R probability variation jackpot result, which is the high frequency winning mode in the open / close execution mode and the high frequency support mode in the support mode, is the highest, and the opening / closing execution is executed. Although it becomes a low frequency winning mode in the mode, it becomes a high frequency support mode in the support mode. The 2R probability variation jackpot result is the next highest, and it becomes a low frequency winning mode in the open / close execution mode and a low frequency support mode in the support mode. The 2R probability variation jackpot result is the lowest. As a result, the monotonousness of the game can be suppressed, and the degree of attention to the game can be increased.

In particular, in the unspecified 2R probability variation jackpot result, after the opening / closing execution mode ends, the winning / failing lottery mode shifts to the high probability mode, but the support mode becomes the low frequency support mode as in the normal gaming state. Then, as a game state, even though the support mode of the electric accessory 34a is common to the low frequency support mode, it is possible to create a game state in which the winning / failing lottery mode becomes the high probability mode. It is possible to predict whether the winning / failing lottery mode is a high-probability mode or a low-probability mode, and it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the game.

On the other hand, in the distribution table for the second result display unit, as shown in FIG. 9B, only the normal jackpot result and the 15R probability variation jackpot result are set as the distribution destinations of the game results. Among the values of the jackpot type counter C2 of "0 to 29", "0 to 9" corresponds to the normal jackpot result, and "10 to 29" corresponds to the 15R probability variation jackpot result.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the distribution mode of the game result when the big hit is won is the case where the big hit is won based on the prize to the upper operating port 33 and the winning to the lower operating port 34. It is different from the case where the jackpot is won based on.

Here, regardless of whether the distribution table for the first result display unit or the distribution table for the second result display unit is used, the probability that the probability variation jackpot result will be the same when the jackpot is won is the same. There is. That is, in the distribution table for the first result display unit, the number of values of the jackpot type counter C2 assigned to the unspecified 2R probability variation jackpot result, the explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result, and the 15R probability variation jackpot result is 20. ing. Further, in the distribution table for the second result display unit, the number of values of the jackpot type counter C2 assigned to the 15R probability variation jackpot result is 20. Therefore, the probability that the winning / failing lottery mode will be in the high probability mode after the end of the open / close execution mode is that the jackpot is won based on the winning of the upper operating port 33 and the jackpot is won based on the winning of the lower operating port 34. It is the same as the case of (specifically, 2/3).

However, if a jackpot is won based on a prize in the lower operating port 34 and a probability variation jackpot result is generated, a 15R probability variation jackpot result is always obtained, whereas a jackpot is won based on a prize in the upper operating port 33. In the case of a probability variation jackpot result, there is a 1/4 probability of an unspecified 2R probability variation jackpot result or an explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result, and a 1/2 probability of a 15R probability variation jackpot result. That is, the probability of occurrence of the 15R probability variation jackpot result, which has the highest degree of advantage for the player among the probability variation jackpot results, is higher when the jackpot is won based on the winning of the lower operating port 34. It will be higher than if you win a big hit based on the prize.

In addition, in the unspecified 2R probability variation jackpot result, as described above, the winning / fail lottery mode shifts to the high probability mode after the end of the open / close execution mode, but the support mode shifts to the low frequency support mode, so that the 15R probability variation jackpot result And when compared with the explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result, the chance of receiving the payout of the game ball is reduced because the electric accessory 34a is less likely to be in the open state, and further, it is shaken based on the distribution table for the second result display unit. It is less likely that a minute lottery will be held.

As described above, there is a clear difference in the advantage for the player between the upper operating port 33 and the lower operating port 34. Therefore, the player will play the game while expecting that the lower operating port 34 of the upper operating port 33 and the lower operating port 34 will be awarded, and the frequency of winning the lower operating port 34 accordingly. The player's attention to the high-frequency support mode increases.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10, when the result is a loss in the winning / failing lottery as described above, the result is a normal loss result or a special loss result. In this case, in the normal out-of-order result that occurs with a relatively high probability when the out-of-order result is obtained, the opening / closing execution mode is not shifted, and the winning / failing lottery mode and the support mode are not changed.

On the other hand, in the case of the special deviation result that occurs with a relatively low probability when the deviation result is obtained, the special deviation state is obtained. In the special out-of-order state, the open / close execution mode is entered in the situation where the out-of-order result is obtained in the winning / failing lottery. However, the opening / closing execution mode of the migration destination is a low-frequency winning mode. Therefore, even if the result is a special deviation, it cannot be expected that the game ball will win the big winning opening 32a. Further, after the end of the open / close execution mode, the transition between the win / fail lottery mode and the support mode does not occur.

By setting the special deviation result as described above, the opening of the large winning opening 32a of the variable winning device 32 can be used as an effect. Here, in the normal gaming state where the winning / failing lottery mode is the low probability mode and the support mode is the low frequency support mode instead of the opening / closing execution mode, if a special deviation result is obtained, the opening / closing execution is executed as the low frequency winning mode. It only shifts to the mode, and then returns to the above-mentioned normal gaming state. On the other hand, when the above-mentioned unspecified 2R probability variation jackpot result occurs, the mode shifts to the open / close execution mode, which is a low-frequency winning mode, and then the support mode is the low-frequency support mode, but the winning / failing lottery mode is high. It becomes a probability mode. Then, the occurrence of the special deviation result and the occurrence of the unspecified 2R probability variation jackpot result under the normal gaming state shift to the open / close execution mode as the same low frequency winning mode, and then the support mode becomes the low frequency support. The difference between the two is that in the former, the winning / failing lottery mode is in the low probability mode, while in the latter, it is in the high probability mode. That is, the occurrence of the special deviation result and the occurrence of the unspecified 2R probability variation jackpot result under the normal gaming state have the same behavior of each movable object such as the behavior of the variable winning device 32 and the behavior of the electric accessory 34a of the lower operating port 34. However, only the internal lottery status will be different. As a result, when the open / close execution mode, which is a low-frequency winning mode, occurs under the normal gaming state, it becomes possible to imagine whether or not the winning / failing lottery mode has subsequently shifted to the high-probability mode. It is possible to increase the degree of attention of.

When the winning / failing lottery mode is the low probability mode, as shown in FIG. 8A, the value of the random number resulting in the special deviation is two, which is the same as the value of the random number winning the jackpot. On the other hand, when the winning / failing lottery mode is the high probability mode, as shown in FIG. 8 (b), the value of the random number resulting in the special deviation is special in the number of random number values of the jackpot winning and the low probability mode. It is one that is less than the number of random numbers that result in deviation. By reducing the number of random number values that result in special deviations to be smaller than the number of random number values that win big hits in high-probability mode, the jackpot is greater than the probability of special deviation results in high-probability mode. You can increase the probability of winning. In addition, by setting the number of random numbers that result in special deviations less in the high probability mode than in the low probability mode, the probability of a special deviation result in the high probability mode is lower than in the low probability mode. Can also be lowered.

The reach random number counter C3 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of, for example, 0 to 238, reach the maximum value (that is, 238), and then return to 0. The reach random number counter C3 is periodically updated and stored in the reserved ball storage area 232 of the RAM 204 at the timing when the game ball wins the upper operating port 33 or the lower operating port 34. More specifically, it is stored in the holding area Ra for the first result display unit of the RAM 204 at the timing when the game ball wins in the upper operating port 33, and the second result display unit of the RAM 204 at the timing when the game ball wins in the lower operating port 34. It is stored in the reserved area Rb. Then, it is decided whether or not to generate the reach based on the reach table stored in the reach table storage area of the ROM 203. However, in the special figure game round that shifts to the open / close execution mode, the MPU 202 determines the reach generation regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3. The number of reach random number counters C3 corresponding to the occurrence of the reach display is the same in each game state, but may be set individually according to the game state. For example, when the support mode is the high frequency support mode, the number of reach random number counters C3 corresponding to the occurrence of the reach display may be set to be larger than that in the low frequency support mode.

Here, the reach display (reach state) includes a symbol display device 41 capable of performing variable display (or variable display) of a symbol (picture), and the opening / closing execution mode of the variable winning device 32 is a high-frequency winning mode. In the special figure game times, the stop display result after the variable display is the special display result, and the stop display result is displayed after the variable display (or variable display) of the symbol (picture) on the symbol display device 41 is started. It is a display state for making the player think that it is a variable display state in which the special display result is likely to occur before the derivation display is performed.

In other words, by stopping and displaying some of the symbols among the plurality of symbols displayed on the display screen of the symbol display device 41, a combination of jackpot symbols corresponding to the occurrence of the high frequency winning mode is established. It is a display state in which a combination of reach symbols that may be displayed is displayed, and in that state, a variable display of symbols is performed in the remaining symbol rows.

More specifically, as a pre-stage for ending the variable display of the symbol, a combination of jackpot symbols corresponding to the occurrence of the high frequency winning mode is established on the preset effective line in the display screen of the symbol display device 41. A reach line is formed by stopping and displaying a combination of reach symbols that may be used, and in a situation where the reach line is formed, a variable display of the symbols is performed by the final stop symbol sequence.

To specifically explain the display contents of FIG. 6, first, high-speed fluctuation display is started for all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. In this case, it is difficult or impossible to recognize which symbol is displayed. After that, the variation display mode of the upper symbol sequence Z1 is switched from the high-speed variation display to the low-speed variation display in which the player can easily or can recognize the symbol displayed. Then, when the variation display of the upper symbol sequence Z1 is completed, the variation display mode of the lower symbol sequence Z3 is switched from the high-speed variation display to the low-speed variation display. After that, the variable display of the lower symbol column Z3 ends. In this case, the reach line is formed by stopping and displaying the main symbols with the same numbers on any of the effective lines L1 to L5. Then, when the fluctuation display of the middle symbol row Z2 is switched from the high-speed fluctuation display to the low-speed fluctuation display and the open / close execution mode is generated, the main symbol with the same number as the main symbol forming the reach line is attached. Is stopped and displayed on the reach line, and the variation display of the symbols in the symbol row Z2 in the middle row is terminated.

Further, in the reach display, in the state where the combination of the reach symbols is displayed as described above, the variable display of the symbols is performed in the remaining symbol rows, and a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a moving image on the background screen to reach the reach. It includes those that perform an effect and those that perform a reach effect by displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image on substantially the entire display screen after reducing or hiding the combination of reach symbols. Further, when the reach display is performed or before the reach display, it is determined whether or not to perform the advance notice display using a predetermined image such as a predetermined character by using the reach random number counter C3 or another counter. You may.

The first variation type counter CS1 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of, for example, 0 to 198, reach the maximum value (that is, 198), and then return to 0. The first variation type counter CS1 determines in the MPU 202 the variation display time in the first result display unit AS and the second result display unit BS of the main display unit 43 and the variation display time of the symbol in the symbol display device 41. Used in. The first variation type counter CS1 is updated once every time the normal processing described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the normal processing. Then, the first variation type counter CS1 is stored in the reserved ball storage area 232 of the RAM 204 at the timing when the game ball wins the upper operating port 33 or the lower operating port 34. More specifically, it is stored in the holding area Ra for the first result display unit of the RAM 204 at the timing when the game ball wins in the upper operating port 33, and the second result display unit of the RAM 204 at the timing when the game ball wins in the lower operating port 34. It is stored in the reserved area Rb.

In the lottery counter buffer 231, the information corresponding to the open random number counter C4, the open type counter C5, and the second variable type counter CS2 is used as an acquisition information storage means on the normal drawing side when a prize is won in the through gate 35. It is stored in the electric service holding area 233.

The electric service holding area 233 includes an electric service holding area Rc and a second execution area AE2 for a normal drawing. The hold area Rc includes a first area Rc1, a second area Rc2, a third area Rc3, and a fourth area Rc4, and is stored in the lottery counter buffer 231 according to the winning history of the through gate 35. The numerical information of the open random number counter C4, the open type counter C5, and the second variable type counter CS2 is stored in any of the areas as hold information.

In this case, in the first area Rc1 to the fourth area Rc4, when the through gate 35 is awarded a plurality of times in succession, the first area Rc1 → the second area Rc2 → the third area Rc3 → the fourth area. Each numerical information is stored in chronological order in the order of Rc4. By providing each of the four areas in this way, up to four winning histories of the game balls to the through gate 35 can be reserved and stored.

The second execution area AE2 for the normal drawing is an area for moving each value stored in the first area Rc1 of the hold area Rc when the variable display of the accessory display unit 44 is started. At the start of the Fuzu game round, an opening determination or the like is performed based on various numerical information stored in the second execution area AE2.

More specifically, the open random number counter C4 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 199, reach the maximum value (that is, 199), and then return to 0. The open random number counter C4 is periodically updated and stored in the electric service holding area 233 of the RAM 204 at the timing when the game ball wins the through gate 35. Then, at a predetermined timing, a general drawing lottery is performed as to whether or not to control the electric accessory 34a to the open state by the value of the stored open random number counter C4.

The value of the random number that is won in the support state in the normal drawing lottery is stored as a winning / losing table for the normal drawing in the winning / failing table storage area 221 as the winning / failing information group storage means in the ROM 203. As already explained, in the normal map lottery, the probability of being in the support state (probability of winning the support state) is the same regardless of the level of the support mode, and the pass / fail table for the normal map stored in ROM 203 is also available. You are using a common table. For example, as shown in FIG. 8C, if the open random number counter C4 = 0 to 99, the electric accessory 34a is shifted to the support state for controlling the open state, and C4 = 100. If it is 199, it is set so as not to shift the electric accessory 34a to the support state without controlling it to the open state.

Here, as an aspect of opening / closing control of the electric accessory 34a in the support state, the frequency of winning the electric accessory 34a from the start to the end of the support state is relatively high or low. A high prize support state and a low prize support state are set. Specifically, in the high winning support state, the electric accessory 34a is opened and closed three times (high frequency use times) from the start to the end of the support state, and one opening is 3 sec (high frequency time). Is continued until the elapse of time or until the number of winnings in the electric accessory 34a (lower working port 34) reaches 6 (high frequency number). On the other hand, in the low winning support state, the electric accessory 34a is opened and closed twice (low frequency use) from the start to the end of the support state, and one opening is 0.2 sec (low frequency time). It is continued until the lapse of time or until the number of winnings in the electric accessory 34a (lower working port 34) reaches 3 (low frequency number).

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the firing handle 54 is operated by the player, the gaming ball launching mechanism 53 is such that one gaming ball is launched toward the gaming area every 0.6 sec. Is driven and controlled. On the other hand, in the low winning support state, the opening time of the electric accessory 34a at one time is 0.2 sec as described above. That is, in the low winning support state, the opening time of the electric accessory 34a once is shorter than the firing cycle of the game ball. Therefore, in the support state related to the low winning support state, the winning of the game ball does not substantially occur.

The number of times the electric accessory 34a is opened and closed in the high winning support state and the low winning support state, and the opening limit time for one opening and the opening limit number for one opening are in the low winning support state in the high winning support state. As long as the frequency of winning the lower operating port 34 from the start to the end of the support state is higher than that, the value is not limited to the above value and is arbitrary. Specifically, if the high winning support state has more opening and closing times than the low winning support state, the opening limit time for one opening is long, or the opening limit number for one opening is set to be large. good.

However, in order to clarify the difference in benefits between the high prize support state and the low prize support state, the lower operating port 34 is not substantially won in the support state related to the low prize support state. It is good to say. For example, in the high winning support state, the product of the firing cycle of the game ball and the opening limit number is set shorter than the opening limit time for one opening, while in the low winning support state, one opening is set. The product of the firing cycle of the game ball and the open limit number may be set longer than the open limit time. Further, even if the firing interval of the game ball and the opening time of the lower operating port 34 once are not as described above, in the low winning support state, the latter is set to be shorter than the former. It is possible to easily realize a configuration in which a prize is not substantially generated in the lower operating port 34.

The distribution destination of the game result for the open type counter C5 is stored as a distribution table (distribution information group) in the distribution table storage area 222 as the distribution information group storage means in the ROM 203. Here, the contents of the distribution table for ordinary drawings will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 10, as the distribution table for the normal map, the distribution table for the normal map in the low frequency support mode of FIG. 10 (a) and the normal distribution table in the high frequency support mode of FIG. 10 (b). A distribution table for figures is set.

As shown in FIGS. 10A and 10B, the first opening result A (first support result) and the second opening result A (first support result) are used in any of the distribution tables for the normal map as the distribution destinations for winning the normal map. The opening result B (second support result) and the third opening result C (third support result) are set. In each of these opening results A to C, the first opening result A is the distribution result in which the low winning support state is obtained, and the second opening result B and the third opening result C are the distribution results in which the high winning support state is obtained. .. And, in the distribution table for normal drawing in the low frequency support mode and the distribution table for normal drawing in the high frequency support mode, the distribution table for general drawing in the high frequency support mode is in the higher prize support state. It is easy to distribute to the distribution result (2nd open result B and 3rd open result C) (2/3 is distributed to the high winning support state), and the distribution table for normal drawing in the low frequency support mode is better. It is easy to distribute to the distribution result (first open result A) that is in the low prize support state (2/3 is distributed to the low prize support state).

Here, in detail about each of the opening results A to C, the contents of the effects performed by the effect control device 82 and the display control device 212, which are the control devices on the sub side, are different from each of the release results A to C. Multiple types of opening results are set for each. That is, the first opening result A1, A2, and A3 are set as the lower group in the group of the first opening result A, and the second opening result B1 is set as the lower group in the group of the second opening result B. , B2, B3 are set, and the third opening result C1, C2, C3 is set as a lower group thereof in the group of the third opening result C. In each of the opening results A1 to A3, B1 to B3, and C1 to C3, the opening mode of the electric accessory 34a is the same as the opening mode of the upper group, but the effect contents on the sub side are different. That is, although the first opening results A1 to A3 are all opening modes in which the low winning support state is set, the production contents are different from each other. Further, although the second opening results B1 to B3 and the third opening results C1 to C3 are all open modes in which a high winning support state is provided, their production contents are different from each other.

In the distribution table for ordinary drawings, the value of the opening type counter C5 is associated with each opening result A to C of the upper group on a one-to-one basis, and the opening results A1 to A3 and B1 to each of the lower groups are associated with each other. B3 and C1 to C3 are also associated with each other on a one-to-one basis. Therefore, on the main control device 81 side, it is possible to grasp the opening mode of the electric accessory 34a as information of each opening result A to C of the upper group, and it is also possible to grasp the effect content thereof. The differences in the production contents will be described in detail later.

As described above, in the MPU 202, the fluctuation display time in the first result display unit AS and the second result display unit BS is determined by using the value of the first variation type counter CS1 stored in the first execution area AE1. However, in making the determination, the variable display time table for special figures in the variable display time table storage area 223 of the ROM 203 is used. Further, in the MPU 202, the stop result in the first result display unit AS and the second result display unit BS is determined by using the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the first execution area AE1. However, in making the determination, the stop result table for special figures in the stop result table storage area 224 of ROM 203 is used.

Further, in the MPU 202, the fluctuation display time in the accessory display unit 44 is determined by using the value of the second variation type counter CS2 stored in the second execution area AE2, and the variation of the ROM 203 is determined in the determination. Display time table A variable display time table for normal drawings in the storage area 223 is used. Further, in the MPU 202, the stop result in the accessory display unit 44 is determined by using the value of the open random number counter C4 and the value of the open type counter C5 stored in the second execution area AE2. The stop result table for normal drawing in the stop result table storage area 224 of ROM 203 is used.

<About various processes executed by the main controller 81>
Next, the timer interrupt processing and the normal processing executed in order to advance the game in each game time by the MPU 202 in the main control device 81 will be described. In the MPU 202, in addition to the timer interrupt processing and the normal processing, the main processing activated when the power is turned on and the NMI interrupt processing activated by inputting a power failure signal to the NMI terminal (non-maskable terminal) are executed. However, the description of these processes will be omitted.

<Timer interrupt processing>
First, the timer interrupt processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This process is periodically activated by the MPU 202 (for example, at a cycle of 2 msec).

In step S101, reading processing of various detection sensors is executed. That is, the state of various detection sensors connected to the main control device 81 is read, and the state of the detection sensor (detection information from the detection sensor) is determined and the detection information (winning detection information) is saved. For example, when it is determined that the ball has entered the upper operating port 33, the winning detection flag for the upper operating port is stored in the various flag storage areas 235 of the RAM 204, and the ball has entered the lower operating port 34. If it is determined that the flag has been set, the winning detection flag for the lower operating port is stored in the various flag storage areas 235. Further, when it is determined that the game ball has passed through the through gate 35, the winning detection flag for the through gate is stored in the various flag storage areas 235 of the RAM 204.

After that, in step S102, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 204.

In the following step S103, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, the open random number counter C4, and the open type counter C5 are updated. Specifically, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, the open random number counter C4, and the open type counter C5 are each incremented by 1, and when the counter values reach the maximum value, they are set to 0 respectively. clear. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C5 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 204.

In the following step S104, a prize-winning process for thru accompanying the prize-winning to the through gate 35 is executed. After that, the process proceeds to step S105, the winning process for the operating port accompanying the winning of the operating ports 33 and 34 is executed, and the timer interrupt process is terminated. Hereinafter, the winning process for the through and the winning process for the operating port will be described in detail.

<Prize processing for through>
First, the winning process for through will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step S201, it is determined whether or not the game ball has won (winned) the through gate 35 by confirming whether or not the winning detection flag for the through gate is stored in the various flag storage areas 235 of the RAM 204. If the game ball has not won the through gate 35, the main winning process is terminated as it is. When the through gate 35 has won a prize, in step S202, an external signal setting process is performed in order to output a signal to the management control device on the game hall side that the game ball has won a prize in the through gate 35. In step S203, a value stored in the hold number storage area for storing the number of hold information in the electric service hold area Rc is read, and the number of hold information stored in the electric service hold area Rc is shown. It is determined whether or not the reserved storage number FN is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment). If the normal figure holding memory number FN is the upper limit value, the main winning process is terminated as it is, and if it is less than the upper limit value, the normal figure reserved storage number FN is incremented by 1 in step S204. Then, in step S205, a process for storing each value of the open random number counter C4, the open type counter C5, and the second variable type counter CS2 is performed, and then, in step S206, the normal figure hold process is executed. , The final winning process is completed. In the process for holding the normal figure, the occurrence of the winning figure is recognized by transmitting the normal figure hold command to the staging control device 82 and the display control device 212, which are the control devices on the sub side (secondary side), and will be described later. This is a process for executing the notice of holding the general map.

The normal map hold command set in step S206 will be transmitted to the staging control device 82 in the external output process (step S501) of the normal process described later, but the staging control device 82 has the normal map hold command. Is received to execute a process for changing the display in the third hold light emitting unit 47 or the normal figure hold display area Gc in accordance with the increase in the number of holds.

Specifically, the staging control device 82 controls each light emitting unit in the third reserved light emitting unit 47 so as to emit light by the number corresponding to the normal figure reserved storage number FN. Further, the effect control device 82 controls the display control device 212 to execute a process for displaying the hold image for the normal figure in the normal figure hold display area Gc. In the normal figure hold display area Gc, the hold images are sequentially displayed from the left side. For example, if the normal figure hold storage number FN is 1, the hold image is displayed in the first unit hold display area Gc1 at the left end. If the reserved storage number FN is 4, the reserved image is displayed in all the reserved display areas Gc1 to Gc4. A detailed description of the process of step S206 will be described later.

<Prize processing for operating port>
Next, the winning process for the operating port will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 13 and 14.

In step S301, it is confirmed whether or not the game ball has won a prize (starting prize) in the upper operating port 33, and whether or not the winning detection flag for the upper operating port 33 is stored in the various flag storage areas 235 of the RAM 204. judge. When it is determined that the game ball has won a prize in the upper operating port 33, in step S302, a prize ball command for paying out three game balls is set in the payout control device 97. In the following step S303, an external signal setting process is performed in order to output a signal to the management control device on the game hall side that the game ball has won a prize in the upper operating port 33. In step S304, the value stored in the hold number storage area of the hold area Ra for the first result display unit is read, and the start hold storage number RaN stored in the hold area Ra for the first result display unit is set. (Hereinafter, also referred to as the first start hold storage number RaN). After that, in step S305, information acquisition processing for storing the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the first variation type counter CS1 is performed, and the main winning process is completed.

When it is determined in step S301 that the game ball has not won the upper operating port 33, in step S306, various flag storage areas of the RAM 204 determine whether or not the game ball has won the lower operating opening 34 (starting winning). The determination is made by confirming whether or not the winning detection flag for the lower operating port 34 is stored in the 235. When it is determined that the game ball has won a prize in the lower operating port 34, a prize ball command for paying out four game balls is set in the payout control device 97 in step S307. In the following step S308, an external signal setting process is performed in order to output a signal to the management control device on the game hall side that the game ball has won a prize in the lower operating port 34. In step S309, the value stored in the hold number storage area of the hold area Rb for the second result display unit is read, and the start hold storage number RbN stored in the hold area Rb for the second result display unit is set. (Hereinafter, also referred to as the second start hold storage number RbN). After that, the information acquisition process is performed in step S305, and the main winning process is completed.

On the other hand, when both step S301 and step S306 are NO, that is, when the game ball does not win in any of the upper operating port 33 and the lower operating port 34, the main winning process is terminated as it is.

The prize ball command set in steps S302 and S307 is transmitted to the payout control device 97 in the external output process of the normal process described later.

Here, the information acquisition process in step S305 will be described in detail with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In the information acquisition process, first, in step S401, the starting hold storage number (special figure hold storage number) N (RaN or RbN) set in step S304 or step S309 described above is the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment). Determine if it is less than. If the start hold storage number N is the upper limit value, this information acquisition process is terminated as it is, and if it is less than the upper limit value, the start hold storage number N of the hold area for the result display unit corresponding in step S402 is set. In addition to incrementing by 1, the value stored in the total reserved number storage area (hereinafter referred to as the common reserved number CRN) in step S403 is incremented by 1.

In the following step S404, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the first variable type counter CS1 are stored in the first storage area of the free storage area of the corresponding result display unit holding area. That is, it is stored in the storage area corresponding to the reserved storage number incremented by 1 in step S402.

That is, when the first start hold storage number RaN for the upper operating port is set, each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the first variable type counter CS1 is incremented. It is stored in the first storage area of the free storage area Ra of the holding area Ra for the working port, that is, the holding area Ra corresponding to the first start holding storage number RaN for the working port, which is incremented by 1 in step S402.

Further, when the second start hold storage number RbN for the lower operating port is set, each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the first variable type counter CS1 is lowered. It is stored in the first storage area of the free storage area of the hold area Rb for the operation port, that is, the hold area Rb corresponding to the second start hold storage number RbN for the lower operation port incremented by 1 in step S402.

In the following steps S405 and S406, the staging control device 82 and the display control device 212, which are the control devices on the sub side (secondary side), recognize that the upper operating port 33 or the lower operating port 34 has won a prize, and will be described later. The confirmation process for hold and the setting process for the hold command, which are the processes for executing the hold notice, are executed. After that, if the winning detection flag is stored, the flag is cleared and the information acquisition process is terminated.

The hold command set in the hold command setting process in step S406 is transmitted to the effect control device 82 in the external output process (step S501) of the normal process described later, but the hold command has an upper operation port. Information on which of the winnings to the working ports 33 and the lower working port 34 is based on is included, and the effect control device 82 receives the holding command to receive each holding light emitting unit. A process for changing the display in the 45, 46 and the hold display areas Ga and Gb in accordance with the increase in the number of holds is executed.

Specifically, in the effect control device 82, when the received hold command corresponds to the upper actuating port 33, each light emitting unit in the first hold light emitting unit 45 corresponds to the first start hold storage number RaN. It is controlled to emit as many lights as the number. When the received hold command corresponds to the lower actuating port 34, each light emitting unit in the second hold light emitting unit 46 is controlled to emit light by the number corresponding to the second start hold storage number RbN. Further, when the command received by the display control device 212 via the staging control device 82 corresponds to the winning of the upper operating port 33, the above-mentioned hold display area Ga for the upper operating port 33 is displayed. Executes the process for displaying the pending image. In the hold display area Ga, the hold images are sequentially displayed from the left side. For example, if the start hold storage number RaN for the upper operating port is 1, the hold image is displayed in the first unit hold display area Ga1 at the left end. If the start hold storage number RaN is 4, the hold image is displayed in all the hold display areas Ga1 to Ga4. Further, when the command received by the display control device 212 via the staging control device 82 corresponds to the winning of the lower operation port 34, the command is held in the hold display area Gb for the lower operation port. Execute the process to display the image. In the hold display area Gb, the hold images are sequentially displayed from the left side. For example, if the start hold storage number RbN for the lower operating port is 1, the hold image is displayed in the first unit hold display area Gb1 at the left end. If the start hold storage number RbN is 4, the hold image is displayed in all the hold display areas Gb1 to Gb4. A detailed description of each process of steps S405 and S406 will be described later.

<Normal processing>
Next, the flow of normal processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The normal process is a process that is started after the main process that is started when the power is turned on is executed, and in the normal process, the main process of the game is executed. As an outline, the processes of steps S501 to S506 are executed as periodic processes having a cycle of 4 msec, and the counter update processes of steps S508 and S509 are executed in the remaining time.

In the normal processing, first, the external signal output processing is executed in step S501. In the external signal output process of step S501, the output data such as the timer interrupt process or the command set in the previous normal process is transmitted to each control device on the sub side. Specifically, the presence or absence of the prize ball command is determined, and if the prize ball command is set, it is transmitted to the payout control device 97. Further, if a special drawing effect command such as a variation command, a type command, or a variation end command or an effect command for a general drawing is set, it is transmitted to the effect control device 82.

Next, in step S502, the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 are updated. Specifically, the first variation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, the counter value is cleared to 0. Then, the update value of the first variation type counter CS1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 204. Further, the second variation type counter CS2 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, the counter value is cleared to 0. Then, the update value of the second variation type counter CS2 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 204.

In the following step S503, a game turn control process for controlling the game in each special figure game turn is executed. In this game round control process, a jackpot determination on the special symbol side, a setting of a symbol variation display by the symbol display device 41, a display control of the main display unit 43, and the like are performed.

After executing the game times control process in step S503, the process proceeds to step S504 to execute the game state transition process. The details will be described later, but by this game state transition process, the game state shifts to the open / close execution mode, the high probability mode, the high frequency support mode, and the like.

In the following step S505, the electric service support process for controlling the game in the game on the normal side is executed. In this electric service support process, the support determination on the normal symbol side, the setting of the symbol variation display by the symbol display device 41, the display control of the accessory display unit 44, and the electric accessory 34a provided in the lower actuating port 34 are used. Drive control, etc.

Each of these processes of steps S503 to S505 will be described in detail later.

After that, in step S506, the game ball launch control process is executed. In the game ball launch control process, the solenoid of the game ball launch mechanism 53 is excited once in a predetermined period (for example, 0.6 sec) on condition that a launch permission signal is input from the power supply and the launch control device 98. .. As a result, the game ball is launched toward the game area PE.

In the following step S507, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next normal process has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in the present embodiment) has elapsed from the start of the previous normal process. Then, the random number initial value counter CINI and the variation type counter CS are repeatedly updated within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal process is reached.

That is, in step S508, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding area of the RAM 204. Further, in step S509, the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 are updated. Specifically, as in step S502, the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 are incremented by 1, and the counter values are cleared to 0 when they reach the maximum value. Then, the updated values of the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 are stored in the corresponding area of the RAM 204.

Here, since the execution time of each process of steps S501 to S506 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal process is not constant and varies. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the random number initial value counter CINI using the remaining time, the random number initial value counter CINI (that is, the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1) can be updated at random, and similarly. The fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 can also be updated at random.

<Game times control process>
Next, the game times control process in step S503 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 16 to 19.

In the game times control process, first, in step S601, it is determined whether or not the open / close execution mode is in progress. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the open / close execution mode flag (open / close execution state information) is stored (stored) in the open / close execution mode flag storage area (open / close execution state information storage means) in the various flag storage areas 235 of the RAM 204. do. The open / close execution mode flag is stored when the game state is shifted to the open / close execution mode in the game state transition process described later, and is deleted when the open / close execution mode is terminated in the game state transition process.

When the open / close execution mode is in progress, this game is performed without executing any of the processes after step S602, that is, the game round start process of steps S603 to S605 and the game round progress process of steps S606 to S609. Ends the control process. That is, in the open / close execution mode, the special figure game round is not started regardless of whether or not the operating openings 33 and 34 have been won.

If it is not in the open / close execution mode, it is determined in step S602 whether or not the main display unit 43 is in the variable display. Specifically, it is determined whether or not either the first result display unit AS or the second result display unit BS is in the variable display. In this determination, whether or not the variation display flag (variation display information) is stored (stored) in the variation display flag storage area (variation display information storage means) in the various flag storage areas 235 of the RAM 204. It is done by judgment. The variation display flag is stored when the variation display is started for either the first result display unit AS or the second result display unit BS, and is cleared when the variation display ends.

If the main display unit 43 is not in the variable display, the process proceeds to the game round start process of steps S603 to S605. In the game round start process, first, in step S603, it is determined whether or not the common hold number CRN, which is the total number of start hold storage numbers RaN and RbN, is “0”. When the common hold number CRN is "0", it means that the start hold storage numbers RaN and RbN are "0" for both the upper working port 33 and the lower working port 34. Therefore, the game times control process is terminated as it is. If the common hold number CRN is not "0", the data stored in the hold area Ra for the first result display unit or the hold area Rb for the second result display unit is set for variable display in step S604. After executing the data setting process of the above, and further executing the variation start process for starting the variation display in the main display unit 43 and the variation display in the symbol display device 41 in step S605, the game round control process is terminated.

Here, the data setting process in step S604 and the fluctuation start process in step S605 will be described in detail below.

First, the data setting process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In the data setting process, first, in step S701, it is determined whether or not the second start hold storage number RbN stored in the hold area Rb for the second result display unit is “0”. When the second start hold storage number RbN is "0", the data setting process for the first result display unit of steps S702 to S707 is executed, and when the second start hold storage number RbN is not "0". Executes the data setting process for the second result display unit of steps S708 to S713.

Here, the case where the data setting process is executed is the case where the common hold number CRN is 1 or more, as described above. In this case, in the data setting process, it is determined whether or not the second start hold storage number RbN is "0", and if it is not "0", that is, the hold information for variable display is displayed for the second result display unit BS. If it is stored, the data stored in the second result display unit hold area Rb should be set for variable display regardless of whether the first start hold storage number RaN is 1 or more. I made it. As a result, when the hold information is stored in both the hold area Ra for the first result display unit and the hold area Rb for the second result display unit, the hold for the second result display unit corresponding to the lower operating port 34 is held. The reserved information stored in the area Rb has priority.

In the data setting process for the first result display unit, first, in step S702, the first start hold storage number RaN of the hold area Ra for the first result display unit is decremented by 1. In the following step S703, the common hold number CRN is decremented by 1. After that, in step S704, the data stored in the first area Ra1 of the hold area Ra for the first result display unit is moved to the first execution area AE1.

After that, in step S705, a process of shifting the data stored in the storage area of the hold area Ra for the first result display unit is executed. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first area Ra1 to the fourth area Ra4 to the lower area side, clearing the data of the first area Ra1 and the second area Ra2 → The data in each area is shifted such as 1st area Ra1, 3rd area Ra3 → 2nd area Ra2, 4th area Ra4 → 3rd area Ra3.

In the following step S706, the second result display unit flag (second result display unit information) is set in the second result display unit flag storage area (second result display unit information storage means) provided in the various flag storage areas 235 of the RAM 204. If it is memorized, it is erased, and if it is not memorized, its state is maintained. The second result display unit flag is information for specifying whether the start of the current variation display is the first result display unit AS or the second result display unit BS.

In the following step S707, a special figure shift command (special figure shift occurrence information) is set, which is information for causing the staging control device 82, which is a control device on the sub side, to recognize that the data in the hold area has been shifted. .. In this case, from the command information storage area 225 of the ROM 203, information that the hold area targeted for the current data shift corresponds to the hold area Ra for the first result display unit, that is, to the upper operating port 33. A special figure shift command including information that it is supported is selected, and the selected special figure shift command is set as a command to be transmitted to the effect control device 82. After that, this data setting process is terminated.

The special figure shift command set in step S707 is transmitted to the staging control device 82 in the external output process in the normal process (FIG. 15). In the effect control device 82, based on the received special figure shift command, the display in the first hold light emitting unit 45 of the variable display unit 36 and the display in the first hold display area Ga of the symbol display device 41 are reduced in the number of holds. Execute the process to change in correspondence with. This will be described in detail later.

In the data setting process for the second result display unit, first, in step S708, the second start hold storage number RbN of the hold area Rb for the second result display unit is decremented by 1. In the following step S709, the common hold number CRN is decremented by 1. After that, in step S710, the data stored in the first area Rb1 of the second result display unit holding area Rb is moved to the first execution area AE1.

After that, in step S711, a process of shifting the data stored in the storage area of the second result display unit holding area Rb is executed. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first area Rb1 to the fourth area Rb4 to the lower area side, clearing the data of the first area Rb1 and the second area Rb2 → The data in each area is shifted such as 1st area Rb1, 3rd area Rb3 → 2nd area Rb2, 4th area Rb4 → 3rd area Rb3.

In the following step S712, the second result display unit flag (second result display unit information) is set in the second result display unit flag storage area (second result display unit information storage means) provided in the various flag storage areas 235 of the RAM 204. If it is not stored, the second result display unit flag is stored, and if it is stored, that state is maintained.

In the following step S713, a special figure shift command (special figure shift occurrence information) is set, which is information for causing the staging control device 82, which is a control device on the sub side, to recognize that the data in the hold area has been shifted. .. In this case, from the command information storage area 225 of the ROM 203, the information that the hold area targeted for the data shift this time corresponds to the hold area Rb for the second result display unit, that is, corresponds to the lower operating port 34. A special figure shift command including information about what is being done is selected, and the selected special figure shift command is set as a command to be transmitted to the effect control device 82. After that, this data setting process is terminated.

The special figure shift command set in step S713 is transmitted to the staging control device 82 in the external output process in the normal process (FIG. 15). In the effect control device 82, based on the received special figure shift command, the display in the second hold light emitting unit 46 of the variable display unit 36 and the display in the second hold display area Gb of the symbol display device 41 are reduced in the number of holds. Execute the process to change in correspondence with. This will be described in detail later.

Next, the fluctuation start processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In the variation start process, first, in step S801, it is determined whether or not the winning / failing lottery mode is the high probability mode. Specifically, whether or not the high-probability mode flag (high-probability state information) is stored (stored) in the high-probability mode flag storage area (high-probability state information storage means) provided in the various flag storage areas 235 of the RAM 204. Is determined. The high-probability mode flag is a flag that is stored at the end of the open / close execution mode related to the occurrence of any of the probabilistic jackpot results, and is cleared when the normal jackpot result occurs thereafter.

If it is not in the high probability mode, the pass / fail judgment is performed in step S802 with reference to the pass / fail table for the low probability mode. Specifically, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the first execution area AE1 is one with the value set as the jackpot winning in the winning / failing table for the low probability mode as shown in FIG. 8A. Determine if you are doing it. On the other hand, in the case of the high probability mode, the hit / fail judgment is performed in step S803 with reference to the hit / miss table for the high probability mode. Specifically, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the first execution area AE1 is one with the value set as the jackpot winning in the winning / failing table for the high probability mode as shown in FIG. 8B. Determine if you are doing it.

After the process of step S802 or step S803, in steps S804 to S812, the process for setting the game result of the special figure game times is executed, and the first result is displayed in the special figure game times. A process for setting a stop result when the variable display executed by either the unit AS or the second result display unit BS is terminated is executed. In this case, when setting the stop result, various stop result tables (stop result information group) stored in the stop result table storage area 224 as the stop result information group storage means in the ROM 203 are referred to.

Specifically, first, in step S804, it is determined whether or not the result of the lottery in step S802 or step S803 is a big hit. In the case of a big hit winning, in steps S805 to S811, a process for setting a game result in the case of a big hit winning, a process for setting a stop result, and the like are executed.

In step S805, it is determined whether or not the second result display unit flag is stored in the RAM 204. If the second result display unit flag is not stored, the distribution determination is performed in step S806 with reference to the distribution table for the first result display unit (see FIG. 9A). Specifically, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the first execution area AE1 is the numerical range of the normal jackpot result, the numerical range of the unspecified 2R probability variation jackpot result, the numerical range of the explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result, 15R. Determine which of the numerical ranges of the probabilistic jackpot result is included.

On the other hand, when the second result display unit flag is stored, the distribution determination is performed in step S807 with reference to the distribution table for the second result display unit (see FIG. 9B). Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the first execution area AE1 is included in the numerical range of the normal jackpot result or the numerical range of the 15R probability variation jackpot result.

After the processing of step S806 or step S807, in step S808, the game result distributed in step S806 or step S807 is one of the probabilistic jackpot results (unspecified 2R probabilistic jackpot result, explicit 2R probabilistic jackpot result and 15R probabilistic jackpot result). It is determined whether or not it is one of the results). In the case of a probabilistic jackpot result, in step S809, the stop result corresponding to the occurrence of the probabilistic jackpot result is displayed in the special figure game times in the first result display unit AS or the second result display unit BS. Executes the stop result setting process for the probability change jackpot to set the end of the variable display in the state of. Further, in step S809, information for specifying in the MPU 202 which probabilistic jackpot result is the result of the hit / fail determination of the special figure game round is stored in the various flag storage areas 235 of the RAM 204. Specifically, in step S809, any one of the explicit 2R probability change flag, the unspecified 2R probability change flag, and the 15R probability change flag is stored. Then, the process proceeds to step S812.

On the other hand, if the game result distributed in step S806 or step S807 is not the probability variation jackpot result, a negative determination is made in step S808, and the process proceeds to step S810. In step S810, the address information of the stop result data corresponding to the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the first execution area AE1 is acquired with reference to the stop result table for the normal jackpot, and the address information is stored in the RAM 204. The stop result of is stored in the address storage area. Further, in step S810, information for specifying in the MPU 202 whether the result of the hit / fail determination of the special figure game is a normal jackpot result is stored in the various flag storage areas 235 of the RAM 204. Specifically, in step S810, the normal flag is stored. Then, the process proceeds to step S812.

If the result of the lottery in step S802 or step S803 is not a big hit, a negative determination is made in step S804, and the process proceeds to step S811. In step S811, the deviation for setting which stop result is displayed in the first result display unit AS or the second result display unit BS in the special figure game round, which is the deviation result, is to end the variation display. Executes the stop result setting process for the time. Further, in step S811, various flag storage areas of the RAM 204 provide information for specifying in the MPU 202 that the result of the hit / fail determination of the special figure game is a deviation result (either a normal deviation result or a special deviation result). Store in 235. Specifically, in step S811, either the normal deviation flag or the special deviation flag is stored. Then, the process proceeds to step S812.

After executing any of the processes of step S809, step S810, and step S811, in step S812, the variation display time of the current special figure game times in the first result display unit AS or the second result display unit BS is set. Execution of the variable display time setting process.

The variable display time setting process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step S901, it is determined whether or not the game result of this time is one of the big hit result and the special missed result. Specifically, it is determined whether or not any of the explicit 2R probability change flag, the unspecified 2R probability change flag, the 15R probability change flag, the normal flag, and the special deviation flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 235 of the RAM 204.

If a negative determination is made in step S901, that is, if the game result this time is an out-of-normal result, the process proceeds to step S902. In step S902, it is determined whether or not the reach display is generated by the symbol display device 41 in the special figure game round this time. Specifically, when the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the first execution area AE1 is a value corresponding to the occurrence of reach, an affirmative determination is made in step S902 as the occurrence of reach display. When specifying whether or not reach has occurred using the value of the reach random number counter C3, the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area of the ROM 203 is referred to.

If an affirmative judgment is made in either step S901 or step S902, the process proceeds to step S903, and the variation display time table for reach generation stored in the variation display time table storage area 223 of the ROM 203 is referred to this time. The fluctuation display time information corresponding to the value of the first fluctuation type counter CS1 is acquired, and the fluctuation display time information is transmitted to the fluctuation display time information in the following step S904 in the fluctuation display time counter area (variation display time) provided in various counter areas 234 of the RAM 204. Set in the measuring means). After that, this setting process ends.

That is, in the present embodiment, when the result of the winning / failing lottery is the result of shifting to the open / close execution mode (one of the big hit results and the special loss result), or the result of the winning / failing lottery is the normal loss result and for reaching. When the lottery is won, the reach display is executed.

Here, the reach display is provided with a normal reach display and a super reach display having different variable display modes. In the variation display time table for reach generation, variation display time information corresponding to each of the normal reach display and the super reach display is set, and by referring to the table, the variation display time information corresponding to each reach display can be obtained. To be acquired. Regarding the determination of the reach display type, a table corresponding to the reach display type and the value of the first variation type counter CS1 is provided, and by referring to the table, the first variation type counter of this time is provided. The reach display corresponding to the value of CS1 is determined.

On the other hand, when a negative determination is made in step S902, the first variation type counter CS1 of this time is referred to with reference to the variation display time table for non-reach stored in the variation display time table storage area 223 in step S905. The fluctuation display time corresponding to the value of is acquired, and the fluctuation display time information is set in the fluctuation display time counter area in step S906. After that, this setting process ends. The fluctuation display time information when the reach does not occur is set so that the fluctuation display time becomes shorter as the number of start hold storage numbers RaN and RbN increases.

The variable display time information when the reach does not occur is set so that the variable display time is shorter than the variable display time when the reach occurs. Further, the variable display time is set so that the variable display time information in the normal reach display is shorter than the variable display time in the super reach display. That is, each of the above-mentioned variable display time information is set so that the variable display time becomes longer in the order of non-reach occurrence <normal reach display <super reach display.

In the situation where the support mode is the high frequency support mode, the reach is not selected so that the shorter variable display time is selected as compared with the case where the number of pending information is the same as in the situation where the support mode is the low frequency support mode. A variable display time table for generation is set, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the selected variable display time may be the same or may be the opposite of the above relationship. Further, the above configuration may be applied to the variable display time when the reach occurs, and the variable display time that is easy to be selected and the variable display time that is difficult to be selected are different between the jackpot winning time and the losing reach time. It may be configured. Further, the variable display time table for various probabilistic jackpots, the variable display time table for normal jackpots, the variable display time table for missed reach, and the variable display time table for complete missed may be set individually. ..

As described above, the variation display time of each game is determined by using the presence / absence of reach occurrence, the type of reach display, the number of reserved information, the value of the variation type counter, and the like as parameters. However, the variable display time of each game is set with the contents of other pending information, specifically, the information for jackpot determination, the information for type determination, and the information for reach determination included in the other reserved information as parameters. It is decided without doing.

Returning to the description of the variation start process (FIG. 18), after step S812, the special map variation command and the special map type command are set in step S813. The special figure change command includes information on whether or not reach has occurred and information on the change display time. In addition, the special figure type command includes information on the game result. That is, in the special figure type command, as game result information, 15R probability variation jackpot result information, normal jackpot result information, explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result information, unspecified 2R probability variation jackpot result information, special deviation result information. Etc. are included.

The special figure change command and the special figure type command set in step S813 are transmitted to the effect control device 82 in the external output process in the normal process. In the effect control device 82, the content of the effect in the special figure game is determined based on the received command for changing the special figure and the command for the special figure type, and various devices are set so that the content of the determined effect is executed. Control. The content of this effect includes a variable display mode of the symbol on the symbol display device 41, and the determined variable display mode of the symbol is output from the effect control device 82 to the display control device 212 as a display content command. To. The display control device 212 controls the display of the symbol display device 41 so that the variable display of the symbol corresponding to each special figure game is performed based on the display content command received from the effect control device 82.

After that, in step S814, among the first result display unit AS and the second result display unit BS, the variation display of the pattern is started in the result display unit corresponding to the special figure game times this time. In this case, if the second result display unit flag is not stored in the RAM 204, it is specified that the result display unit corresponding to this special figure game is the first result display unit AS, and the second result display unit is specified. When the flag is stored, it is specified that the result display unit corresponding to the special figure game times this time is the second result display unit BS. After that, this fluctuation start processing is terminated.

Returning to the description of the game round control process (FIG. 16), when the main display unit 43 is in the variable display, the game round progress process of steps S606 to S609 is executed. In the game round progress process, first, in step S606, it is determined whether or not the variation display time of the special figure game round has elapsed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the fluctuation display time information stored in the fluctuation display time counter area of the RAM 204 is "0". As described above, the value of the variable display time information is set in the variable display time setting process. Further, the value of the set variable display time information is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is activated.

If the variation display time has not elapsed, the variation display process is executed in step S607. In the variable display processing, the result display unit is displayed and controlled (light emission control of each display segment) so that each display segment is turned on and off in a predetermined order in the result display unit related to the special figure game round this time. ), And the game round control process is terminated.

If the variation display time has elapsed, the variation end process is executed in step S608. In the variable end processing, the information stored in the RAM 204 in any of the processes of step S809, step S810, and step S811 is specified, and the pattern corresponding to the information is stopped and displayed on the main display unit 43. Controls the main display unit 43.

In the following step S609, the special figure change end command is set. After that, the game round control process is terminated. The special figure fluctuation end command set in step S609 is transmitted to the staging control device 82 in the external output process in the normal process. By receiving the special figure change end command, the effect control device 82 controls the display control device 212 so that the combination of the final stop symbols in the special figure game round is confirmed and displayed (final stop display).

<Game state transition process>
Next, the game state transition process in step S504 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 20 to 23.

First, in step S1001, it is determined whether or not the open / close execution mode is in progress. If it is not in the open / close execution mode, the process proceeds to step S1002, and it is determined whether or not it is the timing at which the variation display of the pattern on the first result display unit AS or the second result display unit BS of the special figure game round of 1 is completed. If it is not the timing when the variation display is finished, the game state transition process is finished as it is.

When the variation display is finished, in step S1003, it is determined whether or not the game result of the special figure game this time corresponds to the transition to the open / close execution mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not any of the explicit 2R probability variation flag, the unexplicit 2R probability variation flag, the 15R probability variation flag, the normal jackpot flag, and the special deviation flag is stored in the RAM 204. If none of the above flags is stored, the game state transition process is terminated as it is.

If any of the above flags is stored, the opening / closing execution mode start processing is executed in step S1004. In the start processing, an opening waiting time (starting waiting period) for waiting without starting the opening of the large winning opening 32a of the variable winning device 32 for the opening of the opening / closing execution mode is set. Specifically, the waiting time information for opening stored in advance in the ROM 203 is set in the waiting time counter area provided in various counter areas 234 of the RAM 204. In this case, the waiting time information set differs depending on whether or not the open / close execution mode is the high-frequency winning mode, and the waiting time information is different in the low-frequency winning mode than in the high-frequency winning mode. It is set to be short. For example, in the high frequency winning mode, the count value of the waiting time information is set so that the waiting time is 1 sec, and in the low frequency winning mode, the count value of the waiting time information is set so that the waiting time is 0.2 sec. Is set. The value of the wait time information set here is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is executed.

In the following step S1005, a round display start process for notifying the type of the opening / closing execution mode this time is executed. In the round display start processing, first, the address information stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 204 is confirmed. Then, the stop result data corresponding to the address information is specified from the stop result data group stored in the ROM 203, and the content of the number of rounds is confirmed from the specified stop result data. After that, the content of the confirmed number of rounds is output to the round display unit RS in the main display unit 43. As a result, the round display unit RS displays the round information related to the output.

In the following step S1006, it is determined whether or not the opening / closing execution mode this time is the high frequency winning mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not either the 15R probability variation flag or the normal jackpot flag is stored in the RAM 204. In the case of not the high frequency winning mode, that is, in the low frequency winning mode, "2" is set in the first round counter area RC1 provided in various counter areas 234 of the RAM 204 in step S1007. The first round counter area RC1 is a counter area for counting the number of times the large winning opening 32a is opened. On the other hand, in the high frequency winning mode, "15" is set in the first round counter area RC1 in step S1008.

After executing the process of step S1007 or step S1008, the special figure opening command is set in step S1009. This set special figure opening command is transmitted to the staging control device 82 in the external output processing in the normal processing. This special figure opening command includes information on whether it is a high-frequency winning mode or a low-frequency winning mode. The effect control device 82 determines the content of the effect corresponding to the opening / closing execution mode based on the received special figure opening command, and controls various devices so that the content of the determined effect is executed. The content of this effect includes a display mode in the symbol display device 41, and the determined display mode is output from the effect control device 82 to the display control device 212 as a display content command. The display control device 212 controls the display of the symbol display device 41 so that the display (for example, moving image display) corresponding to the current opening / closing execution mode is performed based on the display content command received from the effect control device 82.

In the following step S1010, after executing the external signal setting process, the game state transition process is terminated. In the external signal setting process, it is determined whether or not any of the explicit 2R probability change flag, the unspecified 2R probability change flag, the 15R probability change flag, and the normal jackpot flag is stored in the RAM 204, and any of the flags is stored. In this case, the signal output state of the output terminal for the jackpot signal provided in the external output terminal 99 is set to the jackpot signal output state. As a result, when the output terminal for the jackpot signal is connected to the management control device on the game hall side, the jackpot signal is output to the management control device, and the pachinko machine 10 generates a jackpot in the management control device. You can understand what you have done.

Further, in the external signal setting process, it is determined whether or not any of the explicit 2R probability variation flag, the implicit 2R probability variation flag, the 15R probability variation flag, the normal jackpot flag, and the special miss flag is stored in the RAM 204, and any of them is stored. When the flag is stored, the signal output state of the output terminal for the jackpot and the special deviation signal provided in the external output terminal 99 is set to the jackpot and the special deviation signal output state. As a result, when the output terminal for the jackpot and special deviation signal is connected to the management control device on the game hall side, the jackpot and special deviation signal are output to the management control device, and the pachinko machine in the management control device. It is possible to grasp that the opening / closing execution mode has occurred at 10.

If it is determined in step S1001 that the open / close execution mode is in progress, the process proceeds to step S1011. In step S1011 it is determined whether or not the waiting time for opening has elapsed. If the waiting time for the opening has not elapsed, the game state transition process is terminated as it is. If the waiting time for the opening has elapsed, the large winning opening opening / closing process is executed in step S1012. Here, the large winning opening opening / closing process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step S1101, it is determined whether or not the large winning opening 32a is being opened. Specifically, such a determination is made based on the driving state of the variable winning driving unit 32c. When the large winning opening 32a is not open, it is determined in step S1102 whether or not the value of the first round counter area RC1 is "0", and it is provided in various counter areas 234 of the RAM 204 in step S1103. It is determined whether or not the value of the first timer area T1 is "0".

If the value of the first round counter area RC1 is "0" or the value of the first timer area T1 is not "0", the opening / closing process of the main winning opening is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when the value of the first round counter area RC1 is not "0" and the value of the first timer area T1 is "0", the process proceeds to step S1104, and the variable winning drive is performed to open the large winning opening 32a. The unit 32c is in the driving state.

In the following step S1105, the setting process for each round is executed. The setting process for each round will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step S1201, it is determined whether or not the high frequency winning mode is set. In the high-frequency winning mode, in step S1202, “15000” (that is, 30 sec) is set in the first timer area T1 in order to measure the opening / closing timing for opening / closing the large winning opening 32a. The count value set here is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is started, that is, in a cycle of 2 msec. In the following step S1203, "10" is set in the first winning counter area PC1 provided in various counter areas 234 of the RAM 204 in order to count the number of winnings of the game ball to the large winning opening 32a. After that, this setting process ends.

In the case of not the high frequency winning mode, that is, in the low frequency winning mode, "100" (that is, 0.2 sec) is set in the first timer area T1 in step S1204, and the first winning is performed in the following step S1205. Set "6" in the counter area PC1. After that, this setting process ends.

After executing the setting process for each round in the large winning opening opening / closing process (FIG. 21), the special figure opening command is set in step S1106, and the main winning opening opening / closing process is completed. This set special figure release command is transmitted to the staging control device 82 in the external output processing in the normal processing. This special figure release command includes information on whether it is a high-frequency winning mode or a low-frequency winning mode. Based on the received release command, the effect control device 82 determines the content of the effect corresponding to the high frequency winning mode, and controls various devices so that the content of the determined effect is executed.

If the large winning opening is open in step S1101, the process proceeds to step S1107, and it is determined whether or not the value of the first timer area T1 is "0". When the value of the first timer area T1 is not "0", it is determined in step S1108 whether or not the game ball has won a prize in the large winning opening 32a based on the detection state of the detection sensor corresponding to the variable winning device 32. If no prize has been won, the opening / closing process of the main prize opening is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when a prize has been generated, whether or not the value of the first prize counter area PC1 is "0" is determined in step S1110 after decrementing the value of the first prize counter area PC1 by 1 in step S1109. Judgment is made, and if it is not "0", the opening / closing process of the main winning opening is terminated as it is.

When the value of the first timer area T1 is "0" in step S1107, or when the value of the first winning counter area PC1 is "0" in step S1110, it means that the large winning opening closing condition is satisfied. means. In such a case, the variable winning drive unit 32c is set to the non-driving state in order to close the large winning opening 32a in step S1111.

In the following step S1112, the value of the first round counter area RC1 is decremented by 1, and in step S1113, it is determined whether or not the value of the first round counter area RC1 is "0". If the value of the first round counter area RC1 is not "0", it is determined in step S1114 whether or not the high frequency winning mode is set.

In the high frequency winning mode, the first timer area T1 is set to "1000" (that is, 2 sec), and in the low frequency winning mode, the first timer area T1 is set to "100" (that is, 0. 2sec) is set. That is, in the low-frequency winning mode, the time during which the large winning opening 32a is closed between rounds is set shorter than in the high-frequency winning mode. After that, the special figure closing command is set in step S1117, and the opening / closing process of the main winning opening is completed. This set special figure closing command is transmitted to the staging control device 82 in the external output processing in the normal processing. This special figure closing command includes information on whether the high-frequency winning mode or the low-frequency winning mode is used. Based on the received closing command, the effect control device 82 determines the content of the effect corresponding to the high frequency winning mode, and controls various devices so that the content of the determined effect is executed.

If it is determined in step S1113 that the value of the first round counter area RC1 is "0", the ending start process is executed in step S1118. In the start processing, an ending waiting time for waiting without starting the next special figure game round for the ending of the open / close execution mode is set. Specifically, the waiting time information for the ending stored in advance in the ROM 203 is set in the waiting time counter area provided in the various counter areas 234 of the RAM 204. In this case, the waiting time information set differs depending on whether or not the open / close execution mode is the high-frequency winning mode, and the waiting time information is different in the low-frequency winning mode than in the high-frequency winning mode. It is set to be short. For example, in the high frequency winning mode, the count value of the waiting time information is set so that the waiting time is 1 sec, and in the low frequency winning mode, the count value of the waiting time information is set so that the waiting time is 0.2 sec. Is set. The value of the wait time information set here is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is executed.

After that, in step S1119, after setting the special figure ending command, the opening / closing process of the main winning opening is completed. This set special figure ending command is transmitted to the staging control device 82 in the external output processing in the normal processing. This special figure ending command includes information on whether it is a high-frequency winning mode or a low-frequency winning mode. The effect control device 82 determines the content of the effect corresponding to the opening / closing execution mode based on the received special figure ending command, and controls various devices so that the content of the determined effect is executed. The content of this effect includes a display mode in the symbol display device 41, and the determined display mode is output from the effect control device 82 to the display control device 212 as a display content command. The display control device 212 controls the display of the symbol display device 41 so that the display (for example, moving image display) corresponding to the current opening / closing execution mode is performed based on the display content command received from the effect control device 82.

Returning to the explanation of the game state transition process (FIG. 20), after executing the large winning opening opening / closing process in step S1012, it is determined in step S1213 whether or not the value of the first round counter area RC1 is "0". , It is determined in step S1014 whether or not the waiting time for the ending has elapsed. If the value of the first round counter area RC1 is not "0" or the waiting time for the ending has not elapsed, the game state transition process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, when the value of the first round counter area RC1 is "0" and the waiting time for the ending has elapsed, the transition process at the end of the open / close execution mode is executed in step S1015. Here, the transition process at the end of the open / close execution mode will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step S1301, it is determined whether or not the 15R probability change flag or the explicit 2R probability change flag is stored in the RAM 204. If any of the flags is stored, the flag erasing process for erasing the information for specifying the game state is executed in step S1302. Specifically, if the open / close execution mode flag, the high probability mode flag, and the high frequency support flag are stored, they are deleted, and if they are not already stored, the state is maintained. In the following step S1303, the high probability mode flag is stored, and in step S1304, the high frequency support flag is stored. As a result, the gaming state shifts to the gaming state in which the winning / failing lottery mode is the high probability mode and the support mode is the high frequency support mode (hereinafter, the gaming state is also referred to as a special advantageous state). After executing the process of step S1304, the present migration process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S1301 that both the 15R probability variation flag and the explicit 2R probability variation flag are not stored, it is determined in step S1305 whether or not the unspecified 2R probability variation flag is stored. When the unspecified 2R probability change flag is stored, the flag erasing process is executed in step S1306. After that, in step S1307, the high probability mode flag is stored. As a result, the gaming state shifts to the gaming state in which the winning / failing lottery mode is the high probability mode and the support mode is the low frequency support mode. After executing the process of step S1307, the present migration process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S1305 that the unspecified 2R probability variation flag is not stored, it is determined in step S1308 whether or not the normal jackpot flag is stored. If the normal jackpot flag is stored, the flag erasing process is executed in step S1309. After that, in step S1310, the high frequency support flag is stored, and in step S1311, "100" is set in the game count counter area provided in various counter areas 234 of the RAM 204. As a result, the gaming state shifts to the gaming state in which the winning / failing lottery mode is the low probability mode and the support mode is the high frequency support mode. However, the high-frequency support mode ends when the special figure game times are continued 100 times, and then the mode shifts to the normal game state in which the winning / failing lottery mode is the low-probability mode and the support mode is the low-frequency support mode. After executing the process of step S1311, the present migration process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S1308 that the normal jackpot flag is not stored, the main transition process is terminated as it is. That is, when the result is a special deviation and the mode shifts to the open / close execution mode, the game state of the special figure game times resulting in the special deviation is maintained after the end of the open / close execution mode.

Returning to the description of the game state transition process (FIG. 20), after the transition process at the end of the open / close execution mode in step S1015 is completed, the round display end process is executed in step S1016. In this process, the display control of the round display unit RS is terminated so that the round display unit RS in the main display unit 43 is turned off. That is, the round display in the round display unit RS starts when the open / close execution mode is started, and ends when the open / close execution mode ends. In this case, when the opening / closing execution mode is the low-frequency winning mode, the number of times the large winning opening 32a is opened / closed is smaller and the opening time and closing time of the large winning opening 32a are set shorter than those in the high-frequency winning mode. .. Therefore, the period during which the content of the number of rounds is displayed on the round display unit RS is shorter than that in the high frequency winning mode. Furthermore, the result display that is stopped and displayed on the first result display unit AS or the second result display unit BS is started when the special figure game round is finished, and continues until the next special figure game round is started. Will be done. Therefore, when shifting to the open / close execution mode, the above result display starts before the content of the number of rounds is displayed on the round display unit RS, and continues until after the content of the number of rounds is displayed. Will be continued. That is, the result display is maintained for a longer period of time than the display of the content of the number of rounds.

After that, in step S1017, after executing the end processing of the open / close execution mode, the main game state transition process is ended. In the end processing of the open / close execution mode, if the explicit 2R probability change flag, the unspecified 2R probability change flag, the 15R probability change flag, the normal jackpot flag, and the special deviation flag are stored, they are deleted and not already stored. If so, maintain that state.

<Processing for electric service support>
Next, the electric service support process in step S505 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 24. In the electric service support process, the normal figure game time control process is executed in step S1401, the normal figure game state transition process is executed in step S1402, and the present support process is terminated.

That is, the electric service support process basically has the same configuration as the game turn control process (FIG. 16) and the game state transition process (FIG. 20) on the special figure side, and has the same configuration as that of step S1401. The normal-figure game time control process corresponds to the game-time control process on the special figure side of FIG. 16, and the normal-figure game state transition process of step S1402 corresponds to the game state transition process on the special figure side of FIG. Hereinafter, the processing of the game time control process (step S1401) and the game state transition process (step S1402) on the normal drawing side will be described in detail.

<Public game game times control process>
First, the normal drawing game time control process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In the normal game round control process, in step S1501, it is determined whether or not the support state is in progress. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the support status flag (support status information) is stored (stored) in the support status flag storage area (support status information storage means) in the various flag storage areas 235 of the RAM 204. The support state flag is stored when shifting to the support state in which the opening / closing control of the electric accessory 34a is performed in the normal drawing game state transition process described later, and when the support state is also terminated in the normal figure game state transition process. Will be erased.

When the support state is in effect, none of the processes after step S1502, that is, the process for starting the game game in steps S1503 to S1505 and the process for progressing the game game in step S1506 to S1509 is executed. , End the game round control process. That is, in the support state, the normal game round is not started regardless of whether or not the through gate 35 has been won.

If it is not in the support state, it is determined in step S1502 whether or not the accessory display unit 44 is in the variable display. For this determination, the normal map fluctuation display flag (second fluctuation display information) is stored in the normal map fluctuation display flag storage area (second fluctuation display information storage means) in the various flag storage areas 235 of the RAM 204 (second fluctuation display information). It is performed by determining whether or not it is stored). The normal-figure variation display flag is stored when the variation display is started for the accessory display unit 44, and is cleared when the variation display ends.

If the accessory display unit 44 is not in the variable display, the process proceeds to the normal drawing game round start process in steps S1503 to S1505. In the normal figure game round start process, first, in step S1503, it is determined whether or not the normal figure hold storage number FN is “0”. When the normal figure hold storage number FN is "0", the processing for electric service support is terminated as it is. If the number FN of the normal map hold storage is not "0", the normal map data setting process for setting the data stored in the electric service hold area Rc for variable display is executed in step S1504. In the normal map data setting process, the normal figure hold storage number FN is decremented by 1, and the data stored in the first area of the electric service hold area Rc is moved to the second execution area AE2. Then, the process of shifting the data stored in each storage area of the electric service holding area Rc is executed. That is, it is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first area Rc1 to the fourth area Rc4 to the lower area side, and while clearing the data of the first area Rc1, the second area Rc2 → the first area Rc1. , 3rd area Rc3 → 2nd area Rc2, 4th area Rc4 → 3rd area Rc3, and so on, the data in each area is shifted. Then, a normal map shift command (normal map shift occurrence information) is set, which is information for causing the staging control device 82, which is a control device on the sub side, to recognize that the data in the hold area on the normal map side has been shifted. do. In this case, the normal map shift command is read from the command information storage area 225 of the ROM 203, and the normal map shift command is set as a command to be transmitted to the staging control device 82.

After the normal map data setting process is executed in step S1504, the normal map fluctuation start process is executed in step S1505, and then the normal map game round control process is terminated.

Here, the normal map fluctuation start process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 26.

In the normal map fluctuation start process, first, in step S1601, it is determined whether or not the support mode is the high frequency support mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the high frequency support flag is stored in the RAM 204. As described above, the high-frequency support flag is stored in the game state transition process on the special figure side, and is subsequently deleted when the transition condition is satisfied (when the special figure game times are continued 100 times).

If it is not in the high frequency support mode, the hit / fail judgment (support lottery) is performed by referring to the pass / fail table for the low frequency support mode in step S1602, and if it is in the high frequency support mode, it is high in step S1603. The pass / fail judgment is made by referring to the pass / fail table for the frequency support mode. As described above, in the present embodiment, the pass / fail table for normal drawing is used in common regardless of the level of the support mode, and the pass / fail table referred to in step S1602 and the pass / fail table in step S1603 are used. It is the same as the reference table (see FIG. 8 (c)). Therefore, the process of determining the height of the support mode in step S1601 may be omitted.

After the processing of step S1602 or step S1603, in steps S1604 to S1611, the processing for setting the game result of the current Fuzu game is executed, and the display for the character is displayed in this Fuzu game. A process for setting a stop result when the variable display executed in the unit 44 is terminated is executed. When setting the stop result, among the various stop result tables (stop result information group) stored in the stop result table storage area 224 as the stop result information group storage means in the ROM 203, the stop result table for normal drawing is used. Is referenced.

Specifically, first, in step S1604, it is determined whether or not the result of the lottery in step S1602 or step S1603 is the support state winning. When the support state is won, in steps S1605 to S1610, a process for setting the game result in the case of the support state winning, a process for setting the stop result, and the like are executed.

In step S1605, it is determined whether or not the high frequency support mode flag is stored in the RAM 204. If the high-frequency support mode flag is not stored, the distribution determination is performed in step S1606 with reference to the common-drawing distribution table for the low-frequency support mode (FIG. 10A). Specifically, the value of the opening type counter C5 stored in the second execution area AE2 is the numerical range of the first opening result A, the numerical range of the second opening result B, and the numerical range of the third opening result C. Determine which one is included.

On the other hand, when the high-frequency support mode flag is stored, the distribution determination is performed in step S1607 with reference to the common-drawing distribution table for the high-frequency support mode (FIG. 10B). Specifically, the value of the opening type counter C5 stored in the second execution area AE2 is the numerical range of the first opening result A, the numerical range of the second opening result B, and the numerical range of the third opening result C. Determine which one is included.

Here, in step S1606 and step S1607, only the numerical range of each opening result A to C is referred to as the type of opening mode in the support state winning, and the opening results A1 to A3, B1 to B3, and C1 are grouped below that. ~ C3 is not specified.

After the processing of step S1606 or step S1607, in step S1608, the game result distributed in step S1606 or step S1607 becomes one of the high winning support states (second opening result B or third opening result C). It is determined whether or not it is. If the result is a high prize support state, it is displayed in step S1609 that the high prize support state will occur as a result of the stoppage of the character display unit 44 in the current game game. Execute the stop result setting process for the high prize support state to set to end the variable display in the state. More specifically, with reference to the stop result table for the high winning support state, the address information of the stop result data corresponding to the value of the open type counter C5 stored in the second execution area AE2 is acquired, and the address information thereof is acquired. The address information is stored in the stop result address storage area for normal drawing in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 204. Further, in step S1609, information for specifying in the MPU 202 that the result of the winning / failing of the current game is the opening result of one of the high winning support states is stored in the various flag storage areas 235 of the RAM 204. do. Specifically, in step S1609, either the second open flag or the third open flag is stored. Then, the process proceeds to step S1612.

On the other hand, if the game result distributed in step S1606 or step S1607 is not the result of the high winning support state, that is, the game result distributed is the first opening result A and the low winning support state is obtained, in step S1608. A negative determination is made, and the process proceeds to step S1610. In step S1610, the address information of the stop result data corresponding to the value of the open type counter C5 stored in the second execution area AE2 is acquired with reference to the stop result table for the low winning support state, and the address information is obtained. Is stored in the stop result address storage area for normal drawing. Further, in step S1610, information for specifying in the MPU 202 that the result of the hit / fail determination of the current normal game game is the open result in the low winning support state is stored in the various flag storage areas 235 of the RAM 204. Specifically, in step S1610, the first release flag is stored. Then, the process proceeds to step S1612.

If the result of the lottery in step S1602 or step S1603 is not the support state winning, a negative determination is made in step S1604, and the process proceeds to step S1611. In step S1611, the variable display is terminated in a state in which it is displayed that neither the high prize support state nor the low prize support state occurs as a result of stopping the character display unit 44 in this game. Executes the stop result setting process for disconnection to set. More specifically, with reference to the stop result table for disconnection, the address information of the stop result data corresponding to the value of the open type counter C5 stored in the second execution area AE2 is acquired, and the address information is obtained. Of the stop result address storage area of RAM 204, it is stored in the stop result address storage area for normal drawing. Further, in step S1611, information for specifying in the MPU 202 that the result of the hit / fail determination of the current game is a miss result is stored in the various flag storage areas 235 of the RAM 204. Specifically, in step S1611, a flag that is out of the ordinary is stored. Then, the process proceeds to step S1612.

After executing any of the processes of step S1609, step S1610, and step S1611, in step S1612, the normal map variation display for setting the variable display time of the current normal map game times on the accessory display unit 44. Execute the time setting process.

In the normal figure fluctuation display time setting process, by checking the presence or absence of the above high-frequency support mode flag, it is determined whether the high-frequency support mode or the low-frequency support mode is used. If the high-frequency support mode is set, the ROM 203 Fluctuation display time table The fluctuation display time information corresponding to the value of the second fluctuation type counter CS2 this time is acquired by referring to the fluctuation display time table for the high frequency support mode stored in the storage area 223. Then, the value corresponding to the information is set in the normal map fluctuation display time counter area provided in various counter areas 234 of the RAM 204. On the other hand, in the case of the low frequency support mode, the second variable type counter CS2 of this time is referred to with reference to the normal map variable display time table for the low frequency support mode stored in the variable display time table storage area 223 of the ROM 203. The fluctuation display time information corresponding to the value of the above is acquired, and the value corresponding to the information is set in the normal figure fluctuation display time counter area provided in various counter areas 234 of the RAM 204. In these, the normal map fluctuation display time table for the high frequency support mode and the normal map fluctuation display time table for the low frequency support mode, the high frequency support mode averages the variable display time than the low frequency support mode. Is set to be shorter.

In each variation display time table, a plurality of types of variation display times are set, and the variation display time corresponding to the value of the second variation type counter CS2 is selected. In this case, a part of the variable display time that can be selected in the high frequency support mode may be set to be longer than a part of the variable display time that can be selected in the low frequency support mode. Even if the time is selected, the high frequency support mode may be set to be shorter than the low frequency support mode. Further, not only the value of the second fluctuation type counter CS2 but also the fluctuation display time may be set to be different according to the number of the normal figure reserved storage number FN, and the fluctuation increases as the number of the normal figure reserved storage number FN increases. The display time may be set to be short, and vice versa.

After executing the setting process of the normal map fluctuation display time in step S1612, the normal map change command and the normal map type command are set in step S1613. The command for changing the normal map includes information on the display time of the normal map change. In addition, the game result information is included in the normal map type command. That is, the normal map type command includes information on the game result, such as the first opening result A, the second opening result B, the third opening result C, and the information on the deviation result.

The command for changing the normal map and the command for the normal map type set in step S1613 are transmitted to the staging control device 82 in the external output process in the normal process. In the effect control device 82, based on the received command for changing the normal map and the command for the normal map type, the content of the effect in the normal map game is determined, and various devices are set so that the content of the determined effect is executed. Control. The content of this effect includes a variable display mode of the symbol on the symbol display device 41, and the determined variable display mode of the symbol is output from the effect control device 82 to the display control device 212 as a display content command. To. The display control device 212 controls the display of the symbol display device 41 so that the variable display of the symbol corresponding to each normal drawing game is performed based on the display content command received from the staging control device 82.

After that, in step S1614, the variable display of the pattern is started on the display unit 44 for the accessory. After that, this fluctuation start processing is terminated.

Returning to the description of the normal figure game round control process (FIG. 25), when the accessory display unit 44 is in the variable display, the normal figure game round progress process of steps S1506 to S1509 is executed. In the process for advancing the Fuzu game times, first, in step S1506, it is determined whether or not the variation display time of the current Fuzu game times has elapsed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the fluctuation display time information for the normal drawing stored in the fluctuation display time counter area of the RAM 204 is "0". The value of the fluctuation display time information is set in the setting process of the fluctuation display time of the normal map. Further, the value of the set variable display time information is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is activated.

If the variation display time has not elapsed, the variation display process is executed in step S1507. In the variable display processing, the accessory display unit 44 controls the display (light emission control of each display segment) so that the accessory display segments are turned on and off in a predetermined order. , End the game round control process.

If the variation display time has elapsed, the variation end process is executed in step S1508. In the variable end processing, the information stored in the RAM 204 in any of the processes of step S1609, step S1610, and step S611 is specified, and the symbol corresponding to the information is stopped and displayed on the accessory display unit 44. Controls the display unit 44 for the accessory.

In the following step S1509, a command to end the fluctuation of the normal map is set. After that, the game round control process is terminated. The normal map fluctuation end command set in step S1509 is transmitted to the staging control device 82 in the external output process in the normal process. By receiving the command to end the fluctuation of the normal map, the effect control device 82 controls the display control device 212 and the like so as to confirm and display (final stop display) the combination of the final stop symbols in the normal map game round.

<Public game state transition process>
Next, the normal drawing game state transition process of step S1402 in the electric service support process will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 27 to 33 and the like.

First, in step S1701, it is determined whether or not the support state is in progress. If it is not in the support state, the process proceeds to step S1702, and it is determined whether or not it is the timing when the variation display of the symbol of the normal drawing game times of 1 is completed. If it is not the timing when the variation display is finished, the game state transition process is terminated as it is.

When it is the timing when the variation display for the normal map is finished, in step S1703, it is determined whether or not the game result of the current normal map game round corresponds to the transition to the support state. Specifically, it is determined whether or not any of the first open flag, the second open flag, and the third open flag is stored in the RAM 204. If none of the above flags is stored, the game state transition process is terminated as it is.

If any of the above flags is stored, the support state start process is executed in step S1704. In the start processing, a waiting time (first waiting period) for the opening of the normal drawing for waiting without starting the opening of the electric accessory 34a for the opening of the supported state is set. Specifically, the waiting time information for the normal drawing opening stored in advance in the ROM 203 is set in the counter area for the normal drawing waiting time provided in the various counter areas 234 of the RAM 204. The process of starting this supported state will be described in detail later.

In the following step S1705, it is determined whether or not the current support state is the high winning support state. Specifically, it is determined whether or not either the second open flag or the third open flag is stored in the RAM 204. In the case of not the high winning support state, that is, the low winning support state, "2" is set in the second round counter area RC2 provided in the various counter areas 234 of the RAM 204 in step S1706. The second round counter area RC2 is a counter area for counting the number of times the electric accessory 34a is opened. On the other hand, in the high winning support state, "3" is set in the second round counter area RC2 in step S1707.

After executing the process of step S1706 or step S1707, the general map opening command is set in step S1708. This set normal figure opening command is transmitted to the staging control device 82 in the external output processing in the normal processing. This normal map opening command includes information on whether it is a high prize support state or a low prize support state, and information on the waiting time for the normal map opening set in step S1703. The effect control device 82 determines the content of the opening effect corresponding to the support state based on the received normal map opening command, and controls various devices so that the content of the determined effect is executed. The content of this effect includes a display mode in the symbol display device 41, and the determined display mode is output from the effect control device 82 to the display control device 212 as a display content command. The display control device 212 controls the display of the symbol display device 41 so that the display (for example, animation display) corresponding to the current support state is performed based on the display content command received from the effect control device 82.

In the following step S1709, after executing the external signal setting process, the game state transition process is terminated. In the external signal setting process, the signal output state of the output terminal for the accessory open signal provided in the external output terminal 99 is set to the open signal output state. As a result, when the output terminal for the accessory release signal is connected to the management control device on the game hall side, the accessory release signal is output to the management control device, and the pachinko machine 10 is output to the management control device. It is possible to grasp that the support status has occurred.

Further, in the external signal setting process, it is determined whether or not the second open flag or the third open flag is stored in the RAM 204, and if either flag is stored, it is provided in the external output terminal 99. The signal output status of the output terminal for the high winning support status signal is defined as the high winning support status signal output status. As a result, when the output terminal for the high winning support status signal is connected to the management control device on the game hall side, the high winning support status signal is output to the management control device, and the pachinko machine in the management control device. It is possible to grasp that a high winning support state has occurred at 10.

If it is determined in step S1701 that the support state is in effect, the process proceeds to step S1710. In step S1710, it is determined whether or not the waiting time for opening has elapsed. If the waiting time for the opening has not elapsed, the game state transition process is terminated as it is. If the waiting time for the opening has elapsed, the accessory opening / closing process is executed in step S1711. Here, the accessory opening / closing process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 28.

First, in step S1801, it is determined whether or not the electric accessory 34a is being opened. Specifically, such a determination is made based on the driving state of the electric accessory driving unit 34b. When the electric accessory 34a is not open, it is determined in step S1802 whether or not the value of the second round counter area RC2 is "0", and it is provided in various counter areas 234 of the RAM 204 in step S1803. It is determined whether or not the value of the second timer area T2 is "0".

If the value of the second round counter area RC2 is "0" or the value of the second timer area T2 is not "0", the opening / closing process of the main character is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when the value of the second round counter area RC2 is not "0" and the value of the second timer area T2 is "0", the process proceeds to step S1804, and the electric accessory 34a is released to open the electric accessory 34a. The drive unit 34b is set to the drive state (accessory opening process).

In the following step S1805, the setting process for each round is executed. The setting process for each round will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step S1901, it is determined whether or not the high prize support state is set. In the high winning support state, in step S1902, “1500” (that is, 3 sec) is set in the second timer area T2 in order to measure the opening / closing timing for opening / closing the electric accessory 34a. The count value set here is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is started, that is, in a cycle of 2 msec. In the following step S1903, "6" is set in the second winning counter area PC2 provided in various counter areas 234 of the RAM 204 in order to count the number of winnings of the game ball to the electric accessory 34a. After that, this setting process ends.

When not in the high winning support state, that is, in the low winning support state, "100" (that is, 0.2 sec) is set in the second timer area T2 in step S1904, and the second winning is won in the following step S1905. Set "3" in the counter area PC2. After that, this setting process ends.

After executing the setting process for each round in the accessory opening / closing process (FIG. 28), the normal figure opening command is set in step S1806, and the present accessory opening / closing process is terminated. This set normal map release command is transmitted to the staging control device 82 in the external output processing in the normal processing. This general map release command contains information on whether it is in the high winning support state or the low winning support state. The effect control device 82 determines the content of the effect corresponding to each support state based on the received normal map release command, and controls various devices so that the content of the determined effect is executed.

If the electric accessory 34a is open in step S1801, the process proceeds to step S1807, and it is determined whether or not the value of the second timer area T2 is "0". When the value of the second timer area T2 is not "0", it is determined in step S1808 whether or not the game ball has won the electric accessory 34a based on the detection state of the detection sensor corresponding to the lower operating port 34. do. If no prize has been won, the opening / closing process of the main character is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if a prize has been generated, whether or not the value of the second prize counter area PC2 is "0" in step S1810 after decrementing the value of the second prize counter area PC2 by 1 in step S1809. Is determined, and if it is not "0", the main character opening / closing process is terminated as it is.

When the value of the second timer area T2 is "0" in step S1807, or when the value of the second winning counter area PC2 is "0" in step S1810, it means that the accessory closing condition is satisfied. do. In such a case, in step S1811, the electric accessory driving unit 34b is put into a non-driving state in order to close the electric accessory 34a (accessory closing process).

In the following step S1812, the value of the second round counter area RC2 is decremented by 1, and in step S1813, it is determined whether or not the value of the second round counter area RC2 is "0". If the value of the second round counter area RC2 is not "0", it is determined in step S1814 whether or not the high winning support state is set.

When the low prize support state is not the high prize support state, "1000" (that is, 2 sec) is set in the second timer area T2 in step S1815, and when the high prize support state is set, the step S1816 is set. Then, "100" (that is, 0.2 sec) is set in the second timer area T2. That is, in the high winning support state, the waiting time (third waiting period) in which the electric accessory 34a is closed during the round is set shorter than in the low winning support state. After executing the process of step S1815 or step S1816, the normal figure closing command is set in step S1817, and the present opening / closing process is terminated. This set normal map closing command is transmitted to the staging control device 82 in the external output processing in the normal processing. This normal map closure command contains information on whether it is in the high winning support state or the low winning support state. The effect control device 82 determines the content of the effect corresponding to each support state based on the received normal map closing command, and controls various devices so that the content of the determined effect is executed.

If it is determined in step S1813 that the value of the second round counter area RC2 is "0", the end processing of the supported state is executed in step S1818. In this process, a waiting time (second waiting period) for the ending of the normal drawing for waiting without starting the next normal drawing game round for the ending of the supported state is set. Specifically, the waiting time information for the normal drawing ending stored in the ROM 203 in advance is set in the counter area for the normal drawing waiting time provided in the various counter areas 234 of the RAM 204. The process of terminating this supported state will be described in detail later.

After that, in step S1819, after setting the normal figure ending command, the opening / closing process of the main character is terminated. This set normal ending command is transmitted to the staging control device 82 in the external output processing in the normal processing. This normal figure ending command includes information on whether it is a high prize support state or a low prize support state, and information on the waiting time for the normal figure ending set in step S1818. The effect control device 82 determines the content of the effect corresponding to the support state based on the received normal drawing ending command, and controls various devices so that the content of the determined effect is executed. The content of this effect includes a display mode in the symbol display device 41, and the determined display mode is output from the effect control device 82 to the display control device 212 as a display content command. The display control device 212 controls the display of the symbol display device 41 so that the display (for example, animation display) corresponding to the current support state is performed based on the display content command received from the effect control device 82.

Returning to the description of the normal game state transition process (FIG. 27), after executing the accessory opening / closing process in step S1711, the process proceeds to step S1712. In step S1712, it is determined whether or not the value of the second round counter area RC2 is “0”. Then, in step S1713, it is determined whether or not the waiting time for the ending has elapsed. If the value of the second round counter area RC2 is not "0" or the waiting time for the ending has not elapsed, the game state transition process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, when the value of the second round counter area RC2 is "0" and the waiting time for the ending has elapsed, the end processing of the support state is executed in step S1714. In the end processing of the support state, various flags for the support state such as the first open flag, the second open flag, and the third open flag are erased. After that, the game state transition process is terminated.

<Waiting time before and after the support status>
Here, as described above, when the support state is won, the waiting time for the opening of the normal figure (first waiting period) is set, and the opening / closing control of the electric accessory 34a is started after the waiting time for opening has elapsed. .. Further, after the end of the support state, the waiting time for the ending of the normal figure (second waiting period) is set, and the next normal game game is started after the waiting time for the ending has elapsed. In these waiting times, an effect for notifying the start and end of the support state is performed.

As described above, the support state is a state in which the support state is changed when the support state is won in the normal game game, and when the support state is set, the lower operating port 34 is likely to win a prize. Then, when a prize is generated in the lower operating port 34, the special figure game round is executed. In addition, the support mode is changed depending on the result of the special figure game. That is, the special figure game times and the normal figure game times may have different execution frequencies of the special figure game times depending on the result of the special figure game times, and the execution frequency of the normal figure game times may differ depending on the result of the special figure game times. , Etc., the game result of one of the games is indirectly related to the game result of the other, and both game times are linked to each other. On the other hand, all of them are executed in parallel, and it is assumed that the player may be confused as to which game time to pay attention to. In particular, as described above, regarding the notification of the start (opening) and end (ending) of the support state, a prize may occur in the electric accessory 34a (the start condition of the special figure game is easy to be satisfied). Or, it informs that the situation can be ended (it becomes difficult to satisfy the start condition of the special figure game), and it is considered that the player does not want to overlook it as much as possible.

An example of the opening effect and the ending effect on the normal drawing side will be described with reference to FIG. 30. FIG. 30 (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining an example of an opening effect for a normal figure, and FIG. 30 (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining an example of an ending effect for a normal figure. (C) is a timing chart for explaining the progress of the normal drawing game, and FIG. 30 (d) is a timing chart for explaining the state of opening / closing control of the electric accessory 34a.

For example, it is assumed that the variation display in the normal map display area P ends in the normal map game round that ends at the timing of t1, and the result of this normal map game round is the result of shifting to the support state. In this case, after the opening standby time from t1 to t2, the electric accessory 34a shifts to the open state at the timing of t2 and shifts to the closed state at the timing of t3. After that, open / close control is performed until the second round counter area RC2 becomes “0”. It should be noted that the control until the electric accessory 34a shifts from the closed state to the open state and then shifts to the closed state as described above is also referred to as unit opening / closing control (unit variable acceptance control).

As the final unit opening / closing control in the support state, the electric accessory 34a is changed from the closed state to the open state at the timing of t4, and is closed at the timing of t5. The period from t5 to the timing of t6, in which the electric accessory 34a is maintained in the closed state and the next normal game round is not started, is the ending waiting time, and after the lapse of the ending waiting time (the timing of t6). Then, the variable display of the next Fuzu game times is started.

As an opening effect, as shown in FIG. 30A, as an area that does not overlap with the variable display of the special figure game times and the reserved display areas Ga and Gb on the special figure side, for example, it is adjacent to the normal figure display area P. In the area (on the left), characters such as "Help start !!" are displayed. This opening effect is continuously displayed over the opening waiting time. It should be noted that the opening standby time may be configured such that the production content changes with the passage of time. Further, it may be configured to notify how soon the electric accessory 34a will be in the open state, or it may be configured to change its display content with the passage of time in a countdown format.

As the ending effect, as shown in FIG. 30B, as an area that does not overlap with the variable display of the special figure game times and the reserved display areas Ga and Gb on the special figure side, for example, it is adjacent to the normal figure display area P. In the area (on the left), a character such as "Help is over !!" is displayed. This ending effect is continuously displayed over the ending waiting time. It should be noted that the ending standby time may be configured such that the production content changes with the passage of time. Further, the ending effect may be performed in a different area from the opening effect.

The above-mentioned opening effect and ending effect differ in execution mode depending on the opening result in the support state.

Here, the relationship between each result, its opening / closing mode, the length of each waiting time, and its effect will be described with reference to FIG. 31.

As described above, the first opening results A1 to A3 are game results in which the opening / closing mode of the electric accessory 34a is in a low winning support state, and the second opening results B1 to B3 and the third opening results C1 to C3 are electric combinations. This is a game result in which the opening / closing mode of the object 34a is in a high winning support state. In the low winning support state, the electric accessory 34a is opened twice, and the period during which the open state is maintained is 0.2 sec, which is shorter than the firing cycle of the game ball, and the game ball enters. Hateful. In the high prize support state, the electric accessory 34a is opened three times. The period during which each open state is maintained is 3 sec, which is longer than the firing cycle of the game ball, and the game ball is more likely to enter the ball than in the low winning support state. Further, in each support state, the waiting time (third waiting period), which is the closed state between the open state and the open state, is 2 sec in the low prize support state and 0.2 sec in the high prize support state. The high prize support state is set shorter than the low prize support state.

In such a configuration, depending on the game result, the length of the waiting time for opening (hereinafter, also referred to as OP period), the content of the effect (hereinafter, also referred to as OP effect), and the waiting time for ending (hereinafter, also referred to as ED period). ) And the content of the production (hereinafter, also referred to as ED production) are different from each other.

Both the OP period and the ED period are set to a long-time mode in which the time is relatively long and a short-time mode in which the time is short. Further, in the OP effect, the OP1 effect and the OP2 effect are set with different effect contents (for example, the displayed words and characters are different), and the OP effect is not performed (after the normal game game is completed). It is also set when the support status is not notified). Further, in the ED effect, the ED1 effect and the ED2 effect are set with different effect contents (for example, the displayed words and characters are different), and the ED effect is not performed (notifying that the support state has ended). (Not done) is also set.

Of the first opening result A, in the first opening result A1 and the first opening result A2, both the OP period and the ED period are short-term modes, and neither the OP effect nor the ED effect is executed. On the other hand, even if the first opening result A is the first opening result A3, both the OP period and the ED period are long-term modes, the OP effect is the OP1 effect, and the ED effect is the ED1 effect. In the second opening result B, in the case of the second opening result B1, both the OP period and the ED period are long-term modes, the OP effect is the OP1 effect, and the ED effect is the ED1 effect. Further, in the second opening result B3, both the OP period and the ED period are short-term modes, and neither the OP effect nor the ED effect is executed. Further, among the third opening result C, in the third opening result C3, both the OP period and the ED period are short-term modes, and neither the OP effect nor the ED effect is executed. That is, although the opening / closing mode is different between the first opening result A3 and the second opening result B1, the waiting time before and after the opening / closing control is the same, and the effect contents before and after the opening / closing control are also the same. .. Further, although the opening / closing mode is different between the first opening result A1 and A2 and the second opening result B3 and the third opening result C3, the waiting time before and after the opening / closing control is the same, and the waiting time before and after the opening / closing control is the same. The production content is also the same. Therefore, it is difficult to identify the content of the open / close control (whether it is in the low prize support state or the high prize support state) from the waiting time before and after the open / close control (especially before the open / close control) and its effect. ..

In the case of the second opening result B2 of the second opening result B and the third opening result C1 and C2 of the third opening result C, the OP period and the ED period are the first opening result A3 and the first. 2 Opening result Although it has the same long-time mode as B1, the production content is different. That is, in the third opening result C1, the OP effect is an OP2 effect different from the OP1 effect, and the ED effect is an ED2 effect different from the ED1 effect. Further, in the second opening result B2 and the third opening result C2, the OP effect and the ED effect are not performed. That is, if the OP effect after the Fuzu game is performed is the OP2 effect, it is determined that the third opening result C1 is in the high prize support state. It is considered to be noteworthy. Even if the OP effect is not performed, if the OP period is long, the second opening result will be in the high winning support state instead of the first opening results A1 and A2 in the low winning support state. Since it is confirmed that it is B2 or the third opening result C2, it is possible to draw attention to the period after the end of the Fuzu game, and as a result, when the Fuzu game ends, etc. In addition, it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the Fuzu game times themselves.

As described above, the mode of opening / closing control of the electric accessory 34a based on the game result of the normal drawing game and the waiting time before / after the opening / closing control are closely related to the effect content on the display screen G. It is considered that the player grasps the game result of the normal figure game from the effect content on the display screen G, and predicts which support state will be changed after that and enjoys it.

On the other hand, it is conceivable that the degree of attention to the game result of the normal figure game, the OP effect, the ED effect, etc. may differ depending on the game state that shifts depending on the game result of the special figure game. That is, for example, in the high frequency support mode, the electric accessory 34a is frequently in the support state, so that it is annoying for the player if the normal drawing game times, the OP effect, the ED effect, etc. are performed each time. There is a possibility that it will end up. Further, in a situation where the variable winning device 32 is opened and closed, such as during the opening / closing execution mode, it is considered that the person is usually more interested in opening / closing the variable winning device 32 than the transition of the support state. Even if the support state transition or end notification (OP effect or ED effect) is performed in such a situation, not only is it more likely to be overlooked, but it is also processed by the open / close control of the variable winning device 32 and the corresponding effect. If the support status notification process is added in a situation where the load increases, there is a concern that the processing load will increase drastically.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the OP period, the ED period, the OP effect, and the ED effect are set to be different depending on the game state on the special drawing side. That is, as shown in FIG. 10, in the low frequency support mode, the first opening result A3, the second opening result B1 and B2, and the third opening result C1 and C2 in which the OP period and the ED period are long-term modes are shown. The probability of distribution is 22/30 when the open type counter C5 is 6 to 19, 20 to 23, and 25 to 28, whereas the OP period and the ED period are short-time modes. The probability of being distributed to A2, the second opening result B3, and the third opening result C3 is 8/30 with the opening type counters C5 being 0 to 5, 24, 29, and the probability of being in the long-time mode is the short-time mode. It is higher than the probability of becoming. On the other hand, in the high frequency support mode, the probability of being distributed to the first opening result A3, the second opening result B1 and B2, and the third opening result C1 and C2 in which the OP period and the ED period are long-term modes is The opening type counter C5 is 6 to 9, 10, 11, 20, 21 and is 8/30, whereas the OP period and the ED period are short-term modes. The probability of being distributed to the opening result B3 and the third opening result C3 is 22/30 with the opening type counters C5 being 0 to 5, 12 to 19, 22 to 29, and the probability of being in the long-time mode is the short-time mode. It is lower than the probability of becoming. In other words, the case where the support state is won in the normal figure winning / failing lottery (step S1601 to step S1604) in the low frequency support mode is longer than the case where the support state is won in the high frequency support mode. It is easy to set the OP period and the ED period, and it is difficult to set the OP period and the ED period in the short-time mode.

As shown in FIG. 10, the OP effect and the ED effect are distributed to the first opening result A3, the second opening result B1, and the third opening result C1 in which the OP effect and the ED effect are performed in the low frequency support mode. The probability that the opening type counter C5 is 6 to 19, 20 to 22, 25 to 27 is 20/30, whereas the OP effect and the ED effect are not performed. The probability of being distributed to the 2 opening result B2, B3 and the 3rd opening result C2, C3 is 10/30 with the opening type counter C5 being 0 to 5, 23, 24, 28, 29, and the OP effect and the ED effect are performed. The probability of being struck is higher than the probability that OP and ED effects will not be performed. On the other hand, in the high frequency support mode, the probability that the OP effect and the ED effect are distributed to the first open result A3, the second open result B1, and the third open result C1 is 6 to 6 for the open type counter C5. In the case of 9, 10 and 20, which is 6/30, the first opening result A1 and A2, the second opening result B2 and B3, and the third opening result C2 and C3 in which the OP effect and the ED effect are not performed are performed. The probability of being distributed to is 24/30 with the open type counter C5 being 0 to 5, 11 to 19, 21 to 29, and the probability that OP effect or ED effect is performed is the probability that OP effect or ED effect is not performed. Is lower than. In other words, the OP production and the case where the support state is won in the normal figure winning / failing lottery (step S1601 to step S1604) in the low frequency support mode is more than the case where the support state is won in the high frequency support mode. ED production is easy to perform.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the length of the OP period and the ED period before and after the support state, the execution frequency of the effect performed during that period, depending on the game state (high / low of the support mode) based on the hit / fail judgment on the special figure side, Is set to be different. Hereinafter, as the process for setting such a setting, the support state start process (step S1704) in the normal game state transition process and the support state end process (step S1818) in the accessory opening / closing process are described in detail. explain. Since the basic processing configuration is the same for the start processing of the support state and the end processing of the support state, they will be described together.

<Start processing of support status and end processing of support status>
As shown in the flowchart of FIG. 32 (start processing of the support state) and the flowchart of FIG. 33 (end processing of the support state), first, in step S2001 (S2101), the processing for grasping the gaming state on the special figure side is high. Determine if you are in frequency support mode. In the case of the high frequency support mode, the distribution table for the normal drawing at the time of high frequency support is referred to in step S2002 (S2102), and in the case of the low frequency support mode instead of the high frequency support mode. , Refer to the distribution table for normal drawing at the time of low frequency support in step S2003 (S2103). After grasping the type of the current support state in step S2002 (S2102) or step S2003 (S2103), the type of the current support state in step S2004 (S2104) is the first opening result A1, A2, the second. It is determined whether or not it is either the opening result B3 or the third opening result C3. In the case of any of these, the process proceeds to step S2005 (S2105), "2" is input to the second timer area T2, and the length of the current OP period (ED period) is set as a short-time mode. Set (ie set to 4 msec). If a negative determination is made in step S2004 (S2104), it is determined in step S2006 (S2106) whether or not the open / close execution mode is in progress. If the open / close execution mode is in progress, the process proceeds to step S2004 (S2104) to set the short-time mode. If the open / close execution mode is not in step S2006 (S2106), "500" is input to the second timer area T2 in step S2007 (S2107), and the length of the current OP period (ED period) is entered. Is set as a long-time mode (that is, set to 1 sec). After executing the process of step S2005 (S2105) or step S2007 (S2107), the start process (end process) of the support state is terminated.

The information of the OP period (ED period) set in these processes is set in the Fuzu opening command / Fuzu ending command set in step S1708 or step S1819, and is an effect control which is a control device on the sub side. It is output to the device 82. The effect control device 82 controls the display control device 212 so that the symbol display device 41 executes the OP effect and the ED effect corresponding to the OP period (ED period) based on the reception of each of these commands. As described above, in the present embodiment, the contents of the OP effect and the ED effect are set so as to have a one-to-one correspondence with the game result on the normal drawing side and the OP period and the ED period. Therefore, on the staging control device 82 side, based on the reception of these Fuzu opening command / Fuzu ending command, the OP period (ED period) included in the command and the Fuzu that triggered the support state are triggered. By grasping the game result on the side, it is possible to grasp the OP effect and the ED effect to be executed.

In the above configuration, it can be said that the OP period and the ED period are set based on the effect content (OP effect, presence / absence and type of ED effect) performed by the control device on the sub side. That is, in the support state on the normal map side, as described above, the effect performed by the control device on the sub side and the game result on the normal map side have a one-to-one correspondence, and the game result is grasped. Can also be said to grasp the production on the sub side. In the special drawing side production, even if the game result is the same, a plurality of types of sub side productions are set for the game result to diversify the production. Therefore, even if the game result on the special figure side is grasped by the main control device 81, it is difficult to specify the effect content to be performed on the sub side, or if the configuration is such that the specification is performed, the processing load is extremely heavy. Can increase. On the other hand, since the Fuzu side plays an auxiliary role on the Tokuzu side, there is less need to diversify the production on the Fuzu side than the production on the Tokuzu side. Therefore, as in the present embodiment, even if the game result and the effect content are associated with each other on a one-to-one basis, it does not lead to an extreme increase in the processing load, and the main control device 81 side according to the effect content on the sub side. The support state can be controlled (opening / closing of the electric accessory 34a, control of the OP period and the ED period), and the association with the staging can be easily performed.

<About the electrical configuration of the staging control device 82 and the display control device 212>
Next, the configuration for performing various effects will be described. First, the electrical configurations of the staging control device 82 and the display control device 212 will be described below with reference to the block diagram of FIG.

The MPU 242 is mounted on the staging control board 241 provided on the staging control device 82. The MPU 242 is a ROM 243 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 242, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 243 is executed. A certain RAM 244, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, and the like are built-in. It is not essential that the ROM 243 and the RAM 244 are integrated into one chip with respect to the MPU 242, and each may be individually chipped. This also applies to the MPU of other control devices.

The MPU 242 is provided with an input port and an output port, respectively. A main control device 81 is connected to the input side of the MPU 242. From the main control device 81, a special figure hold display control command (first hold display control information) such as a special figure shift command and a special figure hold command described later is received. In addition, a special figure game time control command (first game time control information) such as a special figure change command, a special figure type command, and a special figure change end command is received. In addition, the open / close execution mode command (first state transition information) such as the special figure opening command and the special figure ending command is received. Further, it receives a command for controlling the display of the hold of the normal map (information for the second hold display of the normal map) such as the shift command for the normal map and the hold command for the normal map, which will be described later. In addition, it receives a command for controlling the game times (second game time control information) such as a command for changing the normal map, a command for classifying the normal map, and a command for ending the normal map change. It also receives support status commands (second state transition information) such as the Fuzu opening command and the Fuzu ending command.

The ROM 243 is set with various table storage areas 245 in which various tables used for executing various control processes received from the main control device 81 are stored. Further, the RAM 244 receives from the various address storage areas 246 used for storing address information and the like for various effects, the various flag storage areas 247 used for executing various control processes, and the main control device 81. A command storage area 248 for temporarily storing the command, various counter areas 249 used for executing various control processes, and hold information and general information on the special map side based on the command from the main control device 81. A hold storage area 250 for storing hold information on the drawing side is set. The command storage area 248 is configured as a ring buffer that can store a plurality of commands individually and can be read from the previously stored command.

The hold storage area 250 corresponds to the hold ball storage area 232 and the electric service hold area 233 in the main control device 81. As shown in FIG. 35, the holding storage area 250 corresponds to the holding ball storage area 232 on the main control device 81 side, and corresponds to the first sub-side holding area 250a, the second sub-side holding area 250b, and the first sub-side. It has an execution area SAE1. The first sub-side holding area 250a corresponds to the first result display section holding area Ra on the main controller 81 side, and the second sub-side holding area 250b corresponds to the second result display section holding area Rb. The first sub-execution area SAE1 corresponds to the first execution area AE1. The first sub-side holding area 250a and the second sub-side holding area 250b each have four storage areas of a first area, a second area, a third area, and a fourth area. Each area is set so that the information included in the command related to the reserved information on the special figure side received from the main control device 81 side can be stored.

Further, the holding storage area 250 includes a sub-side electric service holding area 250c and a second sub-side execution area SAE2 corresponding to the electric service holding area 233 on the main control device 81 side. The sub-side electric service holding area 250c corresponds to the electric service holding area Rc, and the second sub-side execution area SAE2 corresponds to the second execution area AE2. The sub-side electric service holding area 250c has four storage areas of a first area, a second area, a third area, and a fourth area, respectively. Each area is set so that the information included in the command related to the hold information on the normal map side received from the main control device 81 side can be stored.

As described above, the reserved light emitting units 45 to 47 provided in the variable display unit 36 and the display light emitting units 63 and the speaker unit 64 provided in the front door frame 14 are connected to the output side of the MPU 242. At the same time, the display control device 212 is connected.

The display control device 212 includes a display control board 251 on which an MPU 252 in which a program ROM 253 and a work RAM 254 are combined into chips, a video display processor (VDP) 255, a character ROM 256, and a video RAM 257, respectively, are mounted. There is.

The MPU 252 is a special figure hold display control command (first hold display control information) for performing hold display control on the special figure side, and a special figure for performing variable display of the symbol on the special figure side from the effect control device 82. Figure Receives game times control commands (first game times control information), open / close execution mode commands (first state transition information) for displaying moving images in open / close execution mode, and the like. In addition, a command for controlling the holding display of the normal drawing (information for controlling the second holding display) for controlling the holding display on the normal drawing side, and a command for controlling the game times of the normal drawing for performing variable display of the symbol on the normal drawing side (information for controlling the holding display of the second drawing). The second game round control information), the support state command (second state transition information) for performing the effect during the support state, and the like are received. Then, the received commands are analyzed, or predetermined arithmetic processing is performed based on the received commands to control the VDP 255 (specifically, generate an internal command for the VDP 255).

The program ROM 253 is a memory for storing various control programs executed by the MPU 252 and fixed value data, and also stores and holds JPEG format image data for a background image.

The work RAM 254 is a memory for temporarily storing work data, flags, and the like used when executing various programs by the MPU 252. These work data, flags, and the like are stored in each area of the work RAM 254.

The VDP 255 is a kind of drawing circuit that directly operates an image processing device as a liquid crystal display driver built in the symbol display device 41. Since the VDP 255 is an IC chip, it is also called a "drawing chip", and its substance can be said to be a microcomputer chip with a built-in firmware dedicated to drawing processing. The VDP 255 adjusts the timings of the MPU 252, the video RAM 257, and the like to intervene in reading and writing data, and reads the image data stored in the video RAM 257 from the character ROM 256 at a predetermined timing and displays it on the symbol display device 41.

The character ROM 256 plays a role as an image data library for storing character data such as a symbol displayed on the symbol display device 41. The character ROM 256 holds bitmap format image data of various display symbols, a color palette table to be referred to when determining the expression color of each dot of the bitmap image, and the like.

It is also possible to provide a plurality of character ROMs 256 and share them with each character ROM 256 to store image data and the like. Further, it is also possible to have a configuration in which the JPEG format image data for the background image stored in the program ROM 253 is stored in the character ROM 256.

The video RAM 257 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the symbol display device 41, and the display content of the symbol display device 41 is changed by rewriting the content of the video RAM 257.

<Explanation about the production of special figure game times>
Here, an outline of the production of the special figure game times using the display screen G will be described.

First, the variable display of the special figure game times will be described with reference to FIG. 36.

When the special figure game round is started, the high-speed fluctuation display is first started for all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. In this case, it is difficult or impossible to recognize which symbol is displayed in a variable manner. After that, as shown in FIG. 36 (a), the variation display mode of the upper symbol sequence Z1 is switched from the high-speed variation display to the low-speed variation display in which the player can recognize the symbol displayed in the variation. Then, as shown in FIG. 36 (b), the variation display of the upper symbol sequence Z1 is completed, and the variation display mode of the lower symbol sequence Z3 is switched from the high-speed variation display to the low-speed variation display. Then, as shown in FIG. 36 (c), the variation display of the lower symbol sequence Z3 is completed, and the variation display mode of the middle symbol sequence Z2 is switched from the high-speed variation display to the low-speed variation display. After that, the variable display of the middle symbol column Z2 ends.

After the end of the fluctuation of all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, a waiting time (waiting period) for maintaining the stop display for a predetermined period and waiting is provided (for example, 2 sec), and this game is performed in the waiting time. A definite display is performed to clearly indicate the result of the game to the player. Then, when the waiting time elapses while the combination of the symbols (specific symbol or non-specific symbol) corresponding to the jackpot result is stopped and displayed on any of the effective lines L1 to L5, the jackpot result is generated and the opening / closing is executed thereafter. Move to mode.

Here, in the present embodiment, in addition to the symbols stopped at the effective lines L1 to L5 on the display screen G, the symbols stopped outside the frame shifted to the fluctuation destination side by one symbol from the left line L1 and the right line L3. It is set so that an effect using a symbol that stops outside the frame shifted to the fluctuation base side by one symbol is performed. That is, a part of the symbols (particularly the main symbol) that stop outside these frames is displayed on the display screen G, and after the end of the variable display of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 (after temporarily stopping), A re-variation effect is set in which the partially displayed symbol is moved to the effective lines L1 to L5.

Prior to the detailed description of this revariation effect, an ineffective line set as a line different from the effective lines L1 to L5 in which the combination of the symbols is stopped in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 37.

The ineffective lines include the ineffective lines L6 and L9 set in the out-of-frame area shifted to the fluctuation destination side or the change base side by one symbol from the display screen G, and the effective lines L1 to L5 in the out-of-frame area and the display screen G. Is configured by the ineffective lines L7, L8, L10, and L11 set so as to straddle the set area (hereinafter, this area is also referred to as the in-frame area for comparison with the out-of-frame area). Specifically, the right non-effective line L6 is set in the out-of-frame area shifted from the right line L3 to the fluctuation base side (right side) by one symbol, and extends over the out-of-frame area and the in-frame area on the fluctuation base side. A right-right downward line L7 and a right-right upward line L8 are set. Further, the left non-effective line L9 is set in the out-of-frame area shifted from the left line L1 to the change destination side (left side) by one symbol, and extends over the out-of-frame area and the in-frame area on the change destination side. A left-side right-down line L10 and a left-side right-up line L11 are set. These ineffective lines L6 to L11 are lines used in the production of the pachinko machine 10, and the game result is notified only by the combination of the symbols stopped and displayed on the effective lines L1 to L5.

In this case, for example, even if the waiting period elapses with the combination of symbols corresponding to the jackpot results stopped and displayed on the ineffective lines L6 to L11, the jackpot result does not occur. On the other hand, as described above, in the pachinko machine 10, during this standby period, the combination of symbols corresponding to the jackpot results displayed as stopped on the above-mentioned ineffective lines L6 to L11 moves to the effective lines L1 to L5. Then, a re-variation effect is set, which eventually leads to the occurrence of a jackpot result.

Hereinafter, the flow of the re-variation effect will be illustrated with reference to the schematic diagram of FIG. 38. In FIG. 38, for convenience of explanation, the symbols of the portions that are not actually displayed in the left and right out-of-frame areas are also shown in a pseudo-displayed state.

As shown in FIG. 38 (a), it is assumed that the variable display of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 is completed with the combination of the specific symbols stopped and displayed on the right non-effective line L6 as the non-valid line. Actually, for each symbol stopped and displayed on the right non-valid line L6, only the portion displayed in the display area of the display screen G can be visually recognized. Then, for example, the combination of the specific symbols stopped on the right non-effective line L6 undergoes a fanning effect as if it re-variates, and as shown in FIG. 38 (b), the combination of the specific symbols is on the effective line. Move to (middle line L2 in the figure). After that, when the above-mentioned waiting time elapses, it is clearly shown that the big hit result has been obtained, and the mode shifts to the open / close execution mode.

In this pachinko machine 10, in a part of the case where a big hit result occurs, it is set so that the combination of symbols corresponding to the big hit result is temporarily stopped on the ineffective line, and then the re-variation effect is performed. There is. In other words, the above-mentioned re-variation effect occurs with a predetermined probability when the combination of symbols corresponding to the jackpot result stops on the ineffective line. As described above, a part of the symbol stopped in the out-of-frame area protrudes to the display area side of the display screen G, and the protruding portion is allowed to be visually recognized by the player. Therefore, by paying close attention to the protruding portion, the player can recognize when the combination of symbols corresponding to the jackpot result is stopped and displayed on the ineffective line.

The player expects that the above-mentioned re-variation effect is performed from the time when the stop display is displayed until the waiting time elapses (from the end of the variation display of each symbol column Z1 to Z3). By performing such a display effect, even if the combination of symbols corresponding to the jackpot result does not stop on the effective line, until the game round is finally completed (until the waiting time elapses). It is possible to maintain the expectation that the jackpot may be won, and it is possible to appropriately secure the degree of attention to the game.

Next, the outline of the hold notice (look-ahead effect) on the special drawing side will be described.

In the pachinko machine 10, the special figure hold notice suggesting the content of the hold information stored in the hold ball storage area 232 is predetermined at a timing before the special figure game round related to the hold information is started. It is configured to be done with probability. Therefore, the flow of the hold notice will be illustrated below with reference to the schematic views of FIGS. 39 and 40. In FIG. 40, for convenience of explanation, the symbols of the parts that are not actually displayed in the left and right out-of-frame areas are also shown in a pseudo-displayed state.

The special figure hold notice is made by using the stop result (combination of stop symbols) in the special figure game times before the special figure game times of the hold information subject to the special figure hold notice are started. Will be. Specifically, as a result of stopping the special figure game times before the special figure game times related to the hold information that is the target of the special figure hold notice, a combination of symbols corresponding to the jackpot result is formed on the effective line. By stopping and displaying the same symbol in all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 without causing it, the content of the hold information that is the target of the special figure hold notice is suggested.

For example, if the hold information that is the target of the special figure hold notice is one of the probable change jackpot results, as shown in FIG. 39 (a), the special figure of the hold information that is the target of the special figure hold notice. In the special symbol game times before the game times, the combination of specific symbols is not stopped on the effective line, and the same specific symbol is stopped and displayed in all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 to display the special symbol game times. To end. In the following description, this suspension mode is also referred to as a suspension mode of the special figure suspension notice.

This special figure hold notice is executed over a plurality of special figure game times in the special figure game times before the special figure game times of the target hold information. That is, as the next special figure game times of the special figure game times shown in FIG. 39 (a), as shown in FIG. 39 (b), from the special figure game times of the reserved information subject to the special figure hold notice. Also, in the previous special figure game round, the special figure game round is terminated in the mode of stopping the hold notice by the specific symbol. Then, as shown in FIG. 39 (c), in the special figure game round that is the target of the special figure hold notice, the combination of the specific symbols is stopped and displayed on the effective line to end the special figure game round, and 15R. The occurrence of the probability change jackpot result is clearly indicated.

Although the explanation by the figure is omitted, if the hold information subject to the special figure hold notice is a normal jackpot result, the special figure game before the special figure game times subject to the special figure hold notice is given. At the round, the special figure game round is terminated in the mode of stopping the hold notice by the non-specific symbol. After that, in the special figure game times of the hold information that is the target of the special figure hold notice, the combination of non-specific symbols is stopped and displayed on the valid line to end the special figure game times, and the occurrence of the normal jackpot result is clearly indicated. To. By doing so, the player can grasp which jackpot result will be obtained in the special figure game times of the reserved information subject to the special figure hold notice from the content (stop result) of the special figure hold notice. It becomes possible to do.

This special figure hold notice is executed with a predetermined probability in any of the hold information that results in a big hit, and is also executed with a predetermined probability in the hold information that normally results in a deviation. In this case, since the hold information that is the target of the special figure hold notice is usually out of order, when it comes to the special figure game times that are the target of the special figure hold notice, a combination of specific symbols (non-specific symbols) is used. The special symbol game round is terminated without stopping on the effective line and without displaying the same specific symbol (non-specific symbol) in all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3.

Further, in the present embodiment, a re-variation effect is set for this special figure reservation notice. For example, as shown in FIG. 40 (a), for example, the variation display of each symbol row Z1 to Z3 is displayed in a state where the specific symbol is stopped and displayed in the upper row of the right non-valid line L6 and the middle row and the lower row of the right line L3. Suppose it is finished. In this case, it can be said that the stop mode of the special drawing reservation notice is formed over the area inside the frame and the area outside the frame. Then, for example, as shown in FIG. 40 (b), the stop mode of the special figure reservation notice formed including the out-of-frame area after the fanning effect as if each symbol row Z1 to Z3 re-variates is obtained. , Move to the area within the frame. As a result, the player can recognize that the stop mode of the special figure reservation notice has become effective.

In the pachinko machine 10, the stop mode of the special figure hold notice including the out-of-frame area is temporarily stopped and displayed in a part of the special figure game times in which the special figure hold notice is generated, and then the re-variation effect is performed. Is set to. In other words, the above-mentioned re-variation effect occurs with a predetermined probability when the stop mode of the special figure reservation notice including the out-of-frame area is stopped and displayed. As described above, a part of the symbol stopped in the out-of-frame area protrudes to the display area side of the display screen G, and the protruding portion is allowed to be visually recognized by the player. Therefore, by paying close attention to the protruding portion, the player can recognize when the stop mode of the special figure reservation notice including this out-of-frame area is stopped and displayed. In the following description, the suspension mode of the special drawing reservation notice including this out-of-frame area is also referred to as the suspension mode of the special reservation reservation notice.

As described above, the player expects that the above-mentioned re-variation effect is performed from the time when the stop display of each symbol row Z1 to Z3 is displayed until the waiting time elapses. By performing such a display effect, even if the stop mode of the special figure hold notice is not stopped and displayed in the area within the frame, until the special figure game round is finally completed (waiting time elapses). Until), it is possible to maintain the expectation that the special figure reservation notice may be established, and it is possible to appropriately secure the degree of attention to the game.

In the present embodiment, the re-variation effect in the special figure reservation notice can be displayed in different directions for each symbol row Z1 to Z3. In other words, it is possible to perform re-variation effect by the number of different symbols in each symbol row Z1 to Z3. Therefore, for example, it is possible to re-change the symbol displayed in the left out-of-frame area and the symbol displayed in the right out-of-frame area to the position of any of the effective lines L1 to L5. .. Therefore, in the special reservation reservation notice, the suspension mode of the special reservation reservation is diversified.

<Processing related to various effects on the special drawing side>
The processing related to various effects on the special drawing side will be described first, focusing on the processing related to the revariating effect, and then the processing related to the special drawing hold notice will be described.

<Variation display control processing performed by the staging control device 82>
First, the variation display control process executed by the MPU 242 of the staging control device 82 will be described below. The variation display control process is started every predetermined cycle (for example, 2 msec). Then, in the variation display control process, when the special symbol variation command transmitted from the main control device 81 is received, the symbol display device 41 starts the variation display of the symbol for one game, and the main control device. When the special figure variation end command transmitted from 81 is received, the process of displaying the final stop display of the symbol variation display is executed. Further, in the variable display control process, a process of appropriately modifying the variable display pattern is executed in accordance with the setting for performing the special figure reservation notice.

In the variation display control process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 41, whether or not the special symbol game is being performed in step S2201, that is, whether or not the symbol display device 41 is executing the variation display of the symbol for one game. Judge whether or not. When the change display of the symbol for one game is not performed, it is determined in step S2202 whether or not the special figure change command transmitted from the main control device 81 is received. If the special figure change command has not been received, the change display control process is terminated as it is. If the special figure change command has been received, the special figure change start process is executed in step S2203, and then the change display control process ends.

On the other hand, when the change display of the symbol for one game is performed, it is determined in step S2204 whether or not the special figure change end command transmitted from the main control device 81 is received. If the special figure change end command has not been received, the special figure change intermediate process is executed in step S2205, and then the change display control process ends. If the special figure change end command has been received, the special figure change end process is executed in step S2206, and then the change display control process ends.

Hereinafter, the special figure change start process in step S2203, the special figure change intermediate process in step S2205, and the special figure change end process in step S2206 will be described in detail.

<Process for starting special figure fluctuation>
First, the process for starting the special figure change in step S2203 will be described. The special figure variation start process is a process for starting the special figure game rotation effect based on the reception of the special figure variation command transmitted from the main control device 81. In the special figure change start process, in addition to the presence / absence of the reach display as the effect for the special figure game round, the re-variation effect and the special figure hold notice effect are set. Here, first, the process related to the setting of the reach display and the setting of the re-variation effect will be described, and then the process related to the setting of the special figure hold notice effect will be described.

As shown in the flowchart of FIG. 42, in step S2301, the special figure variation command received this time is read out, and the information on the presence / absence of reach occurrence and the information on the variation display time are specified from the command. Further, as described above, when the main control device 81 transmits the command for changing the special figure, it also transmits the special figure type command. Therefore, in step S2301, the special figure type command received together with the command for changing the special figure received this time is read, and the information of the probability variation jackpot result (2R explicit probability variation jackpot result, 2R unspecified probability variation jackpot result and 15R) is read from the command. Probability change jackpot result), normal jackpot result information, special missed result information or normal missed result information, and other game result information is specified. Then, in step S2301, from the above-specified information, information on whether or not a jackpot has been won, information on the type of jackpot if the jackpot has been won, information on whether or not a reach has occurred if the jackpot has not been won, and variable display time. Information is grasped, and the grasped information is stored in the first sub-execution area SAE1 in the hold storage area 250 of the RAM 244.

In the following step S2302, based on the information grasped in step S2301, it is determined whether or not the game result of the special figure game time to be started this time is the game result corresponding to the jackpot result. In the case of a jackpot result, that is, a 2R explicit probability variation jackpot result, a 2R non-explicit probability variation jackpot result, a 15R probability variation jackpot result, or a normal jackpot result, the effect setting process for the jackpot is executed in the following step S2303.

In the big hit effect setting process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 43, first, the big hit stop result determination process is executed in step S2401. In this stop result determination process, in the case of a 15R probability variation jackpot result, the stop result in which the same combination of specific symbols (main symbols with odd numbers) is established on one effective line L1 to L5 is obtained this time. Determined as a stop result. Further, in the case of a normal jackpot result, the stop result in which the same combination of non-specific symbols (main symbols with even numbers) is established on one effective line L1 to L5 is determined as the stop result this time. .. Further, in the case of the 2R non-explicit probability variation jackpot result or the 2R explicit probability variation jackpot result, the stop result in which a predetermined symbol combination (for example, 3, 4, 1) is established on one effective line L1 to L5 is stopped this time. Determine as a result. The types of main symbols and effective lines L1 to L5 that are stopped and displayed when a big hit result is obtained are randomly determined by lottery or the like.

As shown in FIG. 44 (a), each valid line L1 to L5 and address information are stored in the final stop line table stored in the various table storage areas 245 of the ROM 243, and the final determined in step S2401. The stop line is stored as address information in the final stop line address storage area provided in various address storage areas 246 of the RAM 244. Further, in step S2401, a process of storing the determined stop result information in the stop result address storage area provided in various address storage areas 246 of the RAM 244 is executed. In the following description as well, since the address information of the stop result determined by the various stop result determination processes is stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 244, the description is incorporated.

As described above, the reach display is executed in the game times when the jackpot result occurs, and the variable display time is set longer in the super reach display than in the normal reach display. Therefore, in the following step S2402, the variation display time of the game times executed this time is referred to, and it is determined whether or not the variation display time is the variation display time corresponding to the normal reach display.

If it is determined in step S2402 that the variable display time corresponds to the super reach display instead of the normal reach display, the effect pattern determination process for super reach is executed in step S2403, and then the effect setting process for this jackpot is performed. To finish.

In the effect pattern determination process for super reach, the effect table for super reach stored in the various table storage areas 245 of ROM 243 is acquired, and the change display time and the special figure type of the special figure change command received this time are acquired. The effect pattern of the super reach display corresponding to the game result in the command is determined. Further, in step S2403, a process of storing the address information of the determined effect pattern in the pattern address storage area provided in the various address storage areas 246 of the RAM 244 is executed. Even in the following explanation, in the various effect pattern determination processes, the corresponding effect table is acquired from the ROM 243 to determine the effect pattern corresponding to the variable display time and the game result, and the address of the effect pattern determined in the various effect pattern determination processes. Since the information is stored in the pattern address storage area of the RAM 244, the description is incorporated.

If the variable display time corresponds to the normal reach display in step S2402, the process proceeds to step S2404. In step S2404, a re-variation effect lottery process is executed in which a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to execute the re-variation effect. In such a process, the re-variation effect lottery table stored in the various table storage areas 245 of the ROM 243 and the re-variation effect counter provided in the various counter areas 249 of the RAM 244 are acquired and the re-variation effect is executed. A lottery will be held to determine whether or not. Then, in the following step S2405, it is determined whether or not the re-variation effect lottery has been won based on the processing result of step S2404. By the way, in this embodiment, the probability of winning in the re-variation effect lottery process is 70%, and more than half of the special figure game times in which the normal reach display that results in the big hit is selected is the re-variation effect. Will be changed to.

If the re-variation effect lottery has not been won, the process proceeds to step S2406, and the effect pattern determination process for normal reach is executed. After executing the process of step S2406, the effect setting process for the main jackpot ends. On the other hand, if the re-variation effect lottery is won, the process proceeds to step S2407. In step S2407, a process of rewriting the information stored in the RAM 244 in step S2301 as information which is a special figure game time for performing a revariation effect from the special figure game time where reach occurs is executed.

In the following step S2408, the effect pattern determination process for the revariation effect is executed, and in step S2409, the temporary stop line determination process in the revariation effect is executed. In such a process, it is determined which of the ineffective lines L6 to L11 temporarily stops the symbol combination corresponding to the stop result determined in step S2401. In other words, it is determined which of the ineffective lines L6 to L11 is used to execute the revariation effect. In this case, the effective line as the final stop line determined in step S2401 and the ineffective line as the temporary stop line determined in step S2409 are determined to be parallel to each other.

As shown in FIG. 44 (b), the revariable table stored in the various table storage areas 245 of the ROM 243 has the address information of the ineffective lines L6 to 11 parallel to the effective lines L1 to L5. Is remembered. In step S2409, the temporary stop line is determined with reference to the address information of the final stop line stored in step S2401, and the address information of the temporary stop line is used as the temporary stop line provided in various address storage areas 246 of the RAM 244. Store in the address storage area. In this way, the re-variation effect is an effect of moving the symbol combination stopped at the temporary stop line in parallel, so that the effect is smooth without changing the positional relationship between the symbols constituting the symbol combination. can do.

The relationship between the temporary stop line and the final stop line does not necessarily have to be parallel, and it is possible to include those that are not parallel. In this case, in the re-variation effect between the non-parallel lines, the symbols in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 do not move in parallel, and each symbol is again combined so that the symbol combination corresponds to the jackpot result at the final stop line. It is necessary to display columns Z1 to Z3 in a variable manner. Therefore, by using a configuration in which each symbol sequence Z1 to Z3 is variablely displayed, for example, when the symbol combination corresponding to the normal jackpot result is temporarily stopped on the ineffective line and then re-variated to the final stop line, the probability variation jackpot result is obtained. As a symbol combination corresponding to the above, a display effect (so-called promotion effect) for finally stopping on the effective line may be performed.

After executing the process of step S2409, the process of storing the fanning effect flag in the various flag storage areas 247 of the RAM 244 is executed in step S2410, and the out-of-frame flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 247 of the RAM 244 in step S2411. Execute the process. The fanning effect flag is a flag for the MPU 242 to grasp that the fanning effect should be executed in this special figure game. Further, the out-of-frame flag is a flag for the MPU 242 to grasp that the re-variation effect should be executed (the symbol stopped in the out-of-frame area should be moved to the in-frame area) in this special figure game. After executing the process of step S2411, the effect setting process for the main jackpot is terminated.

Returning to the description of the special figure fluctuation start process (FIG. 42), if it is determined in step S2302 that the result is not a big hit result, the process proceeds to step S2304. In step S2304, it is grasped whether or not reach occurs in this game round. If reach occurs, the process proceeds to step S2305, and the effect setting process for generating reach is executed.

In the effect setting process for generating reach, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 45, first, in step S2501, it is determined whether or not the reach display generated in this special figure game is the normal reach display. When the display is not the normal reach display but the super reach display, the process proceeds to step S2502, and the stop result determination process for super reach is executed. The process of step S2502 is substantially the same as the process of step S2401. However, in the case of the process performed in step S2502, since it corresponds to the out-of-reach, the stop symbol is determined so as not to be the symbol combination corresponding to the jackpot result. That is, the stop result in which the combination of the reach symbols is established on one effective line L1 to L5 is determined as the stop result of this time. In this case, the types of combinations of out-of-reach symbols and effective lines L1 to L5 are randomly determined by lottery or the like. Further, in this determination, the same symbol combination is not established on any of the effective lines L1 to L5, and the symbol of the middle symbol row Z2, which is the same as the symbol forming the reach line, is set with respect to the reach line. The stop result on the effective line is determined so that the final stop is made at the stop position shifted by one front line or one rear line. Further, in step S2502, a process of storing the determined stop result information in the stop result address storage area is executed.

In the following step S2503, the effect pattern determination process for super reach is executed. In this case, by referring to the super reach effect table stored in the various table storage areas 245 of the ROM 243 as in step S2403, the special figure change command and the special figure type command received this time are supported. Determine the content of the super reach display effect. After executing the process of step S2503, the effect setting process for generating the reach is terminated.

Returning to the description of step S2501, if it is determined in step S2501 that the normal reach display is displayed, the process proceeds to step S2504. In step S2504, it is determined whether or not the advance notice condition establishment flag is stored. The notice condition establishment flag is a flag stored in various flag storage areas 247 of the RAM 244 when the notice condition is satisfied in the process for the special figure reservation notice described later. When the notice condition establishment flag is stored, the process for the special figure reservation notice in steps S2505 to S2510 is executed, and then the effect setting process for generating the reach is terminated. The process for the special figure hold notice will be described in detail later, but in this process, the stop result and the effect pattern of the special figure hold notice in the special figure game times of the variable display time corresponding to the normal reach display are determined. ..

If it is determined in step S2504 that the advance notice condition establishment flag is not stored, the process proceeds to step S2511. In step S2511, although the re-variation effect is not performed, it is ineffective whether or not to generate an ineffective alignment effect that stops the symbol combination corresponding to the jackpot result on the ineffective lines L6 to L11 (although it does not result in a jackpot result). Execute the matching production lottery process. In this ineffective alignment effect lottery process, the ineffective alignment effect table stored in the various table storage areas 245 of the ROM 243 and the values acquired from the ineffective alignment effect counters in the various counter areas 249 of the RAM 244 are referred to and non-effective. Decide whether or not to generate an effective matching effect.

In the following step S2512, it is determined whether or not the ineffective alignment effect is generated based on the processing result of step S2511. When generating an ineffective alignment effect, the process proceeds to step S2513, and the information stored in the RAM 244 in step S2301 is rewritten as information that is a special figure game time in which the ineffective alignment effect is performed from the special figure game times in which reach occurs. Execute the process.

After executing the rewriting process in step S2513, the process proceeds to step S2514 to execute the stop result determination process for ineffective alignment. In such a process, it is determined whether or not to stop the symbol combination corresponding to the jackpot result in any of the ineffective lines L6 to L11. In this case, the symbol combination corresponding to the jackpot result to be stopped on the ineffective lines L6 to L11 and the ineffective lines L6 to L11 to be stopped are randomly determined by lottery or the like. As shown in FIG. 46, the stop result table for the ineffective alignment effect stored in the various table storage areas 245 of the ROM 243 is based on the stop symbol of the middle line L2 which is the effective line for the stop information in the ineffective alignment effect. The address information is stored as.

In FIG. 46, the sub-symbols arranged between the main symbols and the main symbols in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are conveniently shown by using a number in the middle of the numbers attached to the left and right main symbols. In step S2514, the information of the symbol combination and the ineffective line determined in the above process is compared with the ineffective alignment effect table, and the stop symbol on the effective line is stored.

After executing the process of step S2514, the effect pattern determination process for ineffective alignment is executed in step S2515. Then, in step S2516, after executing the process of storing the fanning effect flag, the effect setting process for generating this reach is terminated.

If the ineffective alignment effect is not generated in step S2512, the process proceeds to step S2517. In step S2517, an ineffective notice effect is generated in which the stop mode of the special hold notice is formed by the symbols stopped in the frame inner area and the frame outer area, but the re-variation effect is not performed. Whether or not it is drawn. In this ineffective notice effect lottery process, the ineffective notice effect table stored in the various table storage areas 245 of the ROM 243 and the values acquired from the ineffective notice effect counters in the various counter areas 249 of the RAM 244 are referred to and non-valid. Decide whether or not to generate a valid notice effect.

In the following step S2518, it is determined whether or not to generate the ineffective notice effect based on the processing result of step S2517. If the ineffective notice effect is not generated, the process proceeds to step S2519, and the stop result determination process for normal reach is executed. The process of step S2519 is substantially the same as the process of step S2502. However, in Super Reach, the symbol in the middle symbol row Z2, which is the same as the symbol forming the reach line, is finally stopped at the stop position shifted to the left or right by one line with respect to the reach line, whereas in the normal reach display, this shift is achieved. Is not limited to one line, and the stop result of the middle symbol row Z2 is determined in correspondence with the fluctuation display time determined by the main control device 81. In this case, the effective lines L1 to L5 are randomly determined by lottery or the like. Further, in this determination, a stop result is determined in which the same combination of symbols is not established on any of the effective lines L1 to L5. After executing the process of step S2519, in step S2520, the effect pattern determination process for normal reach is executed, and then the effect setting process for generating this reach ends. It should be noted that the stop result of the middle symbol row Z2 may be randomly determined by lottery as long as the symbol combination corresponding to the jackpot result is not obtained.

If it is determined in step S2518 that the ineffective notice effect is to be generated, the process for ineffective notice effect is executed in steps S2521 to S2525, and then the effect setting process for generating the reach is terminated. The process for the ineffective notice effect will be described in detail later, but in this process, the stop result and the effect pattern of the ineffective notice effect in the special figure game times of the variable display time corresponding to the normal reach display are determined. ..

Returning to the description of the special figure fluctuation start process (FIG. 42), if the reach is not generated in step S2304, the process proceeds to step S2306. In step S2306, it is determined whether or not the advance notice condition establishment flag is stored. If the notice condition establishment flag is stored, the effect setting process for the special figure hold notice is executed in step S2307, and if the notice condition establishment flag is not stored, the effect for normal deviation is executed in step S2308. Execute the setting process. Here, the effect setting process for normal deviation will be described, and the effect setting process for the special figure hold notice will be described in detail later. In the effect setting process for the special figure hold notice in step S2307, the stop result and the effect pattern for the special figure hold notice in the special figure game times of the variable display time when the reach is not generated are determined.

In the effect setting process for normal deviation, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 47, first, the ineffective matching effect lottery process is executed in step S2601. Such processing is substantially the same as the processing in step S2511. However, the ineffective matching effect lottery in the special figure game times of the variable display time when the reach occurs in step S2511 and the ineffective matching effect lottery in the special figure game times of the variable display time when the reach does not occur in step S2601 are won. The probabilities are different, and step S2511 has a higher probability of winning the ineffective alignment effect than step S2601. More specifically, in step S2511, an ineffective alignment effect is generated with a probability of 10%, and in step S2601, an ineffective alignment effect is generated with a probability of 1%.

In the following step S2602, it is determined whether or not the ineffective alignment effect is generated based on the processing result of step S2601. When generating the ineffective alignment effect, the process proceeds to step S2603, and the stop result determination process for the ineffective alignment is executed. Such processing is the same as the processing in step S2514. After executing the process of step S2603, in step S2605, the effect pattern determination process for ineffective alignment is executed, and then the effect setting process for this normal deviation is terminated. That is, since the variable display time is shorter than when the reach occurs, the staging setting process for normal deviation does not store the staging flag even when the ineffective alignment effect is performed (the staging effect is performed). Not set).

If it is determined in step S2602 that the ineffective alignment effect is not generated, the process proceeds to step S2605. In step S2605, the ineffective notice effect lottery process is executed. Such processing is substantially the same as the processing in step S2517. However, in the ineffective notice effect lottery in the special figure game times of the variable display time when the reach occurs in step S2517 and the ineffective notice effect lottery in the special figure game times of the variable display time when the reach does not occur in step S2605, The winning probability is different, and step S2517 has a higher probability of winning the ineffective notice effect than step S2605. More specifically, in step S2517, the ineffective notice effect is generated with a probability of 15%, and in step S2605, the ineffective notice effect is generated with a probability of 3%.

In the following step S2606, it is determined whether or not to generate the invalid notice effect based on the processing result of step S2605. If the non-valid notice effect is not generated, the process proceeds to step S2607, and the stop result determination process for non-reach generation is executed. In such a process, the symbol combination corresponding to the jackpot result is not stopped on any of the effective lines L1 to L5, the combination of the off-reach symbols is not stopped, and further, on any of the ineffective lines L6 to L11. The stop result of this time is decided so as not to stop the symbol combination corresponding to the jackpot result and not to be the stop mode of the special hold notice. After that, in step S2608, the effect pattern determination process for non-reach generation is executed, and then the effect setting process for this normal deviation is terminated.

If it is determined in step S2606 that the ineffective notice effect is to be generated, the process for ineffective notice effect is executed in steps S2609 to S2611, and then the effect setting process for this normal deviation is terminated. do. The process for the ineffective notice effect will be described in detail later, but in this process, the stop result and the effect pattern of the ineffective notice effect in the special figure game times of the variable display time when the reach is not generated are determined.

Returning to the description of the special figure variation start process (FIG. 42), after executing any of the processes of step S2303, step S2305, step S2307 and step S2308, the process proceeds to step S2309. In step S2309, a process of outputting a command including information of the stop result and the effect pattern determined in step S2303, step S2305, step S2307 or step S2308 to the display control device 212 as a stop result command and a pattern command is executed. .. Based on the received stop result command and pattern command, the MPU 252 of the display control device 212 performs display control for executing the effect in the special figure game times for the symbol display device 41.

After executing the process of step S2309, in the following step S2310, after executing the process of starting the effect for the special figure game round, the process for starting the change of the special figure is terminated. Specifically, the drive control of the speaker unit 64 and the display light emitting unit 63 is started based on the effect pattern determined in step S2303, step S2305, step S2307 or step S2308 to produce the effect for the special figure game. Start.

<Processing during special figure fluctuation>
Next, the special figure variation intermediate process of step S2205 in the variation display control process (FIG. 41) will be described. The special figure change middle process is a process of executing or changing various effects in the special figure game round started by the special figure change start process.

As shown in the flowchart of FIG. 48, in the special figure fluctuation processing, first, in step S2701, it is determined in step S2701 whether or not the fanning effect flag is stored in 247 in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 244. When the fanning effect flag is stored, it is determined in the following step S2702 whether or not it is the timing to start the fanning effect.

Here, in the MPU 242, the time from the start of the fluctuation display of the symbol on the symbol display device 41 is measured by using the progress counters provided in the various counter areas 249 of the RAM 244. Specifically, when the variation display is started, the progress counter update (addition) process is executed in a predetermined cycle (for example, 2 msec). Further, in the progress table provided in the various table storage areas 245 of the ROM 243, the information of each counter value corresponding to the timing at which the fanning effect should be started is the information of the effect pattern that can be set at the start of the special figure game round. It is stored in a one-to-one correspondence. Then, in step S2702, it is determined whether or not the value stored in the current progress counter is the counter value corresponding to the timing at which the fanning effect in the progress table of the special figure game times should be started.

Regarding the process of grasping whether or not it is the execution timing of another effect in the special figure game (step S2704, step S2707, etc., which will be described later), the execution timing can be grasped by referring to these progress tables and progress counters. do.

If it is determined in step S2702 that it is the start timing of the fanning effect, the fanning effect start command is output to the display control device 212 in step S2703. The MPU 252 of the display control device 212 executes display control for causing the symbol display device 41 to display for the fanning effect based on the received fanning effect start command. As the fanning effect on the display screen G, for example, an effect such as vibrating each symbol sequence Z1 to Z3 so as to move back and forth between the variable destination side and the variable base side is set.

If it is not the timing to execute the fanning effect in step S2702, or after executing the process of step S2703, the process proceeds to step S2704. In step S2704, it is determined whether or not it is the timing to end the fanning effect. When it is the timing to end the fanning effect in step S2704, the fanning effect end command is output to the display control device 212 in the following step S2705. The MPU 252 of the display control device 212 executes control to end the fanning effect being executed on the display screen G to the symbol display device 41 based on the received fanning effect end command.

If the fanning effect flag is not stored in step S2701, it is not the end timing of the fanning effect in step S2704, or after the process of step S2705 is executed, the process proceeds to step S2706. In step S2706, it is determined whether or not the out-of-frame flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 247 of the RAM 244. As described above, the out-of-frame flag is a flag stored when the revariation effect is executed.

When the out-of-frame flag is stored, it is determined in step S2707 whether or not it is the re-variation timing. If it is determined that the re-variation timing is reached, the re-variation command is output to the display control device 212 in step S2708. The MPU 252 of the display control device 212 executes display control of the revariation effect on the symbol display device 41 based on the received revariation command.

If the out-of-frame flag is not stored in step S2706, the re-variation timing is not set in step S2707, or the process of step S2708 is executed, the process proceeds to step S2709. Since steps S2709 and S2710 are processes for giving notice of holding a special figure, they will be described in detail later.

<Process for ending special figure fluctuation>
Next, the process for ending the special figure variation in step S2206 in the variation display control process (FIG. 41) will be described. The special figure variation end process is a process of ending a predetermined effect in the special figure game round started by the special figure variation start process.

In the special figure variation end processing, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 49, in step S2801, the fixed stop processing for setting the effect of the special figure game times to the fixed stop corresponding to the current game result is executed. In such a process, the speaker unit 64 and the display light emitting unit 63 are driven and controlled to perform an effect corresponding to the fixed stop. Then, after outputting the confirmation command to the display control device 212 in step S2802, the process for ending the variation of the special figure is terminated. The MPU 252 of the display control device 212 controls the symbol display device 41 to confirm and stop the symbol based on the received confirmation command.

As described above, the variation display in each special figure game time is finally a definite display corresponding to the game result based on the special figure variation command output from the main control device 81 to the staging control device 82. It is carried out like this. Then, the re-variation effect occurs with a predetermined probability when the game result is one of the big hit results. Further, even if the game result is out of alignment, an effect as if a re-variation effect occurs with a predetermined probability, that is, an ineffective alignment effect occurs.

<Explanation of processing related to special figure reservation notice>
Next, the processing related to the special figure reservation notice will be described.

<Processing performed by the main controller 81>
As the process related to the special figure hold notice, a process executed by the MPU 202 of the main control device 81 and a process executed by the staging control device 82 are set. Therefore, first, the processing on the main control device 81 side will be described, and then the processing on the staging control device 82 side will be described.

<Confirmation process for holding special figures>
First, the confirmation process for holding the special figure executed by the MPU 202 of the main control device 81 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. As described above, the confirmation process for holding the special figure is a process executed in step S405 of the winning process for the operation port of the timer interrupt process.

In the confirmation process for holding the special figure, in step S2901, the information on the number of reserved balls stored in the reserved ball storage area 232 is read, and the information on the number of reserved balls is stored in the register of the MPU 202. In the following step S2902, among the reserved information acquired in the information acquisition process in the winning process for the operating port based on the current winning of the operating ports 33 and 34, the information for jackpot determination, that is, the information latched from the jackpot random number counter C1. To grasp.

In the following step S2903, it is determined whether or not the current winning / failing lottery mode is the low probability mode by determining whether or not the high probability mode flag is stored in the RAM 204. In the case of the low probability mode, in step S2904, the information for jackpot determination grasped in step S2902 is set as the jackpot winning by referring to the hit / fail table for the low probability mode shown in FIG. 8 (a). Identify if it is included in the information. Further, in the case of the high probability mode, in step S2905, the information for the jackpot determination grasped in step S2902 is regarded as the jackpot winning by referring to the hit / fail table for the high probability mode shown in FIG. 8 (a). Identify whether it is included in the set information.

After step S2904 or step S2905, in step S2906, it is determined whether or not the information for jackpot determination grasped in step S2902 corresponds to the jackpot winning. If it is determined that the jackpot winning is supported, the information for determining the type among the pending information acquired in step S2904 based on the current winning of the operating ports 33 and 34 in step S2907, that is, the jackpot type The information latched from the counter C2 is grasped.

In the following step S2908, with reference to the distribution tables shown in FIGS. 9 (a) and 9 (b), the information for determining the jackpot type grasped in step S2907 is the information set as the normal jackpot result, or any of them. Identifies which of the information set as the result of the probabilistic jackpot is included. After that, in step S2909, it is determined whether or not the information for the jackpot type grasped in step S2907 corresponds to the normal jackpot result. If the normal jackpot result is supported, the normal jackpot information is stored in the register of the MPU202 in step S2910, and if any of the probabilistic jackpot results is supported, the MPU202 is stored in step S2911. The probability change jackpot information is stored in the register.

If a negative determination is made in step S2906, if the process of step S2910 is executed, or if the process of step S2911 is executed, the process proceeds to step S2912. In step S2912, out of the pending information acquired in step S2904 based on the current winning of the operating ports 33 and 34, the information for determining the out-of-reach, that is, the information latched from the reach random number counter C3 is grasped.

In the following step S2913, the reach grasped in step S2912 is referred to with the reach determination table (reach determination information group) stored in the reach determination table storage area (reach determination information group storage means) of the ROM 203. It is specified whether the information for judgment is included in the information set as the reach winning. After that, in step S2914, it is determined whether or not the information for reach determination grasped in step S2912 corresponds to the occurrence of reach. When the reach generation is supported, in step S2915, the reach generation information is stored in the register of the MPU 202, and then the confirmation process is terminated. If it does not correspond to the occurrence of reach, this confirmation process is terminated as it is.

Next, the setting process of the special figure hold command in step S406 in the winning process for the operating port will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In the setting process of the special figure hold command, in step S3001, it is determined in step S3001 whether or not either the normal big hit information or the probabilistic big hit information is stored in the register of the MPU 202, so that the confirmation process for the previous special figure hold is performed. In, it is determined whether or not the information for determining the jackpot is specified to correspond to the jackpot winning. When either the normal jackpot information or the probabilistic jackpot information is stored, in step S3002, it is determined whether or not it is the probabilistic jackpot information, in the confirmation process for holding the special figure immediately before. It is determined whether or not the information for type determination is specified to correspond to any of the probabilistic jackpot results.

In the case of probability change jackpot information, the probability variation correspondence hold command is set in step S3003, and in the case of normal jackpot information, the normal correspondence hold command is set in step S3004. It should be noted that the setting of the above command and the setting of various commands described later are performed by storing the command information in the command setting area provided in the RAM 204.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3001 that both the normal jackpot information and the probability variation jackpot information are not stored, the process proceeds to step S3005, and it is determined whether or not the reach generation information is stored in the register of the MPU 202. As a result, it is determined whether or not the information for reach determination is specified to correspond to the occurrence of reach in the confirmation process for holding the special figure immediately before. If the reach occurrence information is stored, the detached reach correspondence hold command is set in step S3006, and if the reach occurrence information is not stored, the complete disconnection correspondence hold command is set in step S3007. do.

After executing any of the processes of step S3003, step S3004, step S3006, or step S3007, in step S3008, the process of setting the information on the number of pending numbers for the pending command is executed. Specifically, the information of the hold command set above is configured as a plurality of bytes of information, and for some of the bits, the information that the hold command itself is a hold command or the hold command. The information of the type of the above is included, and the information of the number of reserved pieces can be set. In this case, in step S3008, first, the information on the number of holds stored in the register of the MPU 202 is read in step S2901 in the confirmation process for holding the special figure immediately before, and then the number of holds in the hold command that has already been set. The information on the number of reserved pieces read out is stored in the bit for information of the above by arithmetic processing such as logical sum. Thereby, with respect to the hold command set in the process of any one of step S3003, step S3004, step S3006 or step S3007, it is specified which number of hold information corresponds to the hold command. Contains information for.

After executing the process of step S3008, the present setting process is terminated. The hold command including the information on the number of holds in step S3008 is transmitted to the effect control device 82 by the external output process in the next normal process. By receiving such a hold command, the effect control device 82 identifies that the hold information has increased.

The method of setting the hold command is to specify by the hold command in the effect control device 82 whether or not the jackpot is won, the jackpot type at that time when the jackpot is won, and whether or not the reach is generated when the jackpot is not won. It is optional if it can be done. For example, a combination of a probabilistic hold command, a normal hold command, an off-reach hold command, and a complete off-hold hold command is individually set according to the number of holds, and in the special figure hold command setting process, the combination is set individually. The configuration may be such that one hold command is selected according to the confirmation result in the confirmation process for holding the special figure.

Further, instead of setting the information on the game result and the variable display time itself as the information on the game result, the number of held numbers, and the variable display time in the hold command, the values of the counters C1, C2, C3, CS1 and the like are set. It may be configured to set. However, the configuration in which the information itself such as the game result is set as described above is the value of each counter C1, C2, C3, CS from the command input / output between the main control device 81 and the staging control device 82. It is preferable from the viewpoint that it is possible to suppress fraudulent acts that can be read. This also applies to other commands input / output between the main control device 81 on the main side and the effect control device 82 on the sub side, and the information set from the counter value, not the counter value itself. Should be configured to set these commands. Even with these commands, if the value of the random number counter on the main side, which is related to the interests of the player, is output to the sub side, the random number update timing may be grasped and fraudulent activity may be performed. be.

<Regarding the special figure hold control process executed by the staging control device 82>
Next, the special figure hold control process executed by the MPU 202 of the staging control device 82 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The special figure hold control process is a part of the processes of a plurality of types repeatedly executed in the MPU 252, and is started in a predetermined cycle (for example, a 2 msec cycle).

First, in step S3101, it is determined whether or not any of the hold commands for special figures has been received from the main control device 81. If an affirmative determination is made in step S3101, the special figure hold notice setting process is executed as a process corresponding to the received hold command in step S3102. This special figure hold notice setting process will be described in detail later.

In the following step S3103, the sub-side reserved storage number SN stored in the various counter areas 249 of the RAM 244 is incremented by 1. Further, in step S3103, a process corresponding to an increase in the number of reserved storages (for example, a process of controlling light emission of the reserved light emitting units 45 and 46 and a process of changing the held information displayed on the display screen G) is executed. Further, in step S3103, a process of storing the hold information of the received hold command in the RAM 244 is executed. As described above, the RAM 244 is provided with a hold storage area 250 as an area for storing hold information, and the hold storage area 250 is provided with a first sub-side hold area 250a and a second sub-side hold area 250b. Has been done. Then, in step S3103, it is specified which of the areas 250a and 250b the reserved command for the special figure received this time is the command related to the reserved information. Then, the information included in the hold command is stored in the area with the smallest number (the area to be determined first) among the empty areas of the first to fourth areas in the areas 250a and 250b to be stored. As already explained, the information included in the hold command includes information on the game result, information on whether or not reach display occurs, and information on reach type (information on variable display time) when reach display occurs. ,It is included. In step S3103, a process of storing these information in the corresponding area is executed.

When a negative determination is made in step S3101 or after the execution of step S3103, the process proceeds to step S3104 to determine whether or not a special figure shift command has been received. If an affirmative determination is made in step S3104, the sub-side reserved storage number SN is subtracted by 1 in step S3105. Further, in step S3105, a process corresponding to the decrease in the number of reserved storages (for example, a process of controlling light emission of the reserved light emitting units 45 and 46 and a process of changing the held information displayed on the display screen G) is executed. Further, in step S3105, the shift process is executed. In this shift process, the hold information set in each area of the hold storage area 250 is sequentially shifted to the lower area side. Specifically, it is specified which area 250a or 250b the special figure shift command received this time corresponds to. Then, while clearing the reserved information of the first area in the areas 250a and 250b to be shifted, the second area → the first area, the third area → the second area, the fourth area → the third area, and so on. Shift the hold display information of. When a negative determination is made in step S3104 or after the process of step S3105 is executed, the special figure hold control process is terminated.

Here, the special figure hold notice setting process of step S3102 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 53.

In the special figure hold notice setting process, first, in step S3201, it is determined whether or not the sub-side hold storage number SN is "1" or more. When the secondary side reserved memory number SN is "0", it is determined in the following step S3202 whether or not the special figure game is currently being executed. In the case where the secondary reserved storage number SN is "1" or more in step S3201 and there is hold information for which the special figure game round has not started at the time when the current hold command is received, or in step S3202. If the special figure game is currently being executed even if the secondary side reserved memory number SN is "0", the process proceeds to step S3203.

In step S3203, it is determined whether or not the winning flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 247 of the RAM 244. The winning flag is a flag stored in step S3206 described later when a probability change correspondence hold command or a normal correspondence hold command is received, and is executed before the special figure game times corresponding to the hold command received this time. This is a flag for the MPU 202 to specify that one of the jackpot results will occur in the special figure game times.

If it is determined that the winning flag is not stored, the process proceeds to step S3204, and it is determined whether or not the notice condition fulfillment flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 247 of the RAM 244. The notice condition establishment flag is a flag stored when the notice condition is satisfied as described above, and more specifically, in the jackpot notice setting process (step S3207) or the miss notice setting process (step S3208) described later. The flag to be stored.

If it is determined that the advance notice condition fulfillment flag is not stored, in step S3205, it is determined whether or not the hold command received this time is a probability change correspondence hold command or a normal correspondence hold command. In the case of a hold command corresponding to these jackpot results, the process of storing the winning flag is executed in the following step S3206, and then the jackpot notice setting process is executed in step S3207. Further, in step S3205, if the received hold command is not a hold command corresponding to the jackpot result, that is, if it is a hold command for loss reach or a hold command for complete loss, a notice for loss is given in step S3208. Execute the setting process.

When it is determined in step S3202 that the special figure game is not being executed, when it is determined in step S3203 that the winning flag is stored, it is determined in step S3204 that the notice condition establishment flag is stored. In this case, or after executing any of the processes of step S3207 and step S3208, the present special figure reservation notice setting process is terminated.

Here, the jackpot notice setting process in step S3207 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 54.

In the jackpot notice setting process, first, in step S3301, the jackpot notice lottery process is executed. In such a process, a lottery for whether or not to execute the special figure hold notice is executed in the hold information corresponding to the hold command received this time. Specifically, the special figure hold notice is executed by referring to the value of the hold notice lottery counter acquired from the various counter areas 249 of the RAM 244 and the hold notice lottery table for the jackpot stored in the various table storage areas 245 of the ROM 243. A lottery will be held to determine whether or not to do so. In the hold notice lottery table for the jackpot of the present embodiment, the probability of winning the hold notice lottery is set to 75%, and more than half of the hold information corresponding to the jackpot result is set to win the hold notice lottery. Has been done.

In the following step S3302, it is determined whether or not the hold notice lottery has been won based on the processing result of step S3301. If the hold notice lottery has not been won, the notice setting process for this big hit is terminated as it is. If the hold notice lottery has been won, the process proceeds to step S3303.

In step S3303, it is determined whether or not the hold command received this time is a normally supported hold command. In the case of the normal correspondence hold command, the process of grasping the advance notice symbol corresponding to the normal jackpot result is executed in step S3304. The notice symbol indicates a common symbol that is stopped and displayed at a predetermined position when all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are stopped and displayed in the special figure reservation notice. In such processing, a non-specific symbol (even number symbol) is grasped as a notice symbol as a notice symbol corresponding to a normal jackpot result. On the other hand, in step S3303, when the command is not the normal correspondence hold command but the probability change correspondence hold command, the process of grasping the advance notice symbol corresponding to the probability change jackpot result is executed in step S3305. In such processing, the specific symbol (main symbol with an odd number) is grasped as the advance notice symbol as the advance notice symbol corresponding to the probability variation jackpot result.

After executing the process of step S3304 or step S3305, the process proceeds to step S3306. In step S3306, a process of storing the advance notice symbol grasped in step S3304 or step S3305 in the advance notice symbol address storage area provided in various address storage areas 246 of the RAM 244 is executed. Then, in step S3307, the process of storing the advance notice condition establishment flag in the RAM 244 is executed, and then the advance notice setting process for this jackpot is terminated.

Next, the disconnection notice setting process of step S3208 of the special figure hold notice setting process (FIG. 53) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 55.

In the disconnection notice setting process, first, in step S3401, it is determined whether or not the hold command received this time is a hold command corresponding to the disconnection reach. If the command received this time is not a hold command for loss reach but a hold command for complete loss, the notice setting process for this loss is terminated as it is.

If it is determined in step S3401 that the command is a hold command corresponding to the loss reach, the hold notice lottery process for the loss is executed in step S3402. In such a process, a lottery for whether or not to execute the special figure hold notice is executed in the hold information corresponding to the hold command received this time. Specifically, whether to execute the special figure hold notice by referring to the value of the hold notice lottery counter acquired from the various counter areas 249 of the RAM 244 and the hold notice lottery table for leaving the various table storage areas 245 of the ROM 243. A lottery will be held to see if or not. In the hold notice lottery table for out of the present embodiment, the probability of winning the hold notice lottery is set to 10%, which is set lower than the notice lottery process for big hits.

In the following step S3403, it is determined whether or not the hold notice lottery has been won based on the processing result of step S3402. If it is determined that the hold notice lottery has not been won, the notice setting process for the main loss is terminated as it is. If it is determined that the hold notice lottery has been won, the process proceeds to step S3404.

In step S3404, the process of determining the advance notice symbol corresponding to the out-of-reach is executed. In such a process, based on the received out-of-reach correspondence hold command, a symbol that forms a reach line when the reach display is executed in the special figure game times of the hold information that triggered the hold command is specified. Then, if the symbol forming the reach line is a specific symbol, the advance notice symbol corresponding to the off-reach is determined as the specific symbol, and if the symbol forming the reach line is a non-specific symbol, the advance notice corresponding to the off-reach is determined. The symbol is determined as a non-specific symbol.

Then, in step S3405, a process of storing the advance notice symbol based on the processing result of step S3404 in the corresponding area of the hold storage area 250 is executed, and in step S3406, the advance notice condition establishment flag is stored in the RAM 244, and then the advance notice condition establishment flag is stored. Ends the notice setting process for this off.

That is, in the jackpot notice setting process (step S3207) or the disconnection notice setting process (step S3208) of the hold notice setting process, it is determined whether or not to give the special figure hold notice based on the received special figure hold command. When the special figure hold notice is given, the notice condition establishment flag is stored in the RAM 244. Then, by storing this notice condition establishment flag, the effect of the special figure hold notice is changed and displayed in the special figure game times executed before the special figure game times that are the target of the special figure hold notice. It is set in the process (FIG. 41).

As already explained, as the effect for the notice of holding the special figure, the effect performed by using each symbol that stops at the effective lines L1 to L5 and the effect that stops at the ineffective lines L6 to L11 on the premise of the re-variation effect are also used. The effect to be performed (that is, the effect of stopping and displaying the stop mode of the special hold notice and then performing the revariable effect) is set. In the following description, the effect performed using each symbol stopped at the effective lines L1 to L5 is also referred to as the first special figure hold notice, and the effect performed using the symbol stopped at the ineffective lines L6 to L11 is also referred to as the second effect. It is also called a special figure hold notice. In the second special figure hold notice, an effect with a fanning effect and an effect without a fanning effect are set. In this second special figure hold notice, the presence / absence of fanning is set by the difference in the variable display time of the special figure game times. Specifically, when the variable display time for non-reach occurrence is set as the variable display time of the special figure game times, the second special figure hold notice without the fanning effect is executed. If a variation display time is set when a longer reach occurs (when a normal reach occurs), the second special figure hold notice accompanied by a fanning effect is executed.

In this way, in order to determine whether or not to execute the fanning effect in the second special figure hold notice from the difference in the variation display time, the second special figure without the fanning effect in the special figure variation start processing of the variation display control process. The figure hold notice is set in the effect setting process (step S2307) for the special figure hold notice when the reach does not occur (step S2304: NO), and the second special figure hold notice accompanied by the fanning effect is the effect setting for the reach generation. It is set in the process (step S2305). Here, the setting of the normal first special figure hold notice will be described first, and then the setting of each second special figure hold notice with / without the fanning effect will be described.

In the effect setting process for the special figure hold notice, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 56, the revariable effect lottery process is executed in step S3501. In such processing, the value of the lottery counter for the re-variation effect in the special figure hold notice acquired from the various counter areas 249 of the RAM 244 and the re-variation effect in the special figure hold notice stored in the various table storage areas 245 of the ROM 243 are used. With reference to the lottery table of the above, it is determined whether or not to execute the revariation effect in the special figure reservation notice, that is, whether to execute the first special figure reservation notice or the second special figure reservation notice. The lottery table for the re-variation effect is set as a lottery table for the jackpot result and a lottery table for the missed result, and the corresponding lottery table is acquired by the hold information that is the target of the special figure hold notice. .. Then, it is determined whether to execute the first special figure reservation notice or the second special figure reservation notice by using these lottery tables and the lottery counter.

In addition, the lottery table for the jackpot result is set to have a higher probability of being the second special figure hold notice than the lottery table for the missed result, and in this embodiment, 70% of the lottery table for the jackpot result is set. The 2nd special figure hold notice (30% is the 1st special figure hold notice), and 10% is the 2nd special figure hold notice in the lottery table for the result of the loss (90% is the 1st special figure hold notice). It is set to be).

In the following step S3502, it is determined whether or not to execute the revariation effect based on the processing result of step S3501. When the first special figure hold notice is executed without executing the revariation effect, the stop result determination process for the first special figure hold notice is executed in the following step S3503. In this stop result setting process, it is grasped whether the information of the notice symbol stored in step S3306 or step S3405 is a non-specific symbol or a specific symbol, and which symbol is selected based on the grasped information. It is determined whether to stop at all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. Then, the stop result table for the first special figure hold notice corresponding to the determined symbol is read from ROM 243, and the symbol combination to be stopped at the effective lines L1 to L5 is determined in the normal hold notice.

Here, the stop result table for the normal hold notice will be described with reference to FIG. 57 (a). Note that FIG. 57 (a) illustrates a stop result table on the middle line L2 when the number attached to the notice corresponding symbol is "7". Further, the sub-symbols arranged between the main symbols and the main symbols in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are conveniently shown by using the numbers in the middle of the numbers attached to the left and right main symbols, and are displayed on the display screen G. As a specific example of the stop result, the stop result of the address information D (1) is shown in a simplified manner.

In the stop result table for the first special symbol hold notice, a plurality of stop results for stopping the same main symbol are set in all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 depending on the symbol combination to be stopped on the effective lines L1 to L5, respectively. The information of the stop result is stored as address information. In this case, the same main symbol does not stop at any of the effective lines L1 to L5, and the same main symbol is used in the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 in any of the effective lines L1 to L5. It is set so that the reach line is not formed by. For example, when the address information D (1) is selected and the advance notice corresponding symbol (7) is stopped at the upper row of the middle line L2 and the middle row and the lower row of the right line L3, "7" is displayed on the middle line L2 from above. The main symbol with "", the sub symbol between "6" and "7", and the sub symbol between "6" and "7" are set to be stopped in this order.

The types of stop results of the first special symbol hold notice are the same on the effective lines L1 to L5 from all types (3 × 3 × 3 = 27) in which the same main symbol is stopped in all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. The number is the number excluding the symbol combination (5) corresponding to the jackpot result where the main symbols are aligned and stopped, and the symbol combination (5 lines x 2 types) that is out of reach, specifically 27-5. -10 = 12 types.

Returning to the description of the effect setting process for the special figure hold notice (FIG. 56), in the stop result determination process of step S3503, the stop result of 1 is determined from the stop result table for the first special figure hold notice and its address. The information is stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 244. Then, in the following step S3504, the effect pattern determination process for the first special figure reservation notice is executed. The stop result determined in step S3503 and the effect pattern determined in step S3504 are output to the display control device 212 as stop result commands and pattern commands in step S2309 of the special figure variation start processing. Then, the MPU 252 of the display control device 212 controls the display of the symbol display device 41 so as to execute the effect corresponding to the first special figure reservation notice. As a result, when the variable display of the symbols is stopped, the symbols corresponding to the information of the advance notice symbols in all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are stopped and displayed at a predetermined display position in the display screen G.

If it is determined in step S3502 that the revariation effect is to be executed and the second special figure hold notice is executed, the process proceeds to step S3505. In steps S3505 to S3507, a process for setting a second special figure hold notice without fanning is performed. Specifically, in step S3505, the stop result setting process for the second special figure hold notice is executed. In this stop result setting process, it is grasped whether the information of the notice symbol stored in step S3306 or step S3405 is a non-specific symbol or a specific symbol, and which symbol is selected based on the grasped information. Decide whether to use the notice-compatible design. Then, the stop result table for the second special figure reservation notice corresponding to the determined notice correspondence symbol is read from ROM 243, and the symbol combination to be stopped at the effective lines L1 to L5 in the second special figure hold notice is determined.

Here, the stop result table for the second special figure reservation notice will be described with reference to FIG. 57 (b). Note that FIG. 57 (b) illustrates a stop result table on the middle line L2 when the number attached to the notice corresponding symbol is "7". Further, the sub-symbols arranged between the main symbols and the main symbols in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are conveniently shown by using the numbers in the middle of the numbers attached to the left and right main symbols, and are displayed on the display screen G. As a specific example of the stop symbol, the stop result of the address information E (3) is shown in a simplified manner.

In the stop result table for the second special symbol hold notice, a plurality of stop results for stopping the same main symbol in all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 including the out-of-frame area are set by the symbol combination to be stopped in the effective lines L1 to L5. The information of the stop result is stored as the address information. In this case, the same main symbols are not aligned and stopped in any of the effective lines L1 to L5 and the non-effective lines L6 to 11, and the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row are not stopped in any of the effective lines L1 to L5. It is set so that the reach line is not formed by the same main symbol in Z3. For example, when the address information E (3) is selected and the advance notice corresponding symbol (7) is stopped at the upper row of the middle line L2, the middle row of the right non-valid line L6, and the lower row of the left line L1, it is on the middle line L2. From the top, a combination of symbols to be stopped is set in the order of the main symbol with "7", the main symbol with "6", and the sub symbol between "7" and "8".

As the type of the stop result of the second special figure hold notice, all types (5 × 5 × 5) in which the same main symbol including the ineffective lines L6 to L11 in the out-of-frame area are stopped in all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. From = 125), the symbol combination (5) corresponding to the jackpot result in which the same main symbols are aligned and stopped on the effective lines L1 to L5, and the non-effectiveness in which the same main symbols are aligned and stopped on the ineffective lines L6 to L11. The number is the number excluding the matching symbol combination (6), the symbol combination that is out of reach (5 lines x 4 types), and the above-mentioned normal hold notice symbol combination (12). 125-5-6-20-12 = 82 types.

In the second special figure hold notice, in addition to the symbols that stop at the valid lines L1 to L5, the special figure hold notice is given using the symbols that stop at the ineffective lines L6 to L11, so it is compared with the first special figure hold notice. And the types of stop results are increasing. Therefore, the appearances in the special figure reservation notice are various, and the diversification of the production is realized.

Returning to the description of the effect setting process for the special figure hold notice (FIG. 56), in the stop result determination process of step S3505, one stop result is determined from the stop result table for the second special figure hold notice and the address thereof. The information is stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 244. Then, in the following step S3506, the effect pattern determination process for the second special figure reservation notice is executed.

The stop result determined in step S3505 and the effect pattern determined in step S3506 are output to the display control device 212 as a pattern command and a stop result command in step S2309 of the variation start processing. Then, the MPU 252 of the display control device 212 controls the display of the symbol display device 41 so as to execute the effect corresponding to the second special figure reservation notice. As a result, when the variable display of the symbol is stopped, the symbol corresponding to the information of the advance notice symbol is stopped and displayed at a predetermined display position in the display screen G in all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3.

After executing the process of step S3506, the process of storing the out-of-frame flag in the RAM 244 is executed in step S3507. This makes it possible to make an affirmative determination in step S2706 in the variable middle processing (FIG. 48) and perform the re-variation effect.

After executing the process of step S3504 or step S3507, the process of storing the notice execution flag in the RAM 244 is executed in step S3508, and then the effect setting process for the present special figure hold notice is terminated. The notice execution flag is a flag for the MPU 242 to grasp that the notice condition is satisfied and it is a special figure game time to execute one of the special figure hold notices.

Next, a process relating to the setting of the second special figure hold notice accompanied by the fanning effect will be described. Such processing is performed in the effect setting process (FIG. 45) for generating reach in the process for starting special figure variation.

Explaining again with reference to FIG. 45, when the special figure game times to be started are the special figure game times corresponding to the occurrence of reach and the reach mode is the normal reach display (step S2501: YES). If the notice condition establishment flag is stored (step S2504: YES), the process proceeds to step S2505. In step S2505, a process is executed in which the information stored in the RAM 244 in step S2301 in the process for starting the special figure change is rewritten from the game time in which the reach is generated to the game time in which the second special figure hold notice with the fanning effect is performed. ..

In the following step S2506, the stop result determination process for the second special figure hold notice is executed, and in step S2507, the effect pattern determination process for the second special figure hold notice is executed. These processes are the same as the processes of step S3505 and step S3506. Then, the stop result determined in step S2506 and the effect pattern determined in step S2507 are output to the display control device 212 as a pattern command and a stop result command in step S2309 of the variation start processing. The MPU 252 of the display control device 212 controls the display of the symbol display device 41 so as to execute an effect corresponding to the second special figure hold notice. As a result, when the variable display of the symbols is stopped, the symbols corresponding to the information of the advance notice symbols in all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are stopped and displayed at a predetermined display position on the display screen G.

In the following step S2508, the process of storing the out-of-frame flag in the RAM 244 is executed, and in the step S2509, the process of storing the fanning effect flag in the RAM 244 is executed. As a result, in the special figure variation middle processing, the affirmative determination is performed in step S2701 and the processing for the fanning effect is performed, and the affirmative determination is performed in step S2708 and the revariation effect processing is performed. Then, in step S2510, the process of storing the advance notice execution flag in the RAM 244 is executed, and then the effect setting process for generating the reach is terminated.

That is, when setting the second special figure hold notice without the fanning effect, the fanning effect flag is not stored, and when the second special figure holding notice with the fanning effect is set, the fanning effect flag is stored. The processing configurations are the same for the stop result determination process and the effect pattern determination process other than the above.

Further, in the effect setting process for generating reach, although the stop result is the same as in the case of the second special figure hold notice, the process related to the ineffective notice effect that does not perform the re-variation effect is also performed. Such processing is performed in steps S2521 to S2525 when the non-valid notice effect is won in the non-valid notice lottery process of step S2517 (step S2518: YES).

That is, in step S2521, the process of rewriting the information stored in the RAM 244 in step S2301 in the fluctuation start processing from the game times in which the reach is generated to the game times in which the second special figure hold notice effect is performed is executed. By the way, as described above, in the special figure game times, the non-valid notice effect is performed instead of the special figure hold notice effect, but the stop result and the effect pattern of the symbol are the same between the second special figure hold notice and the invalid notice effect. The only difference is whether or not the re-variation effect is performed. Therefore, in step S2521, first, as the production of the special figure game time this time, it is stored as the special figure game time in which the second special figure reservation notice effect is performed. By doing so, the types of information of the special figure game to be stored are reduced, and the storage capacity is reduced.

In the following step S2522, the stop result setting process for the second special figure hold notice is executed, and in step S2523, the effect pattern determination process for the second special figure hold notice is executed. Such processing is the same as the processing of step S2506 and step S3506, step S2507 and step S3507. Then, the stop result determined in step S2522 and the effect pattern determined in step S2523 are output to the display control device 212 as a pattern command and a stop result command in step S2309 of the variation start processing. Then, the MPU 252 of the display control device 212 controls the display of the symbol display device 41 so as to execute the variable display corresponding to the second special figure reservation notice. As a result, when the variable display of the symbols is stopped, the symbols corresponding to the information of the advance notice symbols in all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are stopped and displayed at a predetermined display position on the display screen G. However, since the out-of-frame flag is not stored in the above processing, the effect executed as described above is not the second special figure hold notice effect but the ineffective notice effect.

Then, in step S2524, a process of storing the invalid notice flag in the various flag storage areas 247 of the RAM 244 is executed. The non-valid notice flag is a flag for the MPU 242 to grasp that it is a game time for performing the non-valid notice effect.

In the following step S2525, a process of storing the fanning effect flag in the RAM 244 is executed. As a result, an affirmative determination is made in step S2701 in the special figure variation middle processing, and the processing for the fanning effect is performed. After executing the process of step S2525, the effect setting process for generating the reach is terminated.

Further, the above-mentioned ineffective notice effect may not be accompanied by a fanning effect. This is set in the effect setting process (step S2308) for normal deviation in the special figure change start process. Such processing will be described again with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 47.

If the invalid notice effect is won in the invalid notice lottery process performed in step S2605 (step S2606: YES), the process proceeds to step S2609. In step S2609, a process of storing the ineffective notice effect in the RAM 244 is executed as the effect of the special figure game times this time. Further, in step S2609, the stop result setting process for the second special figure hold notice is executed. In step S2610, the effect pattern determination process for the second special figure reservation notice is executed. These processes are the same as the processes of step S2506, step S2522 and step S3505, step S2507, step S2523 and step S3506. The stop result determined in step S2609 and the effect pattern determined in step S2610 are output to the display control device 212 as a pattern command and a stop result command in step S2309 of the variation start processing.

In the MPU 252 of the display control device 212, the display is controlled so that the symbol display device 41 executes the variable display corresponding to the special hold notice. As a result, when the variable display of the symbols is stopped, the symbols corresponding to the information of the advance notice symbols in all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are stopped and displayed at a predetermined display position on the display screen G. However, since the out-of-frame flag is not stored in the above processing, the effect is not the second special figure hold notice effect but the ineffective notice effect.

That is, in the ineffective notice effect, the stop result is the same as in the second special figure hold notice (that is, the stop mode of the special hold notice), and there is a re-variation effect in the ineffective notice effect and the second special figure hold notice effect. The production pattern is the same because only the difference is made. In this way, while standardizing the content of the stop result on the display screen G, the effect (whether it is the second special figure hold notice effect or the ineffective notice effect) is different depending on the revariable effect. We are striving to achieve both diversification and simplification of processing for variable display.

After executing the process of step S2610, in step S2611, the process of storing the non-valid notice flag in the RAM 244 is executed, and then the effect setting process for this normal deviation is terminated.

As described above, at the start of each special figure game, the stop result and the fluctuation pattern on the display screen G are determined, and the effect of each special figure game is performed. Here, a prize may be generated in the operating ports 33 and 34 at the timing when the special figure game round is being produced, and the hold information based on the prize may be subject to the special figure hold notice. In this case, in the present embodiment, a process for giving a special figure hold notice is performed in the special figure game times being executed. Hereinafter, this process will be described.

This process is performed in steps S2709 and S2710 of the process for changing the special figure. Explaining again with reference to FIG. 48, in step S2709, it is determined whether or not the advance notice execution flag is not stored in the RAM 244 even though the advance notice condition establishment flag is stored in the RAM 244. Here, in the pachinko machine 10, as described above, the notice execution flag is stored by executing the special figure change start process in the situation where the notice condition establishment flag is stored. Therefore, the situation where the advance notice execution flag is not stored even though the advance notice condition fulfillment flag is stored means that the change display of the symbol in one game is started after the special figure change start processing is executed. After that, a new prize is generated for the operating ports 33 and 34, and it means that the condition for executing the special figure hold notice for the hold information acquired based on the prize is satisfied.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S2709, the replacement process is executed in step S2710, and then the process for changing the special figure is terminated. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S2709, the process for changing the special figure is terminated as it is.

Here, the replacement process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In the replacement process, first, in step S3601, it is determined whether or not the invalid notice flag is stored. If it is determined that the invalid notice flag is stored, the invalid notice flag is deleted in the following step S3602. Then, in step S3603, the out-of-frame flag is stored in the RAM 244, and in step S3603, the advance notice execution flag is stored in the RAM 244, and then the replacement process is terminated.

That is, in the present embodiment, when the second special figure hold notice and the stop result are the same at the start of the special figure game, but the ineffective notice effect in which the re-variation effect is performed is set, the non-valid notice effect is set. The notice effect will be changed to the second special figure hold notice where the re-variable effect will be performed. In this case, it is possible to suppress a local increase in the processing load without the need to modify the stop symbol.

On the other hand, if the invalid notice flag is not stored in step S3601, the stop result correction process is executed in step S3605, and then the replacement process is terminated.

Here, the stop result correction process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 59.

In the stop result correction process, first, it is determined whether or not the special figure game times being executed in step S3701 are the special figure game times corresponding to the super reach display. If it is determined that the special figure game times correspond to the super reach display, the main stop symbol correction process is terminated as it is. That is, in the case of the super reach display, even if the notice condition is satisfied, the super reach display is performed as it is without giving the special figure hold notice.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the special figure game times corresponding to the super reach display are not performed, the information of the advance notice symbol is read from the RAM 244 in step S3702. Then, in step S3703, it is determined whether or not all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are undergoing high-speed fluctuation.

The variation display of the symbol in the pachinko machine 10 will be described again with reference to FIG. 36. When the variation display of the symbol is performed in the symbol display device 41, the upper symbol row Z1, the middle symbol row Z2, and the lower symbol row Z3 are first performed. High-speed fluctuation display (or first speed display) is performed so that the identification of each symbol displayed in the display screen G in all the symbol rows of the above is impossible or difficult in appearance. After that, as the period of T1 elapses from the start of the fluctuation, as shown in FIG. 36A, first, regarding the upper symbol row Z1, the identification of each symbol displayed in the display screen G in the upper symbol row Z1 is made. Is switched from the high-speed fluctuation display to the low-speed fluctuation display (or the second speed display slower than the first speed display) so that the appearance is easy, and when the period of T2 has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, the above symbol column Z1 The fluctuation display in is stopped. Further, when the period of T2 has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation in this way, as shown in FIG. 36 (b), each of the lower symbol rows Z3 is displayed in the display screen G in the lower symbol row Z3. The high-speed fluctuation display is switched to the low-speed fluctuation display so that the symbols can be easily identified in appearance, and the fluctuation display in the lower symbol row Z3 is stopped when the period of T3 has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation. Further, when the period of T3 has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation in this way, as shown in FIG. 36 (c), in the middle symbol row Z2, each displayed in the display screen G in the middle symbol row Z2. The high-speed fluctuation display is switched to the low-speed fluctuation display so that the design can be easily identified in appearance. Then, when the period of T4 has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, the fluctuation display in the middle symbol row Z2 is stopped.

In the above configuration, the periods of T1, T2, T3, and T4 are determined in a one-to-one correspondence with various effect patterns according to the various effect tables stored in the ROM 243. Then, the reach effect and the like are performed after the lapse of the T3 period and until the lapse of the T4 period.

It is not essential that the timing at which the fluctuation display of the symbol in the upper symbol row Z1 is stopped and the timing at which the fluctuation display speed of the symbol in the lower symbol row Z3 is switched at the same time are not essential, and even if the timings of both are different. good. Similarly, it is not essential that the timing at which the fluctuation display of the symbol in the lower symbol row Z3 is stopped and the timing at which the fluctuation display speed of the symbol in the middle symbol row Z2 is switched are simultaneous, and the timings of both are different. May be good. Further, T1, T2, and T3 correspond to the number of reserved information stored at the start of the special figure game, and more specifically, one-to-one with the number of reserved information stored at the start of the game. The configuration may be defined in correspondence with each other. Further, when the number of reserved information stored at the start of the special figure game is the maximum reserved number, any one of T1, T2, and T3 may be set to "0".

As described above, the MPU 242 measures the time from the start of the fluctuation display of the symbol on the symbol display device 41 by using the progress counter provided in the RAM 244. Further, in the progress table provided in the ROM 243, the information of each counter value corresponding to the above T1, T2, and T3 is associated with the information of the effect pattern that can be set at the start of the special figure game on a one-to-one basis. It is remembered in the state of being. Then, in step S3703, all the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 fluctuate at high speed by determining whether or not the value stored in the current progress counter is less than the counter value corresponding to the above T1 in the progress table. Determine if it is inside.

As shown in the flowchart of FIG. 59, when it is determined in step S3703 that all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are undergoing high-speed fluctuation, the first correction process is executed in step S3704, and then the stop result correction is performed. End the process. Further, if all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are not undergoing high-speed fluctuation in step S3703, that is, after the period of T1 has elapsed, whether or not the lower symbol row Z3 is undergoing high-speed fluctuation in step S3705. Is determined. In such processing, it is determined whether or not the value stored in the current progress counter is less than the counter value corresponding to the T2 in the progress table. When the lower symbol column Z3 is undergoing high-speed fluctuation, that is, before the elapse of the period of T2, the second correction process is executed in step S3706, and then the stop result correction process is terminated. Further, if the lower symbol string Z3 is not undergoing high-speed fluctuation in step S3705, that is, after the period of T2 has elapsed, whether or not the middle symbol sequence Z2 is undergoing high-speed fluctuation is determined in step S3707. judge. In such processing, it is determined whether or not the value stored in the current progress counter is less than the counter value corresponding to the T3 in the progress table. When the middle symbol string Z2 is undergoing high-speed fluctuation, that is, before the elapse of the period of T3, the third correction process is executed in step S3708, and then the stop result correction process is terminated. If the middle symbol sequence Z2 is not undergoing high-speed fluctuation in step S3707, that is, after the period of T3 has elapsed, the stop result is not corrected and the main stop result correction process is terminated as it is.

Hereinafter, the first correction process of step S3704, the second correction process of step S3706, and the third correction process of step S3708 will be described.

In the first correction process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 60, the revariation effect lottery process is executed in step S3801, and it is determined in step S3802 whether or not this lottery has been won. The processing of step S3801 and step S3802 is the same as the processing of step S3501 and step S3502 in the effect setting processing for the special drawing reservation notice. When the revariation effect is won in step S3805, the process of storing the out-of-frame flag in the RAM 244 is executed in step S3803. As a result, in the next and subsequent special figure fluctuation processing, an affirmative determination is made in step S2706, and the processing for re-variation effect is performed.

In the following step S3804, it is determined whether or not the special figure game times being executed are the game times corresponding to the normal reach display. In the case of the normal reach display, the process of storing the fan flag in the RAM 244 is executed in step S3805. As a result, an affirmative determination is made in step S2701 in the processing for changing the special figure from the next time onward.

If the revariation effect is not won in step S3802, the normal reach display is not performed (reach does not occur) in step S3804, or the process of step S3805 is executed, the process proceeds to step S3806. In step S3806, the first-stage correction table as the first-stage correction information group is referred to from ROM 243. As shown in FIG. 61 (a), the first-stage correction table is a pair for any combination of the information of the initial effect pattern and the information of the notice symbol except when the super reach display occurs. The information of the effect pattern for the first correction is set corresponding to in 1, and the address information is set corresponding to the information of the effect pattern for each first correction. In this case, all the information of the effect pattern for the first correction is set as the information of the effect pattern after the period of T1 has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation. However, the information of the effect pattern for each first correction is set so as not to change the variable display time in the initially set effect pattern.

Incidentally, in the first stage correction table, the information of each effect pattern of the first special figure hold notice and the second special figure hold notice is set in correspondence with the information of the notice symbol. Therefore, the effect pattern to be referred to is different depending on whether the revariable effect is won in step S3802 or not.

In the following step S3807, the address information for the first correction corresponding to the combination of the type information of the notice symbol specified in step S3702 and the information of the effect pattern being executed stored in the various address storage areas 246. (First correction information) is specified from the first stage correction table, and the specified address information is stored in the correction address storage area provided in various address storage areas 246 of the RAM 244.

Since the address information for the first correction is stored in the correction address storage area, the MPU 242 determines that the period of T1 has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation based on the information of the progress counter, and then the first setting is set this time. 1 The display light emitting unit 63 and the speaker unit 64 are driven and controlled so as to perform an effect corresponding to the information of the effect pattern for correction.

Then, in step S3808, a correction command including the address information for the first correction stored in step S3807 is output to the display control device 212. The display control device 212 stores the address information for the first correction in the display side correction address storage area of the work RAM 254 based on the reception of the correction command. Further, the program ROM 253 of the display control device 212 stores a table similar to the first-stage correction table shown in FIG. 61 (a). Then, the fluctuation display pattern for the first correction is specified from the address information for the first correction, and the fluctuation display of the symbol is executed with the fluctuation display pattern. As a result, when the variable display of the symbol is stopped, the symbol corresponding to the information of the advance notice symbol is stopped and displayed at a predetermined position on the display screen G in all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3.

After executing the process of step S3808, the process of storing the advance notice execution flag in the RAM 244 is executed in step S3809, and then the first correction process is terminated.

Next, the second correction process of step S3706 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 62.

In the second correction process, first, in step S3901, the information of the stop symbol of the upper symbol sequence Z1 in the effective lines L1 to L5 is grasped based on the information stored in the various address storage areas 246. In this case, there are cases where there is one main symbol and cases where there are two main symbols as the type information of the stopped symbol. In the case of one, it is specified as the symbol to be determined, and in the case of two, it is specified. Both of them are specified as the symbols to be judged.

In the following step S3902, it is determined whether or not the first correction condition is satisfied for the symbol to be determined specified in step S3901. The first correction condition is that when the information of the notice symbol is a specific symbol, that is, the main symbol with an odd number, the first modification condition is satisfied if the symbol to be determined is the specific symbol. When the type information of the advance notice symbol is a non-specific symbol, that is, the main symbol with an even number, the first symbol is the non-specific symbol when the symbol to be determined is a non-specific symbol. It is set so that it is determined that the correction condition is satisfied.

If it is determined that the first correction condition is not satisfied, the process proceeds to step S3903, and the upper symbol sequence Z1 is stopped in the out-of-frame area (invalid lines L6 to L11) based on the information stored in the various address storage areas 246. Grasp the information of the design. In this case, there are cases where the number of main symbols is 0 and cases where there are 2 main symbols as the type information of the stopped symbols. In the case of, both of them are specified as the symbols to be determined.

In the following step S3904, it is determined whether or not the second correction condition is satisfied for the symbol to be determined specified in step S3903. Similar to the first modification condition, the second modification condition is the same as the first modification condition, if the information of the advance notice symbol is a specific symbol, that is, a main symbol with an odd number, if the symbol to be determined is the specific symbol. 2 If it is set so that it is determined that the correction condition is satisfied and the type information of the advance notice symbol is a non-specific symbol, that is, a main symbol with an even number, the symbol to be determined is It is set so that it is determined that the second correction condition is satisfied when the symbol is a non-specific symbol.

That is, the symbol to be determined differs between the first modification condition and the second modification condition, the first modification condition targets the symbol stopped at the effective lines L1 to L5, and the second modification condition is the ineffective line L6. The symbol that stops at ~ L11 (outside the frame area) is the determination target. In this way, by setting the stop symbol in the out-of-frame area as the determination target, the possibility that the correction condition is satisfied is improved. Specifically, in step S3901, when the stop symbol is a combination of the specific symbol and the non-specific symbol, the first correction condition is satisfied regardless of the notice symbol, but the stop symbol is not specified as the specific symbol. If it is one of the symbols and the notice symbol is the other, the first modification condition is not satisfied. On the other hand, in step S3904, even if the first correction condition is not satisfied, the second correction condition is satisfied because the other symbol is a stop symbol in the out-of-frame area.

If it is determined in step S3904 that the second correction condition is not satisfied, the stop symbol correction process is terminated as it is. That is, when the second modification condition is not satisfied, the effect of the special figure game is continued with the effect pattern set in the process for starting the special figure change without executing the hold notice. By the way, the case of making a negative judgment in step S3904 is a case where two main symbols are stopped in the upper symbol row Z1 of the effective lines L1 to L5, and the stopped symbols are specific symbols (1 and 9 are attached). Only when the main symbol) and the notice symbol are non-specific symbols.

If it is determined in step S3904 that the second correction condition is satisfied, the process of storing the out-of-frame flag in the RAM 244 is executed in step S3905. As a result, an affirmative determination is made in step S2706 of the process for special figure fluctuation from the next time onward, and the process for re-variation effect is performed.

In the following step S3906, it is determined whether or not the special figure game times being executed are the special figure game times corresponding to the normal reach display. If it is determined that the special figure game times correspond to the normal reach display, the process of storing the fan flag in the RAM 244 is executed in step S3907. As a result, an affirmative determination is made in step S2701 in the processing for changing the special figure from the next time onward.

If the first correction condition is satisfied in step S3902, if the normal reach is not displayed (reach does not occur) in step S3906, or after the process of step S3907 is executed, the process proceeds to step S3908. In step S3908, the second-stage correction table as the second-stage correction information group stored in the ROM 243 is referred to. As shown in FIG. 61 (b), the second-stage correction table is for any combination of the information of the initial fluctuation display pattern and the information of the type of the symbol to be determined, except when the super reach display occurs. The information of the variation display pattern for the second correction is set in a one-to-one correspondence, and the address information is set in correspondence with the information of the variation display pattern for each second correction. In this case, all the information of the variation display pattern for the second correction is set as the information of the variation display pattern after the period of T2 has elapsed from the start of the variation. However, the information of the variation display pattern for each second correction is set so as not to change the variation display time in the initially set variation display pattern.

Incidentally, in the second stage correction table, the information of each effect pattern of the first special figure hold notice and the second special figure hold notice is set in correspondence with the information of the notice symbol. Therefore, there are cases where the first correction condition is satisfied in step S3902 and the first special figure reservation notice is corrected, and cases where the second correction condition is satisfied and the second special figure reservation notice is corrected in step S3904. So, the effect patterns to be referred to are different.

In the following step S3909, the type information of the symbol to be determined that the correction condition is satisfied in step S3902 or step S3904, and the effect of the special figure game times being executed stored in the various address storage areas 246. The address information for the second correction (second correction information) corresponding to the combination of the pattern information is specified from the second stage correction table, and the specified address information is stored in the correction address storage area.

In addition, when a plurality of symbols are subject to judgment and the correction condition is satisfied for any of the symbols, the symbol to be judged that the above-mentioned correction condition is satisfied is determined by lottery or the like. It is configured. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the symbol on the side with the smaller number or the symbol on the side with the larger number is configured to be the symbol to be determined that the above-mentioned correction condition is satisfied. May be good.

Since the address information for the second correction is stored in the correction address storage area, the MPU 242 determines that the period of T2 has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation based on the information of the progress counter, and then the second setting is set this time. The display light emitting unit 63 and the speaker unit 64 are driven and controlled so as to perform an effect corresponding to the information of the modified variable display pattern.

Then, in step S3910, a correction command including the address information for the second correction stored in step S3909 is output to the display control device 212. The display control device 212 stores the address information for the second correction in the display side correction address storage area of the work RAM 254 based on the reception of the correction command. The program ROM 253 of the display control device 212 stores a table similar to the second-stage correction table shown in FIG. 61 (b). Then, the fluctuation display pattern for the second correction is specified from the address information for the second correction, and the fluctuation display of the symbol is executed with the fluctuation display pattern. As a result, when the variable display of the symbol is stopped, the symbol corresponding to the information of the advance notice symbol is stopped and displayed at a predetermined position on the display screen G in all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3.

After executing the process of step S3910, the process of storing the advance notice execution flag in the RAM 244 is executed in step S3911, and then the second correction process is terminated.

Next, the third correction process of step S3708 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 63.

In the third correction process, first, in step S4001, the information of the stop symbol of the upper symbol row Z1 and the information of the stop symbol of the lower symbol row Z3 are grasped based on the information stored in the various address storage areas 246. In this case, there are cases where the main symbol is one and cases where the main symbol is two as the information of the stop symbol of the upper symbol row Z1, but when there is one, it is specified as the symbol to be determined in the upper symbol row Z1. However, in the case of two, both of them are specified as the symbols to be determined in the upper symbol string Z1. In addition, there are cases where there is one main symbol and cases where there are two main symbols as information on the stopped symbols in the lower symbol row Z3, but in the case of one, it is specified as the symbol to be determined in the lower symbol row Z3. In the case of two, both of them are specified as the symbols to be determined in the lower symbol string Z3.

In the following step S4002, it is determined whether or not the third correction condition is satisfied for the symbol to be determined specified in step S4001. The third modification condition is satisfied when the symbol to be determined in the upper symbol row Z1 and the symbol to be determined in the lower symbol row Z3 have a common symbol of the same type. Is set so that it is not determined. Further, even if a common symbol of the same type exists, if the information of the advance notice symbol is a specific symbol, that is, a main symbol with an odd number, the common symbol of the same type is used. If it is set so that it is determined that the third modification condition is satisfied when it is a specific symbol, and the type information of the advance notice symbol is a non-specific symbol, that is, a main symbol with an even number, the above It is set so that it is determined that the third modification condition is satisfied when the common symbol of the same type is a non-specific symbol. Further, in the third modification condition, even if the common symbol of the same type exists, the stop result corresponding to the reach display, that is, the reach line is formed by the common symbol of the same type. Is set so that the third modification condition is not satisfied.

If it is determined that the third correction condition is not satisfied, in step S4003, based on the information stored in the various address storage areas 246, the information of the stop symbol of the upper symbol sequence Z1 in the out-of-frame area and the information of the stop symbol of the upper symbol sequence Z1 are used. Grasp the information of the lower symbol column Z3. In this case, there are cases where the main symbol is one and cases where the main symbol is two as the information of the stop symbol of the upper symbol row Z1, but when there is one, it is specified as the symbol to be determined in the upper symbol row Z1. However, in the case of two, both of them are specified as the symbols to be determined in the upper symbol string Z1. In addition, there are cases where there is one main symbol and cases where there are two main symbols as information on the stopped symbols in the lower symbol row Z3, but in the case of one, it is specified as the symbol to be determined in the lower symbol row Z3. In the case of two, both of them are specified as the symbols to be determined in the lower symbol string Z3.

In the following step S4004, it is determined whether or not the fourth correction condition is satisfied for the symbol to be determined specified in step S4001 and step S4003. The fourth modification condition is a modification condition when a common symbol of the same type exists in the symbol to be determined in the upper symbol row Z1 including the area outside the frame and the symbol to be determined in the lower symbol row Z3. Is set so that it is not determined that is satisfied. Further, even if a common symbol of the same type exists, if the information of the advance notice symbol is a specific symbol, that is, a main symbol with an odd number, the common symbol of the same type is used. If it is set so that it is determined that the fourth modification condition is satisfied when it is a specific symbol, and the type information of the advance notice symbol is a non-specific symbol, that is, a main symbol with an even number, the above It is set so that it is determined that the fourth modification condition is satisfied when the common symbol of the same type is a non-specific symbol.

Here, unlike the third modification condition, the fourth modification condition is different from the third modification condition, in the case where the reach line is formed by the symbols stopped at the ineffective lines L6 to L11 when the above-mentioned common symbols of the same type exist. Is set so that the fourth modification condition is satisfied on condition that the above other conditions are satisfied. In the present embodiment, the game times in which the out-of-reach effect is executed are not subject to the special drawing hold notice. That is, in the third modification condition for determining the symbol stopped at the effective lines L1 to L5, when the reach line is formed, the third modification condition is set so as not to be satisfied.

On the other hand, under the above-mentioned fourth modification condition, the special figure game times that result in the stop result of the out-of-reach as a result of the variable display, that is, the variable display ends, and the stop result is all the symbols like the special figure hold notice. When a symbol of the same type is stopped in rows Z1 to Z3, the special figure game is set to be treated as a special figure hold notice. Further, when the reach line is formed by the symbols stopped at the ineffective lines L6 to L11, the reach display is not performed. That is, under the fourth modification condition, when the reach line is formed by the symbols stopped at the ineffective lines L6 to L11, the reach is not displayed as described above, but the result is a stop result of out of reach. It is set so that the fourth modification condition is satisfied as the figure game times.

As described above, by setting the stop symbol in the out-of-frame area as the determination target, the possibility that the correction condition is satisfied is improved. Specifically, the pattern in which the symbol of the upper symbol row Z1 and the symbol of the lower symbol row Z3 have a common symbol of the same type excludes the pattern that becomes reach when only the effective lines L1 to L5 are to be determined. There are 4 patterns for one type of symbol, but 12 patterns including the area outside the frame, which is tripled.

If the fourth correction condition is not satisfied in step S4004, the third correction process is terminated as it is. That is, in this case, the effect of the special figure game is continued according to the effect pattern set in the process for starting the special figure change without executing the special figure hold notice.

If the fourth correction condition is satisfied in step S4004, the process of storing the out-of-frame flag in the RAM 244 is executed in step S4005. As a result, an affirmative determination is made in step S2706 of the process for special figure fluctuation from the next time onward, and the process for re-variation effect is performed. In the third correction process, unlike the first and second correction processes, the determination process of whether or not the normal reach display is displayed before the correction is not set. This is because, in the third modification process, if the normal reach display is displayed before the modification, neither the third modification condition nor the fourth modification condition is satisfied.

If the third modification condition is satisfied in step S4002, or after the process of step S4005 is executed, the process proceeds to step S4006. In step S4006, the third-stage correction table as the third-stage correction information group stored in the ROM 243 is referred to. As shown in FIG. 61 (c), the third-stage correction table is for any combination of the information of the initial fluctuation display pattern and the information of the type of the symbol to be determined, except when super reach occurs. The information of the variation display pattern for the third correction is set in a one-to-one correspondence, and the address information is set in correspondence with the information of the variation display pattern for each third correction. In this case, all the information of the variation display pattern for the third correction is set as the information of the variation display pattern after the period of T3 has elapsed from the start of the variation. However, the information of the variation display pattern for each third correction is set so as not to change the variation display time in the initially set variation display pattern.

Incidentally, in the third stage correction table, the information of each effect pattern of the first special figure hold notice and the second special figure hold notice is set in correspondence with the information of the notice symbol. Therefore, there are cases where the third correction condition is satisfied in step S4002 and the first special figure hold notice is corrected, and cases where the fourth correction condition is satisfied and the second special figure hold notice is corrected in step S4004. So, the effect patterns to be referred to are different.

In the following step S4007, the type information of the symbol to be determined that the correction condition is satisfied in step S4002 or step S4004, and the effect of the special figure game times being executed stored in the various address storage areas 246. The third-stage correction address information (third correction information) corresponding to the combination of the pattern information is specified from the third-stage correction table, and the specified address information is stored in the correction address storage area.

In addition, when a plurality of symbols are subject to judgment and the correction condition is satisfied for any of the symbols, the symbol to be judged that the above-mentioned correction condition is satisfied is determined by lottery or the like. It is configured. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the symbol on the side with the smaller number or the symbol on the side with the larger number is configured to be the symbol to be determined that the above modification condition is satisfied. May be good.

Since the address information for the third correction is stored in the correction address storage area, the MPU 242 determines that the period of T3 has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation based on the information of the progress counter, and then the third set this time is set. The display light emitting unit 63 and the speaker unit 64 are driven and controlled so as to perform an effect corresponding to the information of the variable display pattern for correction.

Then, in step S4008, the correction command including the address information for the third correction stored in step S4007 is output to the display control device 212. The display control device 212 stores the address information for the third correction in the display side correction address storage area of the work RAM 254 based on the reception of the correction command. Further, the program ROM 253 of the display control device 212 stores a table similar to the third-stage correction table shown in FIG. 61 (c). Then, the variation display pattern for the third modification is specified from the address information for the third modification, and the variation display of the symbol is executed with the variation display pattern. As a result, when the variable display of the symbol is stopped, the symbol corresponding to the information of the advance notice symbol is stopped and displayed at a predetermined position on the display screen G in all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3.

After executing the process of step S4008, the process of storing the advance notice execution flag in the RAM 244 is executed in step S4009, and then the third correction process is terminated.

As a result of the above, if the notice condition on the special figure side is satisfied while the variable display of the special figure game is being performed, the special figure hold notice is executed in the special figure game times in which the variable display is being performed. Will be able to be. In this case, by setting the area outside the frame as the judgment target for the correction in the symbol correction process, the possibility of correction is dramatically improved, and the chance of executing the special figure reservation notice can be increased.

<Processing related to various productions on the Fuzu side>
Next, the processing related to various effects on the normal drawing side will be described. The processes related to various effects on the Fuzu side are roughly divided into the Fuzu variation display control process related to the effect control of the Fuzu game times, the support state process related to the effect control for the support state, and the hold display on the Fuzu side. The normal figure hold control process related to the staging control is set. These processes are started every predetermined cycle (for example, 2 msec).

<Public map fluctuation display control processing>
First, the normal map fluctuation display control process executed by the MPU 242 of the staging control device 82 will be described below. In the normal map fluctuation display control process, when the command for normal map change transmitted from the main control device 81 is received, the symbol display device 41 starts the variable display of the normal symbol for one game and also starts the main. When the normal map fluctuation end command transmitted from the control device 81 is received, the process of displaying the variable display of the normal symbol as the final stop is executed.

In the normal map fluctuation display control process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 64, whether or not the normal map game is in progress in step S4101, that is, the symbol display device 41 displays the fluctuation of the normal symbol for one game. Determine if it is running. When the variation display of the normal symbol for one game is not performed, it is determined in step S4102 whether or not the command for fluctuation of the normal symbol transmitted from the main control device 81 is received. If the command for changing the normal map has not been received, the normal map change display control process is terminated as it is. If the command for changing the normal map is received, the process for starting the change in the normal map is executed in step S4103, and then the change display control process for the normal map is terminated.

On the other hand, when the variation display of the normal symbol for one game is performed, it is determined in step S4104 whether or not the normal map variation end command transmitted from the main control device 81 is received. If the normal map fluctuation end command has not been received, the normal map fluctuation display control process is terminated after the normal map fluctuation processing is executed in step S4105. In the normal map fluctuation processing, the display control device 212 is controlled so that the normal map game times are executed with the effect content determined in the normal map fluctuation start process. If the normal map fluctuation end command is received in step S4104, the normal map fluctuation display control process is terminated after the normal map fluctuation end process is executed in step S4106. In the process for ending the fluctuation of the normal map, as the process for ending the game of the normal map, the variable display is terminated in order to notify the game result of the game of the normal map, and various flags and counters used in the game of the normal map are displayed. Execute the clear process.

<Process for starting fluctuation of normal map>
The normal map fluctuation start process is a process for starting the effect for the normal map game round based on the reception of the normal map change command transmitted from the main control device 81. Here, prior to the explanation of the normal map fluctuation start process, the effect contents of the normal map game times will be described with reference to the schematic diagram of FIG. 65 (a).

As described above, the variable display of the normal map game times on the display screen G is performed by switching the display colors of the two display units in the normal map display area P. For example, as shown in FIG. 65 (a1), when the normal drawing game round is started from the situation where the display colors of the two display units are displayed in the same color or the first display color (for example, white) having substantially the same color. As shown in FIG. 65 (a2), the display color of one display unit is switched to a second display color (for example, blue) which is a color different from the previous colors (in the figure, the difference in the color of the display unit is hatched). It is displayed differently depending on the size). After that, as shown in FIG. 65 (a3), the color of the display unit on the side switched to the second display color is switched to the original first display color, and the color of the other display unit is the first display color. Is switched to the second display color, and as shown in FIG. 65 (a4), the color of each display unit is switched again. The variable display of the normal game times is basically repeated switching of the display colors of these two display units (Fig. 65 (a2) → Fig. 65 (a3) → Fig. 65 (a4) → Fig. 65 (a2). Repeatedly). This display color switching is set to make one round in about 0.5 sec, and it is difficult for the player to identify each display before and after the switching.

When the variable display time of the Fuzu game times elapses, the result of the game of the Fuzu game times is notified as to whether the open result or the disengagement result shifts to the support state. In the case of the open result, as shown in FIG. 65 (a5), both of the two display units become the second display color and the variable display ends, and in the case of the off result, FIG. 65 (a1). As shown in the above, the two display units are both set to the first display color, and the variable display ends. That is, the mode of the variable display and the mode of notifying the game result (result of stopping the variable display) in the normal map game round have a simple configuration as compared with the special figure game round side.

By the way, in the normal map variation start process in the present embodiment, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 65 (b), first, in step S4201, the command for normal map variation received this time is read, and the variation display time is read from the command. Identify the information in. Further, as described above, when the main control device 81 transmits a command for changing a normal map, it also transmits a command for the normal map type. Therefore, in step S4201, the command for the normal map type received together with the command for changing the normal map received this time is read, and the information of the game result (opening result or deviation result) is specified from the command. Then, in step S4201, information on whether or not the result is open and information on the variable display time are grasped from the above-specified information, and the grasped information is transferred to the second sub-execution area SAE2 in the hold storage area 250 of the RAM 244. Remember.

In the following step S4202, a process of setting the stop result in the normal drawing game round to be started this time is executed based on the information grasped in step S4201. That is, when the information specified in step S4201 is the opening result, the stop result is displayed so that the two display units are stopped and displayed in the second display color at the end of the variation display in the current game game. If the information specified in step S4201 is out of order, the two display units are stopped and displayed in the first display color at the end of the variation display in this game. Set the stop result.

Then, in step S4203, a process for outputting a command to the display control device 212 is executed so as to start the effect for the normal map game round, and then the process for starting the change in the normal map is terminated. Based on the received command, the MPU 252 of the display control device 212 performs display control on the symbol display device 41 to execute the effect in the current game game. In addition, as described above, since the normal map game round only switches the display colors of the two display units in the normal map display area P, the display control device 212 receives the above command. Based on this, the display control of the symbol display device 41 is performed so as to periodically execute the display color switching display of the display unit.

<Processing for support status>
Next, the support state processing executed by the MPU 242 of the effect control device 82 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In the support state processing, processing for performing an effect during the support state in the symbol display device 41 is performed based on the support state commands such as the normal figure opening command and the normal figure ending command transmitted from the main control device 81. Run.

That is, in step S4301, it is determined whether or not the normal drawing game is being executed. If the normal game game is being executed, the support status process is terminated as it is. In this process, in the above-mentioned normal map variation display control process, the normal map game round is being executed from the execution of the normal map variation start process to the end of the normal map variation end process, which is more specific. Specifically, the variation display is started in the normal map display area P in the accessory display unit 44 on the main control device 81 side and the symbol display device 41, the variation display is completed, and the result of the winning / failing lottery on the normal map side is obtained. It is determined that the normal drawing game is being executed until it is notified as a stop result. Regarding this determination, for example, in the process of starting the effect of the normal map game round in step S4203 of the normal map variation start process, the flag during execution of the normal map is stored in the various flag storage areas 247 of the RAM 244. Then, when the confirmation display is executed (the variation display is terminated) in the normal map fluctuation end processing, the normal map execution flag is deleted, and whether or not the flag is stored is determined in step S4301. It is preferable to have a configuration for determination.

If the game is not being executed, the process proceeds to step S4302, and it is determined whether or not the game result of the immediately preceding game is the result corresponding to the transition to the support state. More specifically, it is determined whether or not the game result of the immediately preceding Fuzu game is the open result. If it is not an open result but an off result, the support status process is terminated as it is. If the result is open, the process proceeds to step S4303.

It should be noted that even in the production during this support state, the configuration may be different depending on the game state on the special drawing side. Further, the effect in the support state may be different depending on each opening result on the normal drawing side, and the opening result selected may be different depending on the game state on the special drawing side. .. By doing so, it is possible to suitably notify the support state according to the state on the special drawing side.

In step S4303, it is determined whether or not the opening control of the electric accessory 34a is being executed as a result of shifting to the support state. If the release control is being executed, the process proceeds to step S4305, the support state process is performed, and then the support state process ends. In the process during the support state in step S4305, a process is performed to notify that the opening / closing control of the electric accessory 34a is being performed in the support state, that is, a situation in which the hold on the special figure side is likely to be acquired. As the notification, for example, in the area adjacent to the normal map display area P of the symbol display device 41, character display such as "helping!" Or "aiming!" (In particular, in the second reserved display area Gb corresponding to the lower operating port 34), a configuration in which the background color is changed to a color different from the background color up to that point can be considered.

When it is determined in step S4303 that the opening / closing control is not being executed, that is, when the opening / closing control of the electric accessory 34a is not currently being executed even if the game result of the immediately preceding normal game is the opening result. , Step S4304. The case of proceeding to step S4304 is a waiting time before the opening / closing control of the electric accessory 34a is performed, that is, an opening period (OP period), or after the opening / closing control of the electric accessory 34a is performed. It is conceivable that the waiting time until the start of the game round, that is, the ending period (ED period), or the situation in which the hold information on the Fuzu side, which triggers the Fuzu game round, has not been acquired. In the present embodiment, processing for performing an OP period or an ED period is set as an effect during the support state, and in the following steps S4305 to S4312, the effects during the OP period and the ED period are set. Perform the process to do it. In the following description, FIGS. 27, 28, 30 and 31 will be referred to again.

In step S4305, it is determined whether or not the normal figure opening command has been received. As shown in FIG. 27, the Fuzu opening command is a command set in the Fuzu game state transition process (step S1708) on the main control device 81 side, and this command includes the game result of the Fuzu game times (step S1708). The contents of the distribution result) are included. When the normal figure opening command is received in step S4305, the process of grasping the content of the OP effect is executed in step S4306. As shown in FIG. 31, in the present embodiment, the content of the OP effect on the normal drawing side corresponds to the game result (distribution result) on a one-to-one basis, and on the effect control device 82 side, the normal drawing game times. It is possible to grasp the contents of the OP effect only by grasping the game result. That is, if it is the first opening result A1, A2, the second opening result B2, B3, and the third opening result C2, C3, it is understood that the OP effect is not executed. Further, if the first opening result A3 and the second opening result B1, it is understood that the OP1 effect is executed. If it is the third opening result C1, it is understood that the OP2 effect is executed.

In the following step S4307, it is determined whether or not to execute the OP effect based on the processing result of step S4306. If it is determined that the OP effect is to be executed, the OP effect is executed in step S4308. In the OP effect execution process, a command including information on the content of the OP effect (OP1 effect or OP2 effect) is output to the display control device 212. Upon receiving the command, the display control device 212 reads the image data for OP effect from the character ROM 256, and controls the symbol display device 41 so that the content of the image data is displayed on the display screen G. As a result, the corresponding OP effect is performed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 41 (FIG. 30A).

If the normal figure opening command is not received in step S4305, if it is determined in step S4307 that the OP effect is not executed, or after the process of step S4308 is executed, the process proceeds to step S4309. In step S4309, it is determined whether or not the normal figure ending command has been received. As shown in FIG. 28, the normal figure ending command is a command set in the accessory opening / closing process (step S1819) on the main control device 81 side, and this command includes the game result (distribution) of the normal figure game times. Result) is included. When the normal figure ending command is received in step S4309, the process of grasping the content of the ED effect is executed in step S4310. As shown in FIG. 31, in the present embodiment, as in the OP effect, the content of the ED effect on the normal drawing side corresponds one-to-one with the game result (distribution result), and the effect control device 82 side. Then, it is possible to grasp the content of the ED effect only by grasping the game result of the Fuzu game. That is, if it is the first opening result A1, A2, the second opening result B2, B3, and the third opening result C2, C3, it is understood that the ED effect is not executed. Further, if the first opening result A3 and the second opening result B1, it is understood that the ED1 effect is executed. If it is the third opening result C1, it is understood that the ED2 effect is executed.

In the following step S4311, it is determined whether or not to execute the ED effect based on the processing result of step S4310. If it is determined that the ED effect is to be executed, the ED effect is executed in step S4312. In the ED effect execution process, a command including information on the content of the ED effect (ED1 effect or ED2 effect) is output to the display control device 212. Upon receiving the command, the display control device 212 reads the image data for ED effect from the character ROM 256, and controls the symbol display device 41 so that the content of the image data is displayed on the display screen G. As a result, the corresponding ED effect is performed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 41 (FIG. 30 (b)).

If a negative determination is made in step S4309 or step S4311, or after the process of step S4312 is executed, the process for this support state ends.

That is, in the present embodiment, the transition to the support state is performed as a result of the Fuzu game, but as an effect for that, the effect during the Fuzu game is simpler than the effect on the special figure side. It is a thing, and the production during the support state is also simple. Then, on the effect control device 82 side, since the contents (game results) grasped by the main control device 81 side are only used as they are to execute those effects, the effect process on the special figure side and the effect process on the normal figure side are performed. In a configuration in which the staging process is executed in parallel, the processing load of the staging process on the normal drawing side is reduced, and the processing capacity can be allocated to the staging on the special drawing side accordingly. Become.

<Explanation of processing related to the notice of holding the general map>
In the present embodiment, not only the reservation notice on the special map side but also the normal map side is notified of the result of the hit / fail judgment on the normal map side at the timing before the execution of the normal map game round. In some cases, a notice of holding a general map corresponding to the result when a pass / fail judgment is made may be given. Hereinafter, the process for executing the general map hold notice will be described.

<Processing performed by the main controller 81>
As the process related to the normal figure hold notice, a process executed by the MPU 202 of the main control device 81 and a process executed by the staging control device 82 are set. Therefore, first, the processing on the main control device 81 side will be described, and then the processing on the staging control device 82 side will be described.

<Processing for holding a normal figure>
First, the normal figure holding process executed by the MPU 202 of the main control device 81 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 67 (a). As described above, the normal figure hold process is a process executed in step S206 of the winning process for passing through the timer interrupt process.

In the process for holding the normal figure, the information for determining whether or not the normal figure is correct, that is, the open random number counter, among the hold information acquired in step S205 in the process for winning the through, based on the current winning of the through gate 35 in step S4401. The information latched from C4 and the information for the open type, that is, the information latched from the open type counter C5 are grasped.

In the following step S4402, it is determined whether or not the high frequency support flag is stored in the RAM 204, thereby determining whether the current support mode is high or low. In the case of the low frequency support mode, the pass / fail table for the low frequency support mode is referred to in step S4403, and in the case of the high frequency support mode, the pass / fail table for the high frequency support mode is referred to in step S4404. As shown in FIG. 8 (c), in the present embodiment, a common pass / fail table is used regardless of the level of the support mode, so that the pass / fail tables referred to in steps S4403 and S4404 are the same.

Then, in step S4405, based on the information of the open random number counter C4 grasped in step S4401 and the information of the pass / fail table referred to in step S4403 or step S4404, the reserved information for the normal drawing acquired this time is released as a result of opening. Judge whether or not you have won. If it is determined that the release result has been won, in step S4406, it is determined whether or not the high frequency support flag is stored in the RAM 204, thereby determining whether the current support mode is high or low. In the case of the low frequency support mode, the distribution table in the low frequency support mode shown in FIG. 10A is referred to in step S4407, and in the case of the high frequency support mode, FIG. 10 (b) is in step S4408. ) Refer to the distribution table in the high frequency support mode. Then, based on the information of the open type counter C5 grasped in step S4401 in step S4409 and the information of the distribution table referred to in step S4407 or step S4408, the reserved information for the normal drawing acquired this time is used. Understand the type of support state to migrate based on.

If it is determined in step S4405 that the support state does not occur, or after grasping the type of the support state in step S4409, the process proceeds to step S4410. In step S4410, a process of grasping the number of reserved information on the normal map side (normal map reserved storage number FN) is executed based on the information stored in the electric service holding area 233. Then, in step S44111, a process of setting the normal figure hold command as an output target to the effect control device 82 is executed, and then the normal figure hold process is terminated.

The Fuzu hold command is configured as multi-byte information, and some of the bits include information that the command is a Fuzu hold command and information on the type of the Fuzu hold command. At the same time, it is possible to set information on the number of reserved commands. As shown in FIG. 67 (b), in the present embodiment, various command information hold commands are stored in the command information storage area 225 of the ROM 203. As the various normal map hold commands, one-to-one corresponding commands are stored according to the result of the winning / failing lottery on the normal map side and the distribution result. Specifically, in the case of an open result as a result of the winning / failing lottery on the normal drawing side, A1 to A3, B1 to B3, and C1 to C3 commands are stored according to the subsequent distribution result, and also. , If the result of the winning / failing lottery on the Fuzu side is a losing result, the losing command is stored.

As shown in FIG. 31, the first opening result A1 and A2, the second opening result B3 and the third opening result C3, and the first opening result A3 and the second opening result B1 open and close the electric accessory 34a with each other. Although the embodiments are different, the lengths of the OP period and the ED period and the OP effect and the ED effect are the same. Further, although the second opening result B1 and the third opening result C1 have the same results as the length of the OP period and the ED period and the opening / closing mode of the electric accessory 34a, the contents of the OP effect and the ED effect are different. is doing. Further, the second opening result B2 and the third opening result C2, and the second opening result B3 and the third opening result C3 have the length of the OP period and the ED period, the opening / closing mode of the electric accessory 34a, and the OP. The contents of the production ED production are the same. The processing on the side of the effect control device 82 that has received these commands will be described below. In this way, even if various effect contents, effect periods, opening / closing modes, etc. are common, the commands are different. This makes it possible to have the expandability of the effect on the effect control device 82 side.

<Regarding the normal figure hold control process executed by the staging control device 82>
Next, the normal drawing hold control process executed by the MPU 202 of the staging control device 82 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 68 (a). The normal figure hold control process is a part of the processes of a plurality of types repeatedly executed in the MPU 252, and is started in a predetermined cycle (for example, a 2 msec cycle).

First, in step S4501, it is determined whether or not any of the hold commands for normal drawing has been received from the main control unit 81. If an affirmative determination is made in step S4501, in step S4502, the normal figure hold notice setting process is executed as the process corresponding to the received hold command.

Here, in the present embodiment, as a notice of holding a normal figure, an effect of different types of holding images to be displayed in the third holding display area Gc is set. That is, the holding image corresponding to the result when the hit / fail judgment on the normal map side is performed at the timing before the execution of the normal map game round in which the result of the hit / miss judgment on the normal map side is notified is the third. It is displayed in the hold display area Gc. Further, in the present embodiment, as a holding image for a normal drawing, as shown in FIG. 68 (b), a normal holding image SPA and a special holding image SPB are provided as a holding image SP for the normal drawing. These reserved images SPA and SPB are set so as to have different colors and shapes in appearance. In the figure, the appearance is different depending on the presence or absence of the hatch. In the normal map hold notice setting process in step S4502, the hold images for the normal map are set. The normal figure hold notice setting process will be described in detail later.

In the following step S4503, the secondary reserved number DFN for the accessory stored in the various counter areas 249 of the RAM 244 is incremented by 1. Further, in step S4503, a process of storing the hold information of the received hold command in the RAM 244 is executed. As described above, the RAM 244 is provided with a hold storage area 250 as an area for storing hold information, and the hold storage area 250 is provided with a secondary electric service hold area 250c. Then, in step S4503, among the empty areas of the first to fourth areas in the sub-side electric service holding area 250c, the information included in the holding command is put in the area with the smallest number (the area to be determined first). Remember. As already explained, the hold command contains information on the game result on the normal map side. In step S4503, a process of storing these information in the corresponding area is executed.

When a negative determination is made in step S4501 or after the execution of step S4503, the process proceeds to step S4504 to determine whether or not a normal map shift command has been received. If an affirmative determination is made in step S4504, the secondary reserved storage number DFN for the accessory is subtracted by 1 in step S4505. Further, in step S4505, a process corresponding to the decrease in the number of reserved storages (for example, a process of controlling the light emission of the third reserved light emitting unit 47 or changing the reserved information displayed on the display screen G) is executed. Further, in step S4505, a shift process is executed. In this shift process, the hold information set in each area of the hold storage area 250 is sequentially shifted to the lower area side. Specifically, while clearing the hold information of the first area in the sub-side electric service hold area 250c, the second area → the first area, the third area → the second area, the fourth area → the third area, and so on. Shift the hold display information in each area.

If a negative determination is made in step S4504 or after the processing in step S4505 is executed, the holding control processing for this general diagram is terminated.

<Public map hold notice setting process>
Here, the flow chart hold notice setting process in step S4502 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 69 (a).

In step S4601, a process of grasping the current secondary reserved storage number SFN for the accessory is executed. In the following step S4602, the result of the winning / failing lottery on the Fuzu side is grasped by grasping the type of the Fuzu hold command received this time. Then, in step S4603, a process of grasping the game situation on the special figure side is executed. In the present embodiment, when the above-mentioned holding image for the normal drawing is set, that is, when the normal drawing holding notice is performed, not only the result of the winning / losing lottery on the normal drawing side but also the game situation on the special drawing side is referred to. Then, depending on the game situation on the special figure side, it is set to either the notice low probability state or the notice high probability state in which the execution probability of the hold notice on the normal figure side is relatively high or low. The situation grasping process on the special map side will be described in detail later.

In step S4604, it is determined whether or not the advance notice high probability state is set based on the processing result of step S4603. When the advance notice low probability state is set instead of the advance notice high probability state, the advance notice low probability table is referred to from various table storage areas 245 in step S4605. On the other hand, when the advance notice high probability state is set, the advance notice high probability table is referred to from various table storage areas 245 in step S4606.

These low-probability notice tables and high-probability notice tables are compared with each other when the results of the winning / failing lottery on the normal drawing side are the same, and the probability of executing the normal drawing hold notice (that is, the holding image for the normal drawing is normally held). The probability that the special reserved image SPB is used instead of the special holding image SPB) is set to be relatively high or low. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 69 (b), when the result of the winning / failing lottery on the normal drawing side is a wrong result, the special holding image SPB is selected when the notice low probability table is referred to. However, when the notice high probability table is referred to, the special holding image SPB is selected with a probability of 10%. In addition, when the result of the winning / failing lottery on the normal map side is the open result, when the notice low probability table is referred to, the special holding image SPB is selected with a probability of 5%, and the notice high probability table is referred to. Then, the special holding image SPB is selected with a probability of 50%. It should be noted that the selection probability of the special holding image SPB (execution probability of the normal drawing holding notice) may be different depending on the type of the opening result, or a plurality of types of the special holding image SPB may be set and one of them may be released. The type of the special holding image SPB selected may be different depending on the expected degree as a result and the expected degree as a high winning support state. However, from the viewpoint that the notice of holding the normal drawing is an auxiliary effect on the special figure side, it is preferable to have a simple configuration as in the present embodiment so as not to interfere with the effect on the special figure side.

In the following step S4607, whether or not the general map hold notice has been won based on the table referred to in step S4605 or step S4606 and the information of the normal map hold command received this time (result of the winning / failing lottery). Is determined. If it is determined in step S4607 that the notice of holding the normal drawing has not been won, the holding image for the normal drawing is provisionally set as the normal holding image SPA in step S4608. If it is determined in step S4607 that the notice of holding the normal drawing has been won, the holding image for the normal drawing is set as the special holding image SPB in step S4609.

Here, in step S4608, the reserved image for ordinary drawings is temporarily set as the normal reserved image SPA, whereas in step S4609, the reserved image for ordinary drawings is set as the special reserved image SPB. Then, after provisionally setting in step S4608, the timing change process is executed in step S4610. In this process, it is determined whether or not the reserved image temporarily set in step S4608 can be changed to the special reserved image SPB at a subsequent timing. Then, by this change process, the hold image temporarily set in step S4608 is confirmed. This change process will be described in detail later.

Then, in step S4611, a process of outputting a hold display command including the information of the hold image set in step S4609 or step S4610 to the display control device 212 is executed. After that, the process of setting the hold notice for this book is terminated. Upon receiving the hold display command, the display control device 212 reads the image data of the corresponding hold image from the character ROM 256, and displays the symbol display device 41 in the unit display areas Gc1 to Gc4 of the corresponding third hold display area Gc. Display control.

<Situation grasping process on the special map side>
Next, the situation grasping process on the special drawing side of step S4603 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 70.

First, in step S4701, it is determined whether or not the open / close execution mode is in progress. If it is not in the open / close execution mode, it is determined in step S4702 whether or not it is in the high frequency support mode. In the case of the high-frequency support mode, in step S4703, whether or not the high-frequency support mode is a high-frequency support mode with a limited number of times, that is, a special figure that triggered the high-frequency support mode. It is determined whether or not the game result on the side is a normal jackpot result. For this determination, for example, various flag storage areas 247 of the RAM 244 may be used. Specifically, based on the fact that the game result on the special figure side is a normal jackpot result, after storing the limited flag in the various flag storage areas 247 and executing the game times of the limited number of times (100 times). Or, the flag is deleted based on the result of any of the probable change jackpots. Then, by confirming the presence / absence of this limited flag, it is possible to determine whether or not the high frequency support mode with a limited number of times is in effect.

If the high-frequency support mode with a limited number of times is in step S4703, the number of remaining special game games in which the high-frequency support mode continues in the high-frequency support mode with the limited number of times is set in step S4704. Execute the process to grasp. For this determination, for example, various counter areas 249 of the RAM 244 may be used. Specifically, based on the fact that the game result on the special figure side is a normal jackpot result, the upper limit number of times is input to a predetermined counter in the various counter areas 249. Then, the process of subtracting the predetermined counter by 1 each time the special figure game is executed is performed. In step S4704, by confirming the value of the predetermined counter, it is possible to grasp the number of remaining special figure game times in the high frequency support mode with a limited number of times.

In the following step S4705, based on the processing result of step S4704, it is determined whether or not the number of the remaining special figure game times is equal to or less than the predetermined number of times. In the present embodiment, the predetermined number of times is set to four, which is the same as the maximum number of stored information on hold information based on the winning of the lower operating port 34.

When it is determined in step S4701 that the mode is not in the open / close execution mode, in step S4703 it is determined that the mode is not in the high frequency support mode with no limit on the number of times, or when it is determined in step S4705 that the number of times is not less than the predetermined number. Goes to step S4706. In step S4706, the advance notice low probability flag is set in the advance notice low probability state by storing the advance notice low probability flag in the various flag storage areas 247 of the RAM 244. After that, the situation grasping process on the special drawing side is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S4702 that the mode is not in the high frequency support mode, or in step S4705, it is determined that the number of remaining special figure game times is not less than the predetermined number even in the high frequency support mode with a limited number of times. If so, the process proceeds to step S4707. In step S4707, it is determined whether or not the current number of secondary reserved storage SFNs for the accessory is equal to or greater than a predetermined number (“2” in the present embodiment) based on the grasping result of step S4601. If the number of reserved storage SFNs for the accessory side is less than a predetermined number, the process proceeds to step S4706, and the advance notice low probability state is set. When the number of reserved storage SFNs for the accessory side is equal to or larger than a predetermined number, the advance to step S4708, and the advance notice low probability flag is set in the various flag storage areas 247 of the RAM 244 to set the advance notice high probability. After that, the situation grasping process on the special drawing side is terminated.

<Timing change processing>
Next, the timing change process in step S4610 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 71.

First, in step S4801, a process of temporarily delaying the execution timing of the normal figure hold notice setting process by a predetermined time from the start timing of the current normal figure hold notice setting process is executed. Specifically, as a predetermined time, for example, the timing of subtracting 1 from the secondary reserved storage number SFN for the character grasped in step S4601 (that is, one variation display time of the normal figure game) is set as the normal figure hold notice. Temporarily change the execution timing. In this case, when the sub-side reserved memory number SFN for the character is 0, that is, when the normal figure game round is not currently executed, a predetermined time (for example, the normal figure game round) is set as a predetermined time. It is tentatively changed on the assumption that the notice of holding the general map will be executed after 10 seconds, which is shorter than the 1 fluctuation display time of.

In the following step S4802, it is determined whether or not the execution timing temporarily changed in step S4801 is in the open / close execution mode. If it is not in the open / close execution mode, it is determined in step S4803 whether or not the provisionally changed execution timing is in the high frequency support mode. In the case of the high-frequency support mode, in step S4804, whether or not the high-frequency support mode is a high-frequency support mode with a limited number of times, that is, a special figure that triggered the high-frequency support mode. It is determined whether or not the game result on the side is a normal jackpot result.

If the high-frequency support mode with a limited number of times is in step S4804, the number of remaining special game games in which the high-frequency support mode continues in the high-frequency support mode with the limited number of times is set in step S4805. Execute the process to grasp. Then, in the following step S4806, based on the processing result of step S4805, whether or not the number of remaining special figure game times is a predetermined number of times or less (same as step S4705, 4 times or less in this embodiment). Is determined.

When it is determined in step S4802 that it is not in the open / close execution mode, when it is determined in step S4804 that it is not in the high frequency support mode with no limit on the number of times, or when it is determined in step S4806 that the number of times is not less than the predetermined number. Goes to step S4807. In step S4807, a process of determining the reserved image for the normal drawing temporarily set in step S4608 as the normal reserved image SPA is executed. After that, the timing change process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S4803 that the high frequency support mode is not in progress, or even in the high frequency support mode with a limited number of times in step S4806, it is determined that the number of remaining special figure game times is not less than the predetermined number. If so, the process proceeds to step S4808, and a process of storing the change timing of the reserved image for the normal drawing (the timing of the provisional change in the above step S4801) is executed. Then, in step S4809, a process of storing the reserved image for the normal drawing temporarily set in step S4608 so as to be changed as the special reserved image SPB at the change timing stored in step S4808 is executed. .. After that, the timing change process is terminated.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

Depending on the game state (game situation) on the special map side, the notice low probability state or the notice high probability state is set, and the process for executing the subsequent hold notice on the normal figure side differs depending on the set state. did. By doing so, it is possible to suitably give a hold notice on the normal drawing side according to the game state on the special drawing side. The result of the winning / failing lottery on the normal drawing side is whether or not there is a transition to the support state in which the lower operating port 34 is allowed to win a prize. It is considered that the players are highly interested in the notice of holding the general map, which notifies the possibility of transition to the support state in advance.

However, depending on the game state on the special drawing side, for example, in a situation where a prize may frequently occur in the large winning opening 32a, such as during the opening / closing execution mode, even if a winning in the lower operating opening 34 occurs. It wouldn't be very happy (compared to the normal game state), and it would be superior to the player if the effect was to celebrate the open / close execution mode rather than to perform such an effect. It is considered to be a pleasure because it is soaked. Therefore, in the open / close execution mode, the notice of holding the normal drawing is not performed as much as possible, so that the production on the special drawing side can be fully enjoyed.

Further, in the present embodiment, the configuration is such that the mode shifts to the high frequency support mode after the open / close execution mode. In the high frequency support mode, the lower operating port 34 is likely to win a prize because the state frequently shifts to the high winning support state. On the other hand, since the low-frequency support mode is set during the open / close execution mode, it is likely that the hold information based on the winning of the lower operating port 34 is not stored so much immediately after the open / close execution mode. The determination of whether or not the hold information is based on the winning of the lower operating port 34 is more advantageous for the player than the determination of whether or not the holding information is based on the winning of the upper operating port 33. In such a configuration, if the possibility of transition to the support state is notified during the open / close execution mode, the launch of the game ball is temporarily stopped in order to win a prize in the lower operating port 34 as much as possible during the open / close execution mode. , There is a possibility that so-called stop-and-shoot actions such as starting firing at the timing when the support state is reached may be performed. If such a stoppage is performed, it may be difficult for the manager of the game hall to distinguish it from a fraudulent act of performing an illegal launch operation, and as a result, it may be difficult to detect the fraudulent act. Therefore, if the configuration is such that it is difficult to give notice of holding the normal figure in the open / close execution mode as in the present embodiment, it is possible to prevent the above-mentioned stoppage from being performed, and as a result, a fraudulent act is discovered. It is possible to make it easier.

In addition, even immediately after the opening / closing execution mode, if the holding notice on the normal drawing side acquired during the opening / closing execution mode is given, the game ball is fired according to the holding notice of the normal drawing. That is, it is conceivable that the launch of the game ball is stopped until the support state is entered. Therefore, if the configuration is such that it is difficult to give notice of holding the normal figure during the open / close execution mode as described above, it is possible to prevent not only the open / close execution mode but also the subsequent stoppage.

On the other hand, when shifting to the high frequency support mode, the high winning support state may occur frequently. In such a situation, if a general notice of holding a support state is frequently given in advance, it may be annoying to the player even though the production is performed. be. Therefore, in the present embodiment, since it is difficult to give a notice of holding a normal figure in the high frequency support mode, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience that makes the notice of holding a normal figure feel annoying as described above. .. In other words, it is considered that the player feels a good deal about the advance notification of the possibility of transition to the support state because the general figure hold notice is given in the low frequency support mode in which the support state is unlikely to occur. Therefore, if the effect is set according to the emotions of the player in this way, the effect can be appropriately enjoyed.

Even in the high-frequency support mode, there may be a situation where you want to know the occurrence of the support state depending on the remaining number of times in the high-frequency support mode with a limited number of times. For example, when the remaining number of times is equal to or less than the upper limit storage number (4 pieces) of the reserved information based on the winning of the lower operating port 34, when the winning / failing lottery on the special figure side of the currently stored reserved information is completed (from the present time). (4 win / fail lottery will be held), in order to shift from the high frequency support mode to the low frequency support mode, as a player, as much as possible, the lower operation port while the win / fail lottery of the currently stored pending information is being performed. It seems that he wants to get a prize in 34. By doing so, in addition to the maximum number of times with a limited number of times, the winning / failing lottery on the special drawing side can be obtained by the maximum number of stored information on hold information based on the winning of the lower operating port 34, and the player can obtain the winning / failing lottery. Is advantageous. Therefore, in such a situation, since the configuration is such that the notice of holding the normal drawing is easily given, the player can safely aim the lower operating port 34 and launch the game ball.

In other words, if the configuration is such that it is difficult for the player to give notice of holding the normal drawing in the situation just before the end of the high-frequency support mode with a limited number of times, if the player does not know whether or not the support state will occur. In the meantime, the merit of reducing the wasted ball by waiting for the high frequency support state to end without firing the game ball may be greater than the merit of winning a prize in the lower operating port 34. Therefore, it seems that some players may want to make a stop strike, and it is possible to expect the effect of suppressing the stop strike by adopting the above configuration.

As a result of the winning / failing lottery on the normal drawing side, a plurality of results (for example, the second opening result B2 and the third opening result C2, the second opening result B3 and the third opening result C3) in which the opening / closing mode of the electric accessory 34a is the same are obtained. Etc.), and the general map hold command was set for each of these multiple results. The normal figure hold command is output to the staging control device 82, which is a control device on the sub side, based on the winning of the through gate 35. Therefore, on the staging control device 82 side, even if the opening / closing mode is the same, it is not necessary to determine the game result only by grasping the types of the normal map hold commands. That is, if the configuration is such that information on which of these plurality of results is set for one general map hold command, it becomes necessary to set a process for reading it on the staging control device 82 side. obtain. Further, in a configuration in which information on which of these multiple results is set for one general map hold command, a counter for winning / failing lottery (open random number counter C4 or) is used as information on these game results. A configuration for setting an open type counter C5 or the like is also conceivable. Then, if a fraudulent act of reading the input / output of the command between the main control device 81 and the staging control device 82 is performed, the information contained in the command for holding the normal map is analyzed and the result lottery on the normal map side is performed. The counter is also more likely to be read. On the other hand, if the type of the Fuzu hold command is different, even if the Fuzu hold command is read, the counter for the winning / failing lottery will not be read, and the counter for the winning / failing lottery itself will be set as the command. Even when compared with the configuration in which only the game result is set in the command without doing so, the correspondence between the information contained in the command and the counter for the winning / failing lottery becomes more difficult in this embodiment, and the act of illegally analyzing is suppressed. It becomes possible to do.

As the waiting period before and after the support state, the OP period and the ED period for the normal drawing are configured to be different according to the game state on the special drawing side. By doing so, the time for performing the effects (OP effect and ED effect) before and after the support state can be set according to the game state on the special figure side, and these effects can be appropriately executed. It will be possible.

The OP period and ED period were set so that the OP period and ED period were shorter in the low frequency support mode than in the high frequency support mode. Since it is relatively rare to be in the support state during the low frequency support mode, if the lower operating port 34 is allowed to win a prize, the player may feel that it is a merit. Therefore, it is considered significant to notify the start / end of the support state during the OP period and the ED period in the low frequency support mode. On the other hand, in the high frequency support mode, the support state can occur frequently, and on the premise of that, the game state is set so that the number of balls held is not reduced so much. Therefore, it is considered that the player cannot feel that the support state is generated in such a situation and the lower operating port 34 is allowed to win a prize as compared with the low frequency support mode. Furthermore, if the waiting period before and after each of the support states that frequently occur as described above is set to be long, it is considered that the frequency of the support state is reduced by that amount, and the production is frequent. It can also make it feel annoying. Therefore, if the OP period and the ED period between the low-frequency support mode and the high-frequency support mode are set as described above, it is possible to adjust the support state and the frequency of the effect according to each game state.

<Second embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the situation grasping process on the special drawing side is different from the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the situation grasping process on the special drawing side in the present embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 72.

First, in step S4901, it is determined whether or not the special figure game is being executed. If the special figure game is being executed, in the following step S4902, a process of grasping the remaining time of the special figure game being executed is executed. In this process, the values of the progress counters provided in the various counter areas 249 of the RAM 244 referred to in the above-mentioned correction process and the like are referred to.

In the following step S4903, a process of grasping the information of the variable display time related to the reserved information on the special figure side before the execution is executed. In the various table storage areas 245 in the ROM 243 of the staging control device 82, the same variation display time table as the variation display time table on the main control device 81 side is stored. Then, the reserved information on the special drawing side (held information stored in the first secondary reserved area 250a and the second secondary reserved area 250b) stored in the reserved storage area 250 of the staging control device 82 is included in the reserved information on the special drawing side. Contains information about variable display times. In step S4903, a process of grasping information regarding the variable display time is executed for each of the reserved information on the special figure side stored in the reserved storage area 250.

Here, as described above, the variable display time is set in advance for the hold information in which the reach display occurs, while the variable display time for the hold information in which the reach display does not occur is set according to the number of holds at the time of winning / failing. The length is different. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the variation display time when the reach does not occur is specified based on the number of pending information at the time of processing execution in step S4903.

It should be noted that the hold information for which the reach display does not occur for each hold information on the special figure side is replaced with the configuration for specifying the hold information according to the number of holds at the time of processing in step S4903, or in addition, the hold information for which the reach display does not occur. The variable display time may be specified as a temporary variable display time (for example, the longest variable display time, the shortest variable display time, or their average variable display time among the variable display times that can be selected). good.

After executing the process of step S4903, in step S4904, the remaining fluctuation display time of the special figure game times being executed grasped in step S4902 and the special feature relating to the undigested pending information grasped in step S4903. Figure Executes the process of adding the variable display time of the game times. In this process, it is preferable to use a counter for calculation provided in various counter areas 249 of the RAM 244. Further, the information of the fluctuation display time may be added to the counter for this calculation each time the processing of step S4902 or step S4903 is performed.

After executing the process of step S4904, based on the process result of step S4904, in step S4909, it is determined whether or not the total remaining variation display time of the game times on the special drawing side is a predetermined time (for example, 120 sec) or more. judge. If it is determined in step S4901 that the special figure game is not being executed, or if it is determined in step S4905 that the time is less than the predetermined time, the advance notice low probability state is set in step S4906. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S4905 that the time is longer than the predetermined time, the advance notice high probability state is set in step S4907. After executing the process of step S4906 or step S4907, the present status grasping process is terminated.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the longer the remaining fluctuation display time of the special figure game round is, the easier it is to execute the normal figure hold notice. It is possible to set the effect. For example, when the remaining fluctuation display time of the special figure game is long, the player may stop firing the game ball and wait for the special figure game to be digested. On the other hand, if a prize is won in the lower operating port 34, not only the winning / failing lottery related to the hold information based on the prize is performed, but also the player can get the prize ball as a privilege, so that the general drawing is held. If the possibility of a support state is notified by a notice, it will be meaningful to continue firing the game ball, and it will not only eliminate the waiting period for digestion of the special game times as described above, but also have the effect of suppressing the stoppage. Can also be expected.

In addition, instead of the configuration for grasping the fluctuation display time of the game times on the special map side, or in addition, as a configuration for grasping the number of reserved information on the special map side and setting the general map reservation notice based on the number of reserved information on the special map side. May be good. If the configuration is such that only the number of pending information is grasped, the above effect can be obtained with a simple configuration, and if the configuration is such that the number of reserved information and the variable display time are grasped, for example, the reserved information can be obtained. If the number of is less than the specified number (1), it is possible to set the notice high probability state regardless of the length of the variable display time, and the setting method of the general figure hold notice will be more diverse. can do.

In addition, although the configuration is such that the general map hold notice is set based on the variable display time of all the hold information on the special figure side, the hold information on the special figure side includes predetermined hold information (for example, hold information that becomes super reach). Based on some of the hold information on the special map side, such as when the game result contains a hold information that results in a 15R probability variation jackpot) or when a predetermined number of the predetermined hold information is included. It may be configured to set a notice of holding a normal figure.

<Third embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the situation grasping process on the special drawing side is different from the process of the first and second embodiments. Hereinafter, the situation grasping process on the special drawing side in the present embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 73.

In step S5001, it is determined whether or not the special figure game is being executed. This process is the same as the process of step S4901. When the special figure game is being executed, in step S5002, it is determined whether or not the advance notice condition fulfillment flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 247 of the RAM 244. When the notice condition fulfillment flag is stored, in step S5003, it is determined whether or not the notice execution flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 247 of the RAM 244. As already explained, the notice condition establishment flag and the notice execution flag are flags related to the hold notice on the special figure side. More specifically, the notice condition establishment flag is a flag stored when it is determined to give the special figure hold notice based on the receipt of the hold command on the special figure side. Further, the notice execution flag is a flag stored when the special figure hold notice is executed in the special figure game times performed in the situation where the notice condition establishment flag is stored.

Then, when it is determined in step S5001 that the special figure game is not being executed, or it is determined in step S5002 that the advance notice condition establishment flag is stored and the advance notice execution flag is stored in step S5003. If it is determined to be present, the process of setting the advance notice low probability state is executed in step S5004. On the other hand, when the advance notice condition establishment flag is not stored in step S5002, or it is determined in step S5002 that the advance notice condition establishment flag is stored and the advance notice execution flag is not stored in step S5003. In that case, the advance notice high probability state is set in step S5005. After executing the process of step S5004 or step S5005, the status grasping process is terminated.

As described above, in the present embodiment, as the execution status of the special figure side effect (special figure game times), the setting of the hold notice on the normal figure side is changed according to the execution status of the special figure hold notice. , It is possible to set whether or not to execute the effect on the normal figure side depending on the scene where the effect on the special figure side is desired to be noticed or not. More specifically, in the situation where the hold notice on the special figure side is given, it is difficult to give the hold notice on the normal figure side, and conversely, in the situation where the hold notice on the special figure side is not given, the normal figure side The reservation notice is easy to make. The hold notice on the special figure side is an effect to suggest the possibility of shifting to the open / close execution mode after that, and in the situation where such an effect is performed, the player is high in the game times on the special figure side. It is considered to be of interest, and if the player is convinced of the transition to the open / close execution mode, it is considered that there is not much merit even if the lower operating port 34 is won. On the other hand, in the situation where the hold notice on the special figure side has not been given, of course, although there is interest in the game times on the special figure side, new hold information is acquired, suggesting a shift to the open / close execution mode. It is considered that the player is expecting that the production will not be performed, that is, the special figure hold notice will not be started. Therefore, in a situation where the hold notice on the special map side has not been given, it is possible to draw great interest to the hold notice only by executing the hold notice on the normal drawing side.

If the notice condition fulfillment flag is stored (step S5002: YES) but the notice execution flag is not stored (step S5003: NO), it is set to a high-probability state in which the notice holding notice is likely to be performed. It was configured. This situation is a case where the advance notice condition establishment flag is not stored at the start of the special figure game, but the advance notice condition establishment flag is stored during the execution of the special figure game. In such a situation, a process (replacement process in the process for changing the special figure) is performed so that the notice of holding the special figure is positively given. And with such a configuration, it is possible to increase the chances of the reservation notice on the special figure side being given. In this case, since the hold notice on the special figure side is configured to be performed using the stop result of the game round, there is a time lag between the replacement process on the special figure side and the hold notice on the special figure side. There is. Then, for example, when the hold information on the special figure side is acquired after the special figure game round is performed, the player predicts that the hold notice on the special figure side will be given by the acquired hold information. Then, there is a possibility that the launch of the game ball will be stopped until the execution of the special map game round is completed after the acquisition (that is, the launch is performed until it is confirmed whether or not the hold notice on the special map side is given. May stop and wait). Then, it can be said that there is a possibility that the stoppage will be stopped by the amount of the time difference, and in such a situation, if the configuration is such that the hold notice on the normal side is likely to occur, it is meaningful to continue firing the game ball. Can be caused, and the above-mentioned stoppage can be suppressed in advance.

In this embodiment, the special figure hold notice has been described as an example of the special figure hold notice, but as the special figure side effect, for example, when the reach display is performed, the normal figure hold notice is executed. It may be configured to make it difficult. If the reach display is performed, the degree of attention to the special figure side will increase, so it seems that the effect of the effect will not be obtained so much even if the notice of holding the normal figure is given. On the other hand, if the reach display is not performed, it is considered that the person is interested in the acquisition of the hold information such that the reach display is performed, that is, the occurrence of the support state. It is considered to be. Further, the setting of the notice of holding the normal drawing may be different depending on the type of reach display. For example, if super reach is performed, it is difficult to execute the normal map hold notice, and if normal reach is performed or reach is not displayed, it is easy to execute the normal map hold notice. Further, the presence / absence of the re-variation effect, the presence / absence of the fanning effect, the ineffective notice effect, and the like may be used for setting the general drawing hold notice. That is, in the production on the special figure side, when the production with a high expectation for the opening / closing execution mode is performed, it is difficult to give a notice of holding the normal drawing, and the production with a lower expectation for the opening / closing execution mode is performed. If it is easy to give a notice of holding the normal drawing when it is performed, it is possible to preferably execute the production on the normal drawing side according to the degree of attention to the production on the special drawing side.

<Fourth Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, when the open / close execution mode on the special drawing side and the support state on the normal drawing side overlap, the special effect is executed. The configuration for that purpose will be described below.

FIG. 74 is a flowchart showing a normal figure hold control process in the present embodiment.

In the present embodiment, it is determined in step S5101 whether or not the normal figure hold command is received. If the normal figure hold command has been received, the normal figure hold notice setting process is executed in step S5102. The processing of step S5101 and step S5102 is the same as the processing of step S4501 and step S4502. After executing the process of step S5102, the special drawing effect setting process is executed in step S5103. The processing of steps S5104 to S5106 is the same as the processing of steps S4503 to S4505.

Here, the effect setting process for special figures in step S5103 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 75.

In step S5201, a process of grasping the result of the winning / failing lottery on the Fuzu side is executed based on the information of the Fuzu hold command received this time. As described above, in this process, by grasping the type of the Fuzu hold command, it is possible to grasp the result of the winning / failing lottery on the Fuzu side. In step S5202, based on the processing result of step S5201, it is determined whether or not the hold information related to the normal figure hold command received this time is the release result. If it is not the opening result, the effect setting process for this special drawing is terminated as it is. If it is the opening result, the process proceeds to step S5203.

In step S5203, it is determined whether or not the support state based on the hold information related to the normal figure hold command received this time is the high winning support state. If it is determined that the low prize support state is not the high prize support state, the effect setting process for this special figure is terminated as it is. If the high prize support state is set, the process proceeds to step S5204.

In step S5204, the process of grasping the reserved information on the special drawing side is executed. In this process, the process of grasping the reserved information stored in each area of the first secondary reserved area 250a or the second secondary reserved area 250b of the reserved storage area 250 is performed. Then, in the following step S5205, based on the processing result of step S5204, it is determined whether or not any of the reserved areas 250a and 250b contains the reserved information that is the big hit result. If both are normal deviation results or special deviation results, the effect setting process for this special figure is terminated as it is.

If it is determined in step S5205 that any of the jackpot results is included, whether or not it is a jackpot result in which the high frequency winning mode is set in step S5206, that is, a 15R probability variation jackpot result or a normal jackpot result. It is determined whether or not the information is on hold. If the result is not a big hit in the high-frequency winning mode, the effect setting process for this special figure is terminated as it is.

If it is determined in step S5206 that the result is a big hit in the high frequency winning mode, the process proceeds to step S5207 to execute a process of grasping the variation display time of the normal drawing game times. Such a process is a process of grasping the period until the support state corresponding to the currently acquired Fuzu hold command is executed, and specifically, grasps the remaining fluctuation display time of the Fuzu game times being executed. At the same time, when the hold information is stored in the sub-side electric service hold area 250c, the fluctuation display time of each hold information is grasped. This process corresponds to the process on the special drawing side of steps S4902 to S4904. Then, in step S5208, it is determined whether or not the support state corresponding to the normal figure hold command acquired this time overlaps with the open / close execution mode of the high frequency winning mode grasped in step S5104.

For example, as shown in FIG. 76 (a), the hold information based on the winning of the through gate 35 is stored in the third area of the sub-side electric service hold area 250c, and as shown in FIG. 76 (b), the third It is assumed that it is the hold information displayed in the third unit hold display area Gc3 in the hold display area Gc. The case of affirmative determination in step S5208 is an opening result in which the reserved information is in the high winning support state, and further, as the reserved information on the special figure side, for example, as shown in FIG. 76 (b). As the hold information displayed in the third unit hold display area Ga3 in the first hold display area Ga, there is information corresponding to the jackpot result which is the high frequency winning mode, and the open / close execution mode and the support state are shown in FIG. 76 (a). ), When there are overlapping periods.

In this case, in step S5209, the duplicated effect is set, and then the effect setting process for the special drawing ends. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S5208, that is, if there is no period in which the open / close execution mode and the support state overlap, the special drawing effect setting process is terminated as it is.

In the overlapping effect, as shown in FIG. 76 (b), for example, to notify that the above-mentioned overlapping period exists in the region overlapping with the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 during the execution of the variation display of the special figure game times. , The character display of "super heat" is executed, and a sound effect is generated in the speaker unit 64. As a result, the player can grasp that the open / close execution mode that becomes the high frequency winning mode occurs after that, and that the support state that becomes the high winning support state occurs during the opening / closing execution mode. Become.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the opening / closing execution mode and the support state are associated with each other to perform the effect. That is, in both the open / close execution mode and the support state, the upper limit number of prizes is set, and the upper limit of the prize balls that can be obtained is set in advance. On the other hand, when these occur in duplicate, the player can obtain not only the prize ball obtained in the open / close execution mode but also the prize ball including the prize ball obtained in the supported state. Therefore, if it is possible to notify that a large number of prize balls can be obtained in such a duplicated manner, it is possible to make a novel game in the configuration in which the special figure side and the normal figure side each play the game. Is possible. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, although the configuration is such that the duplicate effect is executed when the open / close execution mode and the support state overlap, even if the open / close execution mode and the support state overlap, the open / close execution mode and the support state occur continuously or in a short time. If it occurs at intervals of a certain predetermined period, it may be configured to execute the overlapping effect.

Further, in the open / close execution mode, if the support states are overlapped a plurality of times, an effect for that may be performed. That is, the type of overlapping effect may be different depending on the overlapping ratio of the opening / closing execution mode and the support state, and the number of prize balls obtained. In this case, the more prize balls that can be obtained, the more flashy the production will be, and the higher the player's expectations will be.

In addition, the duplicated effect is executed as an effect that is not related to the stop result of each symbol row Z1 to Z3 in the special figure game round, but the special figure is suspended so that the special stop result is stopped in the special figure hold notice. The notice may be changed. Further, as in the first to third embodiments, the execution mode of the notice of holding the general drawing may be changed.

In addition, the configuration is such that the open / close execution mode, which is the high-frequency winning mode, and the support state overlap, but the duplicate effect is performed when the open / close execution mode, which is the low-frequency winning mode, and the support state overlap. It may be configured to be performed. In the open / close execution mode, which is a low-frequency winning mode, the player may be disappointed because he / she cannot get a prize ball in the open / close execution mode even though the result is a big hit. There is. Therefore, if the configuration is such that the overlap with the support state is notified, at least the prize ball depending on the support state can be obtained, so that the expectation that the subsequent game state will shift to the high probability mode can be expected in the open / close execution mode. It is possible to prevent the cancellation due to the unfortunate feeling of not being able to obtain the prize ball.

<Fifth Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the possibility of winning the lower operating port 34 is notified based on the winning of the through gate 35. The configuration for that purpose will be described below.

FIG. 77 (a) is a flowchart showing a process for changing a normal figure in the present embodiment. As described above, in the normal map fluctuation processing, a process for switching the display color of the display unit of the normal map display area P at a predetermined cycle is performed. Then, in the present embodiment, not only the processing for switching the display color, but also the processing for determining the winning of the through gate 35 and the processing based on the determination are performed.

That is, in step S5301, it is determined whether or not the command for holding the normal map has been received, and if not, the process for changing the normal map is terminated as it is. In this case, as described above, only the display color is switched in the display unit of the normal map display area P. If it is determined in step S5301 that the normal map hold command has been received, the variable hold command corresponding process is executed in step S5302, and then the normal figure change hold command process is terminated. In this case, not only the display color is switched in the display unit of the normal map display area P, but also the processing corresponding to the hold command is performed.

In the variable pending command correspondence process, as shown in FIG. 77 (b), in step S5401, it is determined whether or not the running normal figure game round is the open result. In such a process, by grasping the information of the game result set in the process for starting the change of the normal map, it is possible to confirm whether or not the current normal map game is the open result. In the case of the opening result, it is determined in step S5402 whether or not the opening result grasped in step S5401 is the opening result in which the high winning support state is obtained. If a negative determination is made in either step S5401 or step S5402, the variable pending command correspondence process is terminated as it is.

If it is determined in step S5402 that the opening result is in the high winning support state, the process proceeds to step S5403. In step S5403, a process of grasping the remaining fluctuation display time in the running normal game times is executed. The process of step S5403 can also be said to be a process of grasping the time (period) until the support state that becomes the high winning support state grasped in step S5402 occurs. Then, in step S5404, a process of grasping the flow time required for the game ball that has passed through the through gate 35 to flow down to the lower operating port 34 is performed. In this process, the required flow time is stored in advance in various table storage areas 245 of the ROM 243 as a predetermined time (for example, 2 sec), and the process of reading the flow time is performed. The flow time required for the game ball that has passed through the through gate 35 to flow down to the lower operating port 34 may differ depending on various accessories and nails 38 installed in the game area PE. Therefore, the flow time may be set with a certain width (for example, 1.5 sec to 2.5 sec).

Then, in step S5405, the time until the support state grasped in step S5403 occurs and the flow time grasped in step S5404 are compared, and the game ball winning the through gate 35 this time is step S5403. It is determined whether or not it is possible to win a prize in the lower operating port 34 in the support state grasped in. In this case, if the support state is executed so as to straddle the flow time, it is determined that a prize can be won.

In the support state, the time between the open state and the closed state of the electric accessory 34a may be grasped, and it may be determined that a prize can be won when the time for the open state extends over the flow time. By doing so, it is possible to determine a more accurate winning possibility.

If it is determined in step S5405 that the prize can be won, the special effect is executed in step S5404, and then the process corresponding to the pending command during this change is terminated. If it is determined in step S5405 that it is not possible to win a prize, the process corresponding to the pending command during the change is terminated as it is.

As the special production, it may be performed as a production on the normal drawing side or as a production on the special drawing side. When the effect is performed on the normal map side, for example, as shown in FIG. 77 (c), the background color of the normal map display area P may be changed so as to be different from the background color up to that point. In this case, the speaker unit 64 may be configured to emit a sound effect (pure !!). Further, when the effect is performed on the special drawing side, for example, as shown in FIG. 77 (d), the second hold is shown so that the hold information based on the winning of the lower operating port 34 is easily acquired. The reserved image may be displayed slightly in the free area of the display area Gb, or the characters "Cammon!" May be displayed while pointing to the free area. Even in this case, the speaker unit 64 may be configured to emit a sound effect.

As described above, in the present embodiment, on the premise of a gauge configuration in which a game ball that has passed through the through gate 35 can win a prize in the lower operating port 34, the said game is based on the acquisition of hold information on the normal drawing side. It is configured to notify whether or not the game ball that triggered the acquisition can win a prize in the lower operating port 34. By doing so, it is possible to suitably execute both effects while associating the flow mode of the game ball with the effects on the normal drawing side and the effects on the special drawing side.

In addition, the present invention is not limited to the contents described in each of the above-described embodiments, and may be carried out as follows, for example. Incidentally, each of the following configurations may be applied individually to each of the above embodiments, or may be partially or wholly combined and applied to each of the above embodiments. Further, it is also possible to arbitrarily combine all or a part of the various configurations shown in the above embodiments. In this case, it is preferable that the technical significance (effect to be exerted) of each configuration to be combined is guaranteed. Each of the following configurations may be applied individually to a new configuration consisting of a combination of embodiments, or a part or all of them may be applied in combination.

(1) The special figure hold notice is set to be performed by using the stop result of each symbol row Z1 to Z3 in the special figure game round, but it may be configured to be performed by another effect during the special figure game round. The configuration may be performed using the holding image on the drawing side. As a configuration to be performed by other effects during the special figure game, for example, an effect in which a predetermined character appears during the special figure game, or a timing of the start of fluctuation of each symbol row Z1 to Z3 is a special figure hold notice. The timing may be different from the case where there is no special symbol, or the order in which the fluctuations of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 start may be different from the case where the special figure reservation notice is not given. Further, as a configuration performed using the holding image on the special drawing side, a plurality of types of holding images for the special drawing are stored in advance and the opening / closing execution mode is performed, as in the case of the general drawing holding notice in each of the above embodiments. Different types of pending images may be selected depending on the degree of expectation of transition to. By doing so, the execution timing of the special figure hold notice does not have to be at the end of the variation display in the special figure game times, and the effect on the special figure game times side as in the second embodiment, for example, ( In a configuration in which the execution mode of the general drawing reservation notice is changed according to the special figure reservation notice), the change can be made more diverse.

Specifically, for example, in a configuration in which a special figure hold notice is executed using a hold image for a special figure, the player predicts that the hold information has a high expectation for the open / close execution mode at the time of holding acquisition. can do. In such a configuration, it is possible to shift to the open / close execution mode after that by the holding image on the special figure side as described above, without waiting for the end of the special figure game times being executed as in each of the above embodiments. If it is predicted, it is possible to stop the launch of the game ball and wait for the holding information to be digested, that is, to shift to the open / close execution mode. Therefore, in such a situation, if the hold notice on the normal drawing side is positively executed (the configuration is set to the high probability state of the notice), it is meaningful to continue the firing of the game ball, and the action of stopping is stopped. Can be suppressed in advance.

In particular, just before the upper limit (100 times) of the high-frequency support mode with a limited number of times, as already explained, waiting for the end of the high-frequency support mode rather than actively aiming for a prize in the lower operating port 34, etc. There is a possibility that a stoppage will be taken. Then, in such a situation, if a hold notice with a high expectation for the open / close execution mode is given, it is considered that the probability that the stop action is performed will be significantly increased. Therefore, in such a situation, by proactively executing the hold notice on the normal drawing side (the configuration is the opposite of that of the first embodiment), the lower actuating opening 34 is aimed at winning a prize. , It is also possible to suppress the act of stopping.

(2) As a configuration to change the setting of the normal map hold notice according to the game situation and the effect content on the special figure side, the execution probability of the normal figure hold notice differs depending on the game situation and the effect content on the special figure side. In addition, although the configuration is set to either the low-probability state of the advance notice or the high-probability state of the advance notice, the configuration for changing the setting of the general notice hold notice is not limited to this. For example, the execution mode of the normal figure hold notice may be set differently according to the game situation on the special figure side and the effect content, or the hold information subject to the normal figure hold notice may be different. ..

As a configuration in which the execution mode of the normal drawing reservation notice is different, for example, the type of the special holding image SPB that can be selected may be different depending on the game situation on the special drawing side and the effect content, or the normal drawing game times. It may be changed to give a notice of holding a normal figure according to the variable display pattern or the stop result in the game, or the notice of holding the normal figure is given as a configuration in which the notice of holding the normal figure is performed according to the variable display pattern of the game times of the normal figure or the stop result. The variation display pattern and the stop result at the time of execution may be different depending on the game situation and the effect content on the special drawing side. However, since the production on the normal drawing side is only an auxiliary production on the special drawing side, it is preferable not to make it more flashy than the production on the special drawing side, and from the viewpoint of suppressing the increase in the processing load. However, it is preferable that the configuration of the general drawing reservation notice itself is a simple configuration as in the above embodiment.

Further, as a configuration in which the hold information subject to the normal figure hold notice is different, for example, the game situation and the effect content on the special figure side execute the normal figure hold notice according to the game situation and the effect content on the special figure side. In the case of the first state (normal game state, low frequency support mode, situation without special figure hold notice) suitable for the situation to be done, a predetermined area (for example, the first area to the side electric service hold area 250c) in the sub-side electric service hold area 250c. The hold information stored in the second area) is the target of the normal figure hold notice, and the game situation on the special figure side and the production content are not suitable for the situation where the normal figure hold notice should be executed. In the case of the high frequency support mode and the situation where there is a notice of holding the special figure), it is stored in an area (for example, 3rd to 4th areas) different from the above-mentioned predetermined area in the sub-side electric service holding area 250c. Hold information is subject to the notice of holding the general map. Then, if the predetermined area and the area different from the predetermined area are set as the area to be the target of the winning / failing lottery on the general map side before the different area, the first state is better. It is configured to notify the support state that may occur at a timing earlier than the second state, and if the special figure side is the first state and the normal figure hold notice should be executed, it will be at an earlier timing. It is possible to notify the possibility of transition of the support status. In addition, even if the special figure side is in the second state and it is not the situation in which the notice of holding the normal figure should be executed, the support state is shifted to the support state at a timing later than that situation, so for example, the normal figure. Even if the reservation notice is overlooked at the execution start timing of the hold notice, the hold notice is confirmed due to the subsequent change in the situation on the special figure side (change from the second state to the first state). It may be done.

(3) In each of the above embodiments, in the timing change processing, the game status on the special figure side at the timing when a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the current processing timing is grasped, but the following changes are made. You may.

For example, the fluctuation display time (including the fluctuation display time of the running Fuzu game times) of the stored Fuzu side holding information including the hold information related to the Fuzu hold command acquired this time is grasped. In addition, the variable display time of the reserved information on the special figure side (including the remaining variable display time if the special figure game is being executed) and the open / close execution mode are performed (if the special figure game is currently being executed, the open / close execution is executed). Keep track of the remaining time in the mode). Then, from the current processing timing to the period until the hold information related to the normal figure hold command acquired this time shifts to the support state (the period until the result of the hit / fail judgment is notified), the game state on the special figure side is changed. Determine whether to migrate. Specifically, for example, during the period from the current processing timing to the transition of the hold information related to the hold command acquired this time to the support state, the special figure side determines whether to shift to the open / close execution mode / end. Alternatively, it is determined whether or not the high-frequency support mode ends (whether or not the remaining number of times is a predetermined number of times (4 times) in the high-frequency support mode with a limited number of times). In these cases, the normal hold image SPA is displayed when the normal hold image SPA is received this time, and after the game state on the special figure side shifts, immediately before the shift, or at the same time as the shift, the normal figure hold. Even if the notice is given, the reserved image for the normal drawing will be changed as the special reserved image SPB after the situation does not interfere with the production on the special drawing side. As mentioned above, depending on the game state of the special figure side, as a player, pay attention to the special figure side's production, and not only may the normal drawing side's production be overlooked, but also the normal drawing side's production may be flashy. On the contrary, it is possible that the attention of the special figure side production may be reduced. Therefore, in this way, if the game state on the special map side changes between the acquisition timing of the hold command on the normal map side and the notification of the result of the winning / failing lottery related to the hold command, the normal map hold notice is given. If the execution timing of is changed, it is possible to further perform the effect on the normal drawing side according to the game state on the special drawing side. As a result of the above, it is possible to perform the production on the special drawing side and the production on the normal drawing side in a well-balanced manner.

(4) In each of the above embodiments, the ball entry portions of the variable winning device 32 and the lower operating port 34 are provided in the lower region PE4, and the game ball is launched so as to flow down either the left region PE2 or the right region PE3. Also, although it is configured so that both the ball-entry portions 32 and 34 can win a prize, they may be arranged so that they can be hit separately. That is, for example, one of the ball entry portions 32 and 34 is provided on one of the left side region PE2 and the right side region PE3, and the other ball entry portions 32 and 34 are provided on the other side of both regions PE2 and PE3. In this way, if the game ball is launched so as to flow down the left region PE2, the ball can enter only the entry portion provided in the region PE2 on that side, and the game ball can flow down the right region PE3. When is fired, the ball can enter only the ball entry portion provided in the area PE3 on that side. Alternatively, one of the ball entry portions 32 and 34 may be provided on one of both regions PE2 and PE3, and the other ball entry portions 32 and 34 may be provided on the lower region PE4 and the upper region PE1. Since the game ball flowing down the left side region PE2 and the right side region PE3 can also pass through the upper region PE1 and the lower region PE4, in this way, to the regions PE2 and PE3 on the side where the ball entry portions 32 and 34 are provided. When the game ball is launched, the game ball can enter the ball entry portions 32 and 34, and the game ball enters the ball entry section 32 and 34 provided in the upper region PE1 or the lower region PE4. On the other hand, if a game ball is launched into the regions PE2 and PE3 on the side where the entry portions 32 and 34 are not provided, the ball cannot enter the entry portions 32 and 34, but the upper region PE1 or the lower It is possible to enter the ball entry portions 32 and 34 on the side provided in the side region PE4. In this way, in the configuration in which both the ball entry portions 32 and 34 are arranged so that they can be hit separately, if the player is notified in advance that the support state will be entered during the open / close execution mode by the general drawing hold notice, the player Not only may you be confused as to which one to aim for, but even though you are in the open / close execution mode, the overlapping support states may make you feel lost and discourage you from playing. Therefore, in the case of arranging as described above, the above-mentioned inconvenience can be avoided by not notifying in advance that the support state will occur during the open / close execution mode.

On the other hand, in the configuration in which the ball entry portions 32 and 34 are arranged as described above, it is possible to create a new game, for example, to aim at the lower operating port 34 according to the progress in the open / close execution mode. can. That is, if the electric accessory 34a of the lower operating port 34 is in the open state during the waiting time between rounds in which the variable winning device 32 is closed in the open / close execution mode, it is notified in advance. , It is possible to make the variable winning device 32 and the lower operating port 34 win alternately, and unlike the conventional opening / closing execution mode in which the game ball is simply fired at the variable winning device 32, the game is diversified. Can be planned.

(5) The OP period and the ED period may be set as follows. For example, if the result of the previous Fuzu game is an open result corresponding to the transition to the support state, the OP period in the next support state is set according to the current ED period. In addition, when the result of the next Fuzu game is an open result corresponding to the transition to the support state, the ED period of the current support state is set according to the next OP period. By doing so, it is possible to lengthen or shorten the period during which the fluctuation display of the normal game times is not performed, and it is possible to preferably perform the effect during that period.

(6) Even if the opening result is the same, the OP period and the ED period may be set to be different from each other. That is, for example, in the above embodiment, in the first opening result A1, the OP period is set to be short and the ED period is set to be short, but any period may be set to be long. Further, the presence / absence and type of execution of the OP effect and the ED effect may be set differently from each other. That is, for example, in the above embodiment, in the first opening result A1, the OP effect is not performed and the ED effect is not performed, but even if the effect is performed in any period. good.

(7) Not only in the OP period and the ED period, but also in the support state, the waiting time (between rounds) during the unit opening / closing control (1 round) in which the electric accessory 34a is changed from the closed state to the open state and then closed. The standby time, hereinafter also referred to as the RD period) may be changed. Specifically, it will be described with reference to FIG. 78. FIG. 78 (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining how the OP period and the ED period in the above embodiment are changed, and FIG. 78 (b) explains how the RD period in the present modification is changed. It is explanatory drawing.

In the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 78 (a), the OP from the timing of t1 at which one game round ends to the timing of t2 or the timing of t3 at which the first unit opening / closing control in the support state is started. The length of the period was set to differ depending on the playing state. On the other hand, the length of the RD period, which is the waiting time between the unit opening / closing control and the unit opening / closing control from the timing of t4 to the timing of t5, varies depending on the opening result (0.2 msec in the high winning support state, low). It was 2 sec) in the winning support state, and it was the same period regardless of the game state. Then, the length of the ED period from the end of the last unit opening / closing control at the timing of t6 or the timing of t7 in the support state to the start of the next normal game round at the timing of t8 depends on the game state. It was set to be different.

As shown in FIG. 78 (b), in this modified example, the OP period from the timing of t1 at which one game round ends to the timing of t2 at which the first unit opening / closing control in the support state is started, and the last The length of the ED period from the timing of t7 when the unit opening / closing control ends to the timing of t8 when the next normal game round starts does not differ. On the other hand, the RD period, which is the waiting time between the unit open / close control and the unit open / close control, is set to be longer in the low frequency support mode than in the high frequency support mode (t3 in the low frequency support mode). The timing is from t6, and in the high frequency support mode, the timing is from t4 to t5). By doing so, it is possible to secure a time for executing the effect of notifying the state between rounds (RD effect) in the RD period when the support state is entered during the low frequency support mode. As this RD effect, for example, a configuration in which characters such as "Open again!" Can be considered can be considered. On the other hand, in the high-frequency support mode, if such an RD effect is frequently performed, the player may find it rather annoying. Therefore, according to the above configuration, opening / closing control can be performed according to the presence / absence of execution of the RD effect performed during the RD period and the length of the RD effect.

(8) The lengths of the OP period, the ED period, and the RD period are not selected from predetermined types, and may be changed by, for example, a lottery using a counter or the like. .. Further, the OP period, the ED period, and the RD period may be set by lottery or the like regardless of the game result on the normal drawing side. In this way, it is possible to make the length of each period more diverse. However, a configuration in which each game result is linked to each other as in the above embodiment and each period is uniquely determined by the result is preferable from the viewpoint of suppressing an increase in the processing load.

(9) The OP period, ED period, and RD period are set so as to be different according to the game state of the special figure side, but it is sufficient if these periods can be set differently, and the special figure side can be used. The configuration may be independent of the situation.

(10) The length of the OP period, the ED period, and the RD period, and the number of times of opening in each opening result are not limited to those described above. For example, the number of times of opening in each opening result may be set to one, or may be configured to include four or more times.

(11) The number of reserved areas is such that the first result display unit holding area Ra is four, the second result display unit holding area Rb is four, and the electric service holding area Rc is four. The number is not limited, and the number may be 3 each or 5 or more each, and each reserved number may be different. Further, not only the configuration having the first result display unit holding area Ra and the second result display unit holding area Rb, but also the configuration having other holding areas may be used, and only one of the holding areas may be used. It may be configured to have.

(12) The hold information of the second result display section hold area Rb is preferentially determined over the hold information of the first result display section hold area Ra, but the opposite may be true, and a prize is won. It may be configured to determine whether or not the result is in order (acquisition order). However, in view of the superiority of the distribution table for the second result display unit, it is preferable to preferentially digest the reserved information of the distribution table for the second result display unit.

(13) Although various processes for holding notice on the special drawing side and the normal drawing side are executed in the staging control device 82, they may be executed in the main control device 81, and the staging control device 82 may perform the pass / fail determination process, etc. It may be configured to execute the processing on the main control device 81 side of the above.

(14) The mode of the reservation notice on the special drawing side and the normal drawing side is only an example, and may be another mode. For example, the hold notice on the special figure side may be configured to use the hold image like the hold notice on the normal figure side, or the hold notice on the normal figure side may change like the hold notice on the special figure side. It may be configured by using the display mode (stop result). Further, it may be configured to give each hold notice by using an accessory or the like, or it may be configured to use the display light emitting unit 63 and the speaker unit 64.

(15) Based on the winning of the through gate 35, the winning / failing lottery on the normal side is performed to determine whether or not the electric accessory 34a provided in the lower operating port 34 is in the open state (support state). However, the electric accessory 34a is not provided in the lower operating port 34, but may be provided in, for example, another ball entry portion (general winning opening 31 or the like).

(16) Based on the processing result of the situation grasping process on the special map side, the execution mode and processing of the notification of holding the normal map are different, but based on the processing result of the situation grasping process on the special map side, the normal map side The configuration may be different as long as the processing and the production mode are different, and the present invention is not limited to the execution mode and the processing for the general drawing hold notice.

(17) Based on the processing result of the situation grasping process on the special map side, the type of the general map reservation information to be specified may be changed. Specifically, depending on the game situation on the special map side, only the pending information that will be the opening result is specified first, or only the pending information that will be in the high winning support state among the opening results is specified first. It may be a configuration, or conversely, a configuration may be used in which only the pending information that results in the deviation is specified first. By doing so, it is possible to associate the game situation on the special map side with the effect content on the normal map side with a simple configuration.

(18) As a notice of holding a normal figure, the image for holding the normal figure is set to be different, but the player has continued to give the notice of holding the figure from the start of execution of the notice of holding the normal figure. As long as it is a recognizable configuration, other production modes may be used. For example, the background color or image of the display screen G may be different, or the general drawing reservation notice may be continuously performed by another display unit, an effect execution unit such as an accessory, or the like.

(19) When the electric accessory 34a is closed, the lower operating port 34 may not be awarded at all, and although the prize is generated, it is more difficult to win the prize than in the open state. At least, the ease of winning a prize in the lower working port 34 may differ between the open state and the closed state. Further, the variable winning device 32 may also be configured so that no winning is generated in the large winning opening 32a when it is closed, and it is more difficult to win a prize than in the open state although a prize is generated. However, at least the configuration may be such that the ease of winning a prize in the large winning opening 32a differs between the open state and the closed state.

(20) The configuration is such that the remaining number of times in the high-frequency support mode with a limited number of times is grasped in the situation grasping process and the timing change processing on the special figure side (step S4704 and step S4805). It may be configured to grasp the number of executions of the special figure game times from. Further, the configuration may be such that the elapsed time from the transition to the high-frequency support mode is counted, and the remaining number of times and the number of executions are grasped by the elapsed time.

(21) In each of the above embodiments, it is determined whether to set the advance notice low probability state or the advance notice high probability state by each process of the situation grasping process on the special figure side, but the high and low of these advance notice probabilities are reversed. It may be configured to be set to be.

(22) A pachinko machine of another type different from the above embodiment, for example, a pachinko machine in which an electric accessory is opened a predetermined number of times when a game ball enters a specific area of a special device, or a game ball is placed in a specific area of the special device. The present invention can also be applied to a pachinko machine, which is a big hit when a player enters, a pachinko machine equipped with other accessories, an arrange ball machine, a game machine such as a sparrow ball, and the like.

In addition, a non-bullet type gaming machine, for example, a plurality of reels having a plurality of types of symbols attached in the circumferential direction is provided, the reels are started to rotate by inserting medals and operating the start lever, and the stop switch is operated. Or, after the reel has stopped after a predetermined time has elapsed, if a specific symbol or a combination of specific symbols is established on the effective line that can be seen from the display window, a privilege such as paying out a medal is given to the player. The present invention can also be applied to slot machines.

Further, the gaming machine main body supported by the outer frame so as to be openable and closable is provided with a storage unit and a take-in device, and the start lever is operated after a predetermined number of game balls stored in the storage unit are taken in by the take-in device. The present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused to start rotation of a reel.

<About the invention group extracted from the above-described embodiment>
Hereinafter, the characteristics of the invention group extracted from each of the above-described embodiments will be described while showing the effects and the like as necessary. In the following, for the sake of easy understanding, the corresponding configurations in each of the above embodiments are appropriately shown in parentheses or the like, but the present invention is not limited to the specific configurations shown in the parentheses or the like.

In addition, the invention described in each of the following feature groups states, "For example, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine, a winning game is triggered by the fact that the gaming ball enters the starting ball entry portion provided in the gaming area. A lottery is performed to determine whether or not to shift to a predetermined gaming state such as a state. Further, for example, in a display device provided in a gaming machine, a variable display of a pattern is started, and the above-mentioned is performed when the final stop display of the variable display is performed. Regarding the background technology that the display effect for one game is executed in which the stop result according to the lottery result is displayed (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2004-81853). It is necessary to raise the degree of attention of the slingshot, and there is still room for improvement in this regard. "

<Characteristic A group>
Feature A0. A game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 53) that launches a game ball into the game area based on a predetermined firing operation, and
A first ball entry portion (lower operating port 34) provided in the game area and on which a game ball can enter,
A first determination means (a function of executing a hit / fail determination process by the main control device 81) for making a first determination based on the fact that a game ball has entered the first entry portion.
Based on the result of the first determination by the first determination means being a predetermined predetermined result, the privilege granting means for granting the privilege to the player (execution of the game state transition process by the main control device 81). Function to do) and
In a gaming machine equipped with
A second ball entry section (through gate 35) provided in the game area separately from the first ball entry section and on which a game ball can enter,
A receiving state provided in the game area where the game ball can be easily received into the first ball entry section or a predetermined ball entry section, and a game ball being placed in the first ball entry section or the predetermined ball entry section rather than the receiving state. A variable receiving means (electric accessory 34a) that can be displaced to a non-accepting state that is difficult to accept, and
A second determination means (a function of executing the normal game rotation control process by the main control device 81) for making a second determination based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second entry unit.
Based on the fact that the result of the second determination by the second determination means is a predetermined specific result, the variable acceptance means is changed from the non-acceptance state to the acceptance state, and then to the non-acceptance state. Variable control execution means (a function to execute the normal game state transition process by the main control device 81) that executes variable acceptance control, and
Information corresponding to the result when the second determination is made at a timing before the second determination is made by the second determination means after the game ball enters the second entry portion. (Function to execute the process for holding the normal figure by the main controller 81) and the destination specifying means (function to execute the process for holding the normal figure)
Based on the fact that the specific result by the prior identification means becomes a predetermined special result, the special notification corresponding to the result of the second determination which is the specific target is delivered by the predetermined notification means (symbol display device 41). (Function to execute the normal figure hold notice setting process by the staging control device 82) and the special notification execution means to be executed in
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the above configuration, in a gaming machine in which a first determination is made based on the entry of a game ball into the first entry section and a privilege is given to the player based on the result, the first entry section or the first ball entry section or A variable receiving means that influences the ease of entering the game ball into another ball entry section is provided, and this variable receiving means is performed based on the entry into the second ball entry section. 2 Variable acceptance control is performed depending on the result of the determination. Therefore, the ease of entering the ball to the first entry section differs depending on the entry into the second entry section and the result of the second determination based on the result, and the player is accompanied by this. The advantages will be different. In such a configuration, as a notification for the second determination, a special notification corresponding to the result may be performed at a timing before the second determination is performed. As a result, it is special that not only the game such as whether or not the privilege can be obtained based on the entry into the first entry section, but also the ease of entry to the first entry section can be displaced. It is possible to perform games such as predicting by notification, and it is possible to diversify the games.

Features A1. A game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 53) that launches a game ball into the game area based on a predetermined firing operation, and
A first ball entry portion (lower operating port 34) provided in the game area and on which a game ball can enter,
A first information acquisition means (a function of executing a winning process for an operating port by the main control device 81) to acquire first information based on the fact that a game ball has entered the first ball entry portion.
A first information storage means (holding ball storage area 232) for storing the first information acquired by the first information acquisition means, and
The first determination means (the hit / fail determination process by the main control device 81) that first determines whether or not the first information stored in the first information storage means corresponds to the predetermined first correspondence information. Function to execute) and
Equipped with
The gaming states include at least a first gaming state (normal gaming state, low frequency support mode, low probability mode) and a second gaming state (open / close execution mode, high frequency support) that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state. Mode, high probability mode), and are set,
Based on the fact that the result of the first determination by the first determination means is the first correspondence result that the first information to be determined corresponds to the first correspondence information, the gaming state is changed to the first. A state transition means (a function of executing the game state transition process by the main control device 81) for transitioning from the game state to the second game state, and
The game rotation operation is started by a predetermined notification means (symbol display device 41), and the game rotation operation is terminated as a notification result corresponding to the result of the first determination of the first determination means. As one time, the game turn control means (main control) that controls the predetermined notification means so that the game turn operation of each game turn is performed according to the first information stored in the first information storage means. (A function to execute the game times control process by the device 81) and
In a gaming machine equipped with
A second ball entry section (through gate 35) provided in the game area separately from the first ball entry section and on which a game ball can enter,
A variable state that is provided in the game area and can be displaced into an accepting state in which the game ball is easily accepted into the first entry portion and a non-acceptance state in which the game ball is less likely to be accepted into the first entry portion than in the acceptance state. Receiving means (electric accessory 34a) and
A second information acquisition means (a function of executing a winning process for thru by the main control device 81) to acquire the second information based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second entry portion.
A second information storage means (electric service holding area 233) for storing the second information acquired by the second information acquisition means, and
A second determination means (a normal drawing game by the main control device 81) that makes a second determination as to whether or not the second information stored in the second information storage means corresponds to the second correspondence information that is predetermined. Function to execute control processing) and
Based on the fact that the result of the second determination by the second determination means is the second correspondence result that the second information to be determined corresponds to the second correspondence information, the variable acceptance means is described. A variable control execution means (a function of executing the normal game state transition process by the main control device 81) for executing variable acceptance control from the non-accepted state to the accepted state and then to the non-accepted state.
The second determination notification means (normal figure variation display by the staging control device 82) that executes the notification process for performing the notification of the second determination of the second determination means by the predetermined notification means or a notification means different from the predetermined notification means. Function to execute control processing and general map hold control processing),
Equipped with
The second determination notification means is
Regarding the predetermined second information acquired by the second information acquisition means, the information corresponding to the result of the second determination when the predetermined second information is the target of the second determination is the predetermined second information. 2 A destination specifying means (a function of executing a processing for holding a normal figure by the main control device 81) for executing a processing for specifying the information at a timing before the target of the second determination, and
Based on the fact that the specific result by the prior identification means becomes a predetermined special result, the second determination in the case where the predetermined second information which is the specific target becomes the target of the second determination. A special notification execution means (a function of executing the normal figure hold notice setting process by the staging control device 82) for executing the special notification corresponding to the result by the predetermined notification means or a notification means different from the predetermined notification means.
Equipped with
The gaming machine is
A grasping means for grasping the game state (a function of executing the situation grasping process on the special drawing side by the effect control device 82 in the first embodiment) and
Based on the grasping result by the grasping means, the changing means for changing the execution mode of the notification process of the second determination notification means (such as the normal figure hold notice setting process and the special figure effect setting process by the effect control device 82). Function to execute) and
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the above configuration, if the first information is acquired based on the game ball entering the first ball entry portion, and the result of the first determination for the first information is the first correspondence result, the gaming state. In the gaming machine that shifts to the second gaming state, which is advantageous for the player, a variable receiving means that affects the ease of entering the game ball into the first entering portion is provided, and the variable receiving means is provided. Variable acceptance control is performed based on the result of the second determination performed based on the entry into the second entry section. Therefore, the ease of entering the ball to the first entry section differs depending on the entry into the second entry section and the result of the second determination based on the result, and the player is accompanied by this. The degree of advantage (transition of the gaming state) will be different. In such a configuration, the second determination notification means for notifying the second determination is provided with a destination identification means for specifying information corresponding to the determination result at a timing prior to the second determination being performed. Special notification is performed based on the specific result of the prior specific result. As a result, not only the game of simply shifting the gaming state from the first gaming state to the second gaming state based on the entry into the first entry section, but also the easy entry to the first entry section side. It is possible to perform a game such as predicting that the sword may be displaced by a special notification, and it is possible to diversify the game.

Then, in the above configuration, a notification process for notification of the second determination is included, including a special notification that notifies the displacement of the ease of entering the ball to the first ball entry portion side earlier than that. The execution mode of the above may differ depending on the gaming state. Therefore, it is possible to notify the player of the high or low degree of advantage (whether it is the first game state or the second game state) while associating the ease of entering the first ball entry portion, which determines the level. It will be possible. For example, when the gaming state is the first gaming state, it is considered that the player wants to immediately enter the second gaming state, and the occurrence of the ball entering the first ball entry section and the entry of the ball are considered. It is considered that there is an increasing interest in the notification of the entry into the second entry portion and the notification of the second determination based on the entry into the second entry portion so that the occurrence is likely to occur. Further, when the gaming state is the second gaming state, it is desired that the second gaming state lasts for a long time, or that the second gaming state is generated again even if the game shifts to the first gaming state. It is considered that the player is more interested in the direct notification on the first determination side than the notification via the ball entering the second ball entry section. Therefore, as described above, the execution mode for the notification of the second determination side is different depending on the difference in the gaming state based on the determination result of the first determination side, so that appropriate notification is performed according to the interest of the player. be able to. As a result, the degree of attention to the game can be suitably increased.

Feature A2. Based on the grasping result of the grasping means, the changing means is a destination specifying changing means (holding a normal figure by the staging control device 82) for changing the execution mode of the specifying process by the destination specifying means among the notification processes. The gaming machine according to feature A1, which is characterized by having a function of executing a notice setting process).

According to the above configuration, the execution mode of the process of specifying the second information at the timing before the second determination is performed can be adjusted to the gaming state of the first determination side. As described above, the game state on the first determination side is set to the first game state and the second game state, which have different advantages for the player. The degree of attention will be different, and the content of the production to be performed will be different accordingly. Further, the processing load on the gaming machine side also differs depending on the gaming state. On the other hand, not only the first judgment but also the second judgment is a judgment regarding the profit to the player, and if the processing of the second judgment itself regarding such a profit is to be different depending on the game state of the first judgment side. However, the profits of the players will be different due to the difference, and many changes will be unavoidable in the specifications of the gaming machine, the ball ejection management, the design of the gaming machine, and the like. Therefore, if the execution mode of the process specified by the first-determining means on the second determination side is different according to the difference in the degree of attention and the processing load caused by the difference in the gaming state, the portion related to the profit of the player. It is possible to make the processing on the staging side different without changing the above, and it is possible to suitably adjust the degree of attention on the first determination side and the height of the processing load on the second determination side. Therefore, it is possible to suitably increase the degree of attention to the game.

Feature A3. The destination specifying changing means includes means for changing whether or not to execute the specifying process by the destination specifying means (a function of executing the processing of steps S4604 to S4606 by the staging control device 82). The gaming machine according to the feature A2.

According to the above configuration, since it is only a change of whether or not to execute the process of specifying the second information by the prior identification means, the effect described in the above A2 can be obtained by a simple processing configuration.

Feature A4. The destination specifying changing means includes means for changing the number of the predetermined second information (a function of executing the processing of step S4707 by the staging control device 82) to perform the specifying processing by the destination specifying means. The gaming machine according to the feature A2 or the feature A3.

According to the above configuration, the number of the second information on the second determination side to be specified by the prior identification means is changed depending on the level of the advantage for the player (the game state on the first determination side). The number of second information that the person can predict the result of the second determination side is different depending on the advantage of the gaming state. By doing so, for example, during the first game state, which is relatively disadvantageous to the player, the number of the second information to be specified can be increased to suppress the redundancy of the game, or conversely, the processing load can be increased. During the second game state, the number of the second information to be specified can be reduced to distribute the processing load. Therefore, the degree of attention to the game can be suitably increased.

Feature A5. Based on the grasping result of the grasping means, the changing means changes the execution mode of the special notification by the special notification executing means among the notification processes (steps S4607 by the staging control device 82). The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A4, characterized in that it has a function of executing the process of step S4611).

According to the above configuration, the execution mode for special notification that notifies the second information at a timing before the second determination is performed can be adjusted to the gaming state of the first determination side. As described above, the game state on the first determination side is set to the first game state and the second game state, which have different advantages for the player. The degree of attention will be different, and the content of the production to be performed will be different accordingly. Further, the processing load on the gaming machine side also differs depending on the gaming state.

On the other hand, not only the first judgment but also the second judgment is a judgment regarding the profit to the player, and if the processing of the second judgment itself regarding such a profit is to be different depending on the game state of the first judgment side. However, the profits of the players will be different due to the difference, and many changes will be unavoidable in the specifications of the gaming machine, the ball ejection management, the design of the gaming machine, and the like. Therefore, if the execution mode of the special notification on the second determination side is different according to the difference in the degree of attention and the processing load caused by the difference in the gaming state, the part related to the interest of the player is not changed. Only the processing on the effect side can be made different, and the degree of attention on the first determination side and the height of the processing load can be suitably adjusted on the second determination side. Therefore, it is possible to suitably increase the degree of attention to the game.

Feature A6. The special notification changing means changes the execution mode of the special notification by the special notification executing means based on the grasping result of the grasping means and the specifying result of the specified process by the destination specifying means. The gaming machine according to feature A5, which is characterized by being present.

According to the above configuration, the execution mode for special notification that notifies the second information at a timing prior to the second determination is determined by the game state of the first determination side and the first identification means of the second determination side. It can be changed by taking into account the specific result. As described above, the game state on the first determination side is set to the first game state and the second game state, which have different advantages for the player. The degree of attention will be different, and the content of the production to be performed will be different accordingly. Further, the processing load on the gaming machine side also differs depending on the gaming state.

On the other hand, not only the first judgment but also the second judgment is a judgment regarding the profit to the player, and if the processing of the second judgment itself regarding such a profit is to be different depending on the game state of the first judgment side. However, the profits of the players will be different due to the difference, and many changes will be unavoidable in the specifications of the gaming machine, the ball ejection management, the design of the gaming machine, and the like. Therefore, if the execution mode of the special notification on the second determination side is different according to the difference in the degree of attention and the processing load caused by the difference in the gaming state, the part related to the interest of the player is not changed. Only the processing on the effect side can be made different, and the degree of attention on the first determination side and the height of the processing load can be suitably adjusted on the second determination side.

In this configuration, not only the situation on the first determination side but also the situation on the second determination side (specific result by the prior identification means) is taken into consideration to change the execution mode of the special notification. Inconsistency or inconvenience with the situation on the second determination side is unlikely to occur in changing the execution mode of. That is, for example, in the case of a configuration in which whether or not to execute the special notification is changed according to the situation of the first determination side, the special notification should not be executed as the situation of the second determination side. Depending on the situation on the first judgment side, it may be executed in the opposite direction, and the opposite event may occur. Therefore, if not only the first determination side but also the second determination side is taken into consideration, the execution mode of the special notification can be set satisfactorily.

Feature A7. The special notification changing means includes means for changing whether or not to execute the special notification by the special notification executing means (a function of executing the processing of steps S4604 to S4606 by the effect control device 82). The gaming machine according to feature A5 or feature A6.

According to the above configuration, since it is simply a change of whether or not to execute the special notification, the effect described in the above-mentioned feature A5 or the above-mentioned feature A6 can be obtained by a simple processing configuration.

Feature A8. The special notification changing means is characterized by including a timing changing means (a function of executing a timing change process by the effect control device 82) for changing the execution timing of the special notification by the special notification executing means. The gaming machine according to any one of A7.

According to the above configuration, the execution timing of the special notification may differ depending on the game state. As described above, it is considered that the player's attention level and attention destination (target of attention) differ depending on the difference in the gaming state, and if the execution timing of the special notification is set accordingly, the special notification can be produced more effectively. Can be. For example, depending on the game state, it is common to set a case where the game round on the first determination side is performed and a case where the game round is not performed, and the second determination is made according to the presence or absence of execution of such a game round. By changing the execution timing of the special notification on the side, the execution status of the game times and the execution timing of the special notification can be adjusted. Therefore, the degree of attention to the game can be suitably increased.

Feature A9. The timing changing means has a configuration capable of changing the execution timing so that the special notification is executed after shifting from the current gaming state to another gaming state based on the grasping result by the grasping means. The gaming machine according to feature A8, which is characterized by being present.

According to the above configuration, in a gaming machine in which the first determination and the second determination are executed in parallel, the effect (special notification) on the second determination side is adjusted according to the situation (game state) on the first determination side. can do. That is, depending on the situation on the first determination side (gaming state), it is possible that the special notification should not be executed, and the gaming state on the first determination side shifts to another gaming state as described above (as described above). Specifically, if the special notification is given after the transition from the first gaming state to the second gaming state or from the second gaming state to the first gaming state), the special notification is executed in a situation that should not be executed. It is possible to avoid the inconvenience of doing so.

Feature A10. Based on the acquisition of the second information by the second information acquisition means, the information regarding the acquired second information is notified by the predetermined notification means or a notification means different from the predetermined notification means, and at least the acquisition thereof. Second storage information notification means (a function of executing the normal figure hold control process by the effect control device 82) to continue the notification of the information related to the second information until the second information is subject to the second determination. Equipped with
The special notification execution means is a notification mode setting means (effect) for setting a notification mode of the special notification from a plurality of types of notification modes (holding images SPA, SPB) predetermined based on the specific result of the destination identification means. It is provided with a function of executing the processes of steps S4604 to S4606 by the control device 82), and performs the special notification in the notification mode set by the notification mode setting means.
The special notification changing means is a means for changing the notification mode set by the notification mode setting means based on the grasping result of the grasping means (a function of executing the processes of steps S4607 to S4611 by the staging control device 82). The gaming machine according to any one of the features A5 to A9, characterized in that

According to the above configuration, the special notification is performed by the notification of the information regarding the second information used for the second determination, that is, the display of the so-called hold information, and the notification mode is changed by the changing means. Since the display of the hold information is continuously performed at least until the second determination is made, even if the player does not notice when the display of the hold information is changed by the changing means. It is more likely to be noticed afterwards. As mentioned above, although the second judgment is related to the profit for the player, there is also an auxiliary aspect of the first judgment, so if the production related to the second judgment is performed too flashy, the second judgment is performed. 1 There is a risk that the degree of attention to the judgment side will decrease. However, if the effect of the second determination is not noticed, it is meaningless to change the effect by a changing means or the like. Therefore, instead of making the effect at the time of executing the special notification flashy, if the period during which the special notification is executed is set to be relatively long, the first determination side will not interfere with the effect. 2 The special notification on the determination side can be suitably executed.

Feature A11. A variable ball entry means (variable winning device 32) provided in the game area and capable of switching between an open state in which a game ball can enter and a closed state in which a game ball is more difficult to enter than in the open state.
A privilege granting means (payout device 96) that grants a privilege (prize ball) to the player based on the fact that the game ball enters the variable ball entry means.
A variable ball entry control means (a function of executing a large winning opening opening / closing process by the main control device 81) for executing variable ball entry control in which the variable ball entry means is changed from the closed state to the open state and then changed to the closed state. ,
Equipped with
The second gaming state is a special gaming state in which the variable ball entry control of the variable ball entry means is performed by the variable ball entry control means.
The changing means is characterized in that the grasping means grasps whether or not the gaming state is the special gaming state, and the second determination notification means changes the execution mode of the notification process. The gaming machine according to any one of the features A1 to A10.

According to the above configuration, a special game state in which variable ball entry control of the variable ball entry means is performed is set as the second game state, and the notification process by the second determination notification means is set depending on whether or not the special game state is present. The mode of execution is changed. When a game ball enters the variable ball entry means, a privilege is given. Therefore, as a player, the result of the first determination becomes the first correspondence result in the first game state (that is, the transition to the special game state). ), And also pay attention to whether or not the game ball enters the variable ball entry means in the second game state (special game state). That is, it can be said that the target to be noticed by the player differs depending on the game state. In addition, in this special gaming state, not only the effect is flashy, but also the processing load is localized by controlling the variable ball entry control and the control for granting the privilege associated with the ball entry to the variable ball entry means. There is concern about an increase. Therefore, if the execution mode of the notification process on the second determination side is changed based on the difference in the gaming state, the notification process on the second determination side can be performed while adjusting the processing load or matching the attention target of the player. This makes it possible to satisfactorily perform such notification on the second determination side. Therefore, the degree of attention to the game can be suitably increased.

Feature A12. The gaming machine according to feature A11, wherein the privilege granting means has a configuration capable of granting a privilege based on a gaming ball entering the first ball entry portion.

According to the above configuration, in a configuration in which a privilege is given to the player when the game ball enters the variable ball entry means, the privilege can be given even based on the entry into the first ball entry portion. Therefore, the degree of attention to the entry of the game ball into the first entry section, which triggers the transition to the special gaming state, is increased, and as a result, the second entry rate to the first entry section is changed. It is also possible to increase the degree of attention to the ball entering the ball entry portion, the second determination, and the special notification for notifying the result of the second determination first.

It should be noted that the privilege given based on the entry into the first ball entry section may be different from the benefit granted based on the entry into the variable ball entry means, or may be different depending on the different benefit granting means. It may be configured to give a privilege.

Feature A13. The launching operation means (launching handle 54) in which the predetermined launching operation is performed by the player is provided, and the game ball launching means is positioned according to the operation amount of the predetermined launching operation performed on the launching operation means. The game ball is launched so that the game ball can reach.
On the flow path from the first position (left side region PE2 or right side region PE3) to which the game ball reaches when the predetermined firing operation of the first operation amount is performed on the firing operation means in the game area. The gaming machine according to the feature A11 or the feature A12, wherein both the first ball-entry portion and the variable ball-entry means are provided.

According to the above configuration, the game ball can be entered into the first entry portion while aiming at the variable entry means, or into the variable entry means while aiming at the first entry portion. As a result, even during a special gaming state in which variable ball entry control is performed (even in a situation where the launch operation means is operated aiming at the variable ball entry means), the ball enters the first ball entry section. Is possible, and it is significant to change the execution mode of the process for the notification of the second determination side regarding the ball entry rate to the first ball entry portion during the special gaming state. For example, if the special notification is configured so as not to notify that the rate of entry into the first entry portion is likely to increase, it is possible to concentrate on entry into the variable entry means during the special gaming state. On the contrary, if the special notification is configured to notify that the rate of entry into the first entry section is likely to increase, entry into the first entry section occurs during the special gaming state. It becomes possible for the player to understand that it will be easier, and it is possible to predict that the benefits obtained during the special gaming state will increase and entertain.

Feature A14. The changing means is a means for changing the execution mode of the notification process according to the execution timing of the variable ball entry control by the variable ball entry control means (a function of executing the special figure effect setting process by the effect control device 82). ), The gaming machine according to any one of features A11 to A13.

According to the above configuration, since the execution mode of the notification process is changed according to the execution timing of the variable ball entry control, the variable ball entry control in the variable ball entry means and the variable acceptance control in the variable receiving means overlap or are heavy. If the notification on the second determination side is set according to those situations, such as when the situation does not occur, the notification mode can be made more according to the interest of the player. For example, if it is easy for a ball to enter the first ball entry portion at the timing when the variable ball entry means is closed, the player may be configured to notify the result of the second determination first as a special notification. It can be predicted that the benefits obtained during the special game state will increase, and the motivation for the game can be increased. On the contrary, if it is easy for the variable ball entry means to enter the first ball entry portion at the timing when the variable ball entry means is open (only one of them can enter the ball), the special notification is not performed. Then, it is possible to suppress a decrease in motivation for the game by notifying the content that may cause a disadvantage to the player.

Feature A15. As the execution mode of the variable acceptance control by the variable control execution means, there are a first mode (low frequency support mode) and a second mode (high frequency support mode) which is more likely to be in the acceptance state than the first mode. It has been set and
1. The game state according to any one of features A1 to A14, wherein the first gaming state is set as the first mode, and the second gaming state is set as the second mode. Gaming machine.

According to the above configuration, there is a difference in the gaming state (mode) such as the second mode in which the ball entry rate to the first ball entry section is increased in the variable acceptance control and the first mode in which the ball entry rate is lower than that. After grasping, the execution mode of the notification process on the second determination side is changed. That is, the second determination is to determine to change the ball entry rate to the first ball entry section (whether or not the variable receiving means is in the second state), and to enter the first ball entry section. Regarding whether or not the ball rate changes, the player's interest will differ greatly depending on whether the ball entry rate is low in the first mode or the ball entry rate is low in the second mode as described above. Therefore, if it is possible to grasp which of these modes the player is staying in and change the execution mode of the process for notifying whether or not the ball entry rate to the first ball entry portion changes, for example. If there is not much need for notification, it is possible to prevent notification or to execute notification at the required timing, which further enhances the effectiveness of notification on the second judgment side. can.

Feature A16. The state transition means is configured to be able to shift the gaming state from the second mode to the first mode by performing the first determination a predetermined number of times in the second mode. (High frequency support mode with limited number of times),
The changing means is means for changing the execution mode of the notification process based on the number of times the first determination is executed or can be executed in the second mode (processes of steps S4704 and S4705 by the effect control device 82). The gaming machine according to the feature A15, which is characterized by having a function of executing the above.

According to the above configuration, the second mode is continued over a predetermined number of times of the first determination, and depending on the number of times in the second mode, the player wants to enter the first ball entry portion. It is thought that there are some cases where you do not want to let the ball enter. That is, the necessity of special notification greatly differs depending on the number of times in the second mode, and if the execution mode of the notification processing for that purpose is changed as in the above configuration, the processing can be performed according to the necessity of special notification. can. Therefore, the attention of the special notification itself can be increased, and unnecessary processing is not performed, so that the processing configuration of the gaming machine can be simplified.

In addition, "based on the number of times of the first determination executed or executed in the second mode" means "the number of times of the first determination executed or executed in the second mode is predetermined". It can also be rephrased as "based on the specific number given."

In addition to the first ball entry section, there is a configuration in which another entry section for acquiring the first information that triggers the first determination is provided, or even if the information is different from the first information, other entry sections are provided. If the above configuration is applied to a configuration in which the information acquired based on the entry into the ball portion is the target of a predetermined determination, the number of determinations based on the entry into the other entry portions is also the second mode. The configuration should be reflected in the number of continuations of.

Feature A17. The first information storage means can store the first information up to a predetermined number (4 pieces) which is a plurality of predetermined numbers.
When a plurality of the first information are stored in the first information storage means, the first determination means sequentially executes the first determination for each first information.
The changing means is characterized in that the execution mode of the notification process is changed based on the number of times of the first determination that can be executed in the second mode is equal to or less than the predetermined number. The gaming machine according to A16.

According to the above configuration, for notification on the second determination side based on the fact that the number of remaining first determinations in the second mode is equal to or less than the upper limit number (predetermined number) that can be stored in the first information storage means. The execution mode of the process is changed. For example, in a gaming machine having a so-called look-ahead notification function for notifying the result of the first determination at a timing prior to each game as the notification on the first determination side, the first determination as described above is performed. If it is notified first that the result of the first determination is the first response result in the situation where the number of times is small, the transition to the second gaming state has already been confirmed. The need for a game ball to enter the first ball entry section may be reduced. Then, in such a situation where the second mode is scarce, it becomes less necessary to make the second determination based on the entry into the second entry section as well as the first entry section. In that case, the player may stop the launch of the game ball by the game ball launching means. If the launch of the game ball is stopped in such a situation, it becomes difficult for the manager of the game hall to distinguish it from a fraudulent act that adjusts the launch timing of the game ball to make it easier to obtain benefits. There is an inconvenience that it becomes difficult to detect fraudulent activity. On the other hand, if it is notified by the special notification on the second determination side that the variable receiving means can be in the second state, for example, a privilege such as a prize ball is given by entering the first ball entry section. If so, it is considered that even in the above situation, it is meaningful to allow the game ball to enter at least the first ball entry portion, and the player continues to launch the game ball.

Therefore, for example, the special notification of the second determination side is not performed or the frequency of the special notification is reduced until then, and when the above-mentioned second mode is in a few remaining situations, the special notification of the second determination side is performed. If the execution mode of the notification process is changed so that the notification is performed or the frequency of the special notification is increased, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of the inconvenience of the boundary between the modes as described above.

Feature A18. The second determination notification means does not perform the special notification or makes the execution frequency of the special notification low in the second mode, and performs the special notification or executes the special notification in the first mode. The frequency is set to be higher than that of the second mode.
The changing means performs the special notification or the special notification based on the number of times of the first determination that can be executed in the second mode is equal to or less than the predetermined number even in the second mode. The gaming machine according to feature A17, wherein the execution mode of the notification process is changed so that the execution frequency of the above-mentioned is higher than the execution frequency up to that point.

According to the above configuration, the effect of the feature A17 can be suitably exhibited.

Feature A19. A third ball entry portion (upper operating port 33) provided in the game area and on which a game ball can enter,
A third information acquisition means (a function of executing a winning process for the operating port by the main control device 81) to acquire the third information based on the fact that the game ball has entered the third entry portion.
A third information storage means (holding ball storage area 232) for storing the third information acquired by the third information acquisition means, and
A third determination means (a hit / fail determination process by the main control device 81) that makes a third determination as to whether or not the third information stored in the third information storage means corresponds to the predetermined third correspondence information. Function to execute) and
In a situation where information corresponding to the first information storage means and the third information storage means is stored, each determination means is controlled so that the first determination is prioritized over the third determination. Priority means (function to execute winning process for the operating port by the main control device 81),
The gaming machine according to any one of the features A1 to A18, which comprises the above-mentioned feature A1 to A18.

According to the above configuration, in the situation where the first information and the third information are stored, the first information is given priority by the priority means and the determination is made. Therefore, it is considered that the first information is more important to the player than the third information. In such a configuration, a variable receiving means is provided on the side of the first ball entering portion, and the variable receiving means switches to a second state in which a game ball is easily accepted based on the ball entering the second ball entering portion. The notification about the second determination is notified by the second determination notification means. Then, for example, when the special notification executing means of the second determination notification means notifies in advance that the variable receiving means will be in the receiving state, the player blindly enters the first ball entry section or the third entry section. Rather than waiting for the ball to be generated, I think that it is also desirable to perform a so-called stop hit that switches the launch / stop of the game ball so that the ball enters the first ball entry section according to the content of the special notification notified in advance. Be done. Therefore, in such a configuration, if the configuration of the feature A1 is applied, it is possible to suitably suppress the above-mentioned stoppage.

In particular, if this configuration is applied to feature A15, the following effects can also be achieved.

That is, as a gaming state, a first mode (first gaming state) and a second mode (second gaming state) are set, and in the second mode, the variable accepting means is likely to be in the accepting state, and in the first mode, it is It is set to be less likely to be accepted than. Therefore, in the first mode, there is a possibility that the above stoppage is repeated so that the first information is acquired so as not to be the third information. However, if such a stoppage is performed, it becomes difficult for the manager of the game hall to distinguish it from a fraudulent act that adjusts the launch timing of the game ball to make it easier to obtain benefits, and as a result, the fraudulent action is performed. There is an inconvenience that it becomes difficult to detect the action.

Therefore, the execution mode of the notification process by the second determination notification means is changed depending on the game state (mode), for example, the special notification is not executed during the first mode or the execution frequency is set lower than that of the second mode. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the above-mentioned stoppage from being performed.

Feature A20. The first determination and the third determination are described in the feature A19, wherein the first determination is set to be more advantageous to the player than the third determination is performed. Pachinko machine.

According to the above configuration, in a situation where the first information and the third information are stored, in the configuration in which the first information is prioritized by the priority means and the determination is made, the first determination is a game rather than the third determination. It is set to a judgment that is advantageous to the person. Therefore, it is considered that the player wants to insert the game ball into the first ball entry section so that the first determination is made as much as possible. In such a configuration, a variable receiving means is provided on the side of the first ball entering portion, and the variable receiving means switches to a second state in which a game ball is easily accepted based on the ball entering the second ball entering portion. The notification about the second determination is notified by the second determination notification means. Then, for example, when the special notification executing means of the second determination notification means notifies in advance that the variable receiving means will be in the receiving state, the player blindly enters the first ball entry section or the third entry section. Rather than waiting for the ball to be generated, I think that it is also desirable to perform a so-called stop hit that switches the launch / stop of the game ball so that the ball enters the first ball entry section according to the content of the special notification notified in advance. Be done.

In particular, as a gaming state, a first mode (first gaming state) and a second mode (second gaming state) are set. In the second mode, the variable receiving means is likely to be in the receiving state, and in the first mode, it is easy to be in the receiving state. It is set to be less likely to be accepted than. Therefore, in the first mode, there is a possibility that the above stoppage is repeated so that the first information is acquired so as not to be the third information. However, if such a stoppage is performed, it becomes difficult for the manager of the game hall to distinguish it from a fraudulent act that adjusts the launch timing of the game ball to make it easier to obtain benefits, and as a result, the fraudulent action is performed. There is an inconvenience that it becomes difficult to detect the action.

Therefore, the execution mode of the notification process by the second determination notification means is changed depending on the game state (mode), for example, the special notification is not executed during the first mode or the execution frequency is set lower than that of the second mode. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the above-mentioned stoppage from being performed.

Feature A21. A variable ball entry means (variable winning device 32) provided in the game area and capable of switching between an open state in which a game ball can enter and a closed state in which a game ball is more difficult to enter than in the open state.
A privilege granting means (payout device 96) that grants a privilege (prize ball) to the player based on the fact that the game ball enters the variable ball entry means.
A variable ball entry control means (a function of executing a large winning opening opening / closing process by the main control device 81) for executing variable ball entry control in which the variable ball entry means is changed from the closed state to the open state and then changed to the closed state. ,
Equipped with
As the game state, a special game state in which the variable ball entry control of the variable ball entry means is performed by the variable ball entry control means is set.
As the execution mode of the variable acceptance control by the variable control execution means, there are a first mode (low frequency support mode) and a second mode (high frequency support mode) which is more likely to be in the acceptance state than the first mode. It has been set and
The gaming machine according to feature A19 or feature A20, which is configured to be set to the first mode during the special gaming state and can be set to the second mode after the end of the special gaming state.

According to the above configuration, since the first mode is set during the special game state, it is difficult for the ball to enter the first ball entry portion, and the second mode can be set after the special game state is completed. In this way, it is difficult to acquire the first information because it is set to the first mode during the special gaming state, but it is easy to acquire the first information if it is set to the second mode after the end of the special gaming state. In this configuration, a player who wants to positively acquire the first information after the end of the special gaming state is considered to refer to the special notification that can be an index for the probability of entering the first ball entry section. .. In this case, for example, if it is found by the special notification that the variable receiving means can be in the second state after a predetermined period from the end of the special game state, the player may want to stop the firing of the game ball until then. .. However, the inconvenience of such a stoppage is as described above, and if such a situation can be grasped and the execution mode of the notification process on the second determination side can be changed, such a situation can be obtained. It is possible to avoid the occurrence of inconvenience in advance.

Feature A22. In the game area, the first ball entry section and the second ball entry section are arranged so that the game ball that has entered the second ball entry section can enter the first ball entry section. Ori
Any one of the features A1 to A21, wherein the prior identification means has a configuration capable of executing the identification process based on the fact that the gaming ball has entered the second ball entry portion. The gaming machine described in.

According to the above configuration, the relationship between the second ball entry portion and the first ball entry portion can be further enhanced. Then, if the process of prior identification is performed based on the entry into the second entry section, then the ease of entry into the first entry section, that is, whether or not the ball is in the accepted state is determined. be able to. That is, when the game ball enters the second entry section, it is possible to notify whether or not the game ball is easy to enter the first entry section. This makes it possible to diversify the game.

<Characteristic B group>
Feature B1. A game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 53) that launches a game ball into the game area based on a predetermined firing operation, and
A first ball entry portion (lower operating port 34) provided in the game area and on which a game ball can enter,
A first information acquisition means (a function of executing a winning process for an operating port by the main control device 81) to acquire first information based on the fact that a game ball has entered the first ball entry portion.
A first information storage means (holding ball storage area 232) for storing the first information acquired by the first information acquisition means, and
The first determination means (the hit / fail determination process by the main control device 81) that first determines whether or not the first information stored in the first information storage means corresponds to the predetermined first correspondence information. Function to execute) and
Equipped with
The gaming states include at least a first gaming state (normal gaming state, low frequency support mode, low probability mode) and a second gaming state (open / close execution mode, high frequency support) that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state. Mode, high probability mode), and are set,
Based on the fact that the result of the first determination by the first determination means is the first correspondence result that the first information to be determined corresponds to the first correspondence information, the gaming state is changed to the first. A state transition means (a function of executing the game state transition process by the main control device 81) for transitioning from the game state to the second game state, and
The first determination notification means (game turn control by the effect control device 82) that executes the first notification process for performing the notification of the first determination of the first determination means by the predetermined notification means (symbol display device 41). Function to execute processing) and
In a gaming machine equipped with
A second ball entry section (through gate 35) provided in the game area separately from the first ball entry section and on which a game ball can enter,
A variable state that is provided in the game area and can be displaced into an accepting state in which the game ball is easily accepted into the first entry portion and a non-acceptance state in which the game ball is less likely to be accepted into the first entry portion than in the acceptance state. Receiving means (electric accessory 34a) and
A second information acquisition means (a function of executing a winning process for thru by the main control device 81) to acquire the second information based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second entry portion.
A second information storage means (electric service holding area 233) for storing the second information acquired by the second information acquisition means, and
A second determination means (a normal drawing game by the main control device 81) that makes a second determination as to whether or not the second information stored in the second information storage means corresponds to the second correspondence information that is predetermined. Function to execute control processing) and
Based on the fact that the result of the second determination by the second determination means is the second correspondence result that the second information to be determined corresponds to the second correspondence information, the variable acceptance means is described. A variable control execution means (a function of executing the normal game state transition process by the main control device 81) for executing variable acceptance control from the non-accepted state to the accepted state and then to the non-accepted state.
The second determination notification means (general diagram by the staging control device 82) that executes the second notification processing for performing the notification of the second determination of the second determination means by the predetermined notification means or a notification means different from the predetermined notification means. Function to execute fluctuation display control processing and general map hold control processing),
Equipped with
The second determination notification means is
Regarding the predetermined second information acquired by the second information acquisition means, the information corresponding to the result of the second determination when the predetermined second information is the target of the second determination is the predetermined second information. 2 The second destination specifying means (a function of executing the processing for holding a normal figure by the main control device 81) that executes the processing for specifying the information at the timing before the target of the second determination, and
The second when the predetermined second information which is the specific target becomes the target of the second determination based on the fact that the specific result by the second destination specifying means becomes a predetermined special result. A function of executing a second special notification executing means (a function of executing a normal figure hold notice setting process by the staging control device 82) for executing the second special notification corresponding to the result of the determination by the predetermined notification means or a notification means different from the predetermined notification means. )When,
Equipped with
The gaming machine is
A grasping means for grasping the status of the first notification processing by the first determination notification means (a function of executing the status grasping process on the special figure side by the staging control device 82 in the second and third embodiments).
Based on the grasping result by the grasping means, the changing means for changing the execution mode of the second notification processing of the second determination notification means (the normal figure hold notice setting process and the special figure effect setting process by the effect control device 82). Function to execute etc.) and
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the above configuration, if the first information is acquired based on the game ball entering the first ball entry portion, and the result of the first determination for the first information is the first correspondence result, the gaming state. In the gaming machine that shifts to the second gaming state, which is advantageous for the player, a variable receiving means that affects the ease of entering the game ball into the first entering portion is provided, and the variable receiving means is provided. Variable acceptance control is performed based on the result of the second determination performed based on the entry into the second entry section. Therefore, the ease of entering the ball to the first entry section differs depending on the entry into the second entry section and the result of the second determination based on the result, and the player is accompanied by this. The degree of advantage (transition of the gaming state) will be different. In such a configuration, the second determination notification means for notifying the second determination is provided with a destination identification means for specifying information corresponding to the determination result at a timing prior to the second determination being performed. Special notification is performed based on the specific result of the prior specific result. As a result, not only the game of shifting the gaming state from the first gaming state to the second gaming state based on the entry into the first entry section, but also the easy entry to the first entry section side. It is possible to perform a game such as predicting that the sword may be displaced by a special notification, and it is possible to diversify the game.

Then, in the above configuration, a notification process for notification of the second determination is included, including a special notification for notifying the displacement of the ease of entering the ball to the first ball entry portion side earlier than that. The execution mode of the above may differ depending on the status of the first notification process on the first determination side. Since the status of the first notification process depends on the level of advantage for the player (whether it is the first game state or the second game state), it is considered that the player is highly interested in it. Be done. For example, since the player would be bored if the first determination side's play first notification process was not performed, it is considered that at least the second determination side's notification should be notified if it is possible. Be done. Further, for example, when the progress of the first notification process is slow (for example, the length of the game times as the effect for the first determination is long), it may be perceived as redundant depending on the player. On the contrary, when the progress is slow (the length of the game is long), there is a possibility that a flashy effect is performed so that the game state can be changed as the effect on the first notification processing side. It is thought that he is highly interested in the production. Therefore, by changing the execution mode for the notification on the second determination side depending on the progress of the first notification processing or the like, it is possible to perform appropriate notification according to the interest of the player. As a result, the degree of attention to the game can be suitably increased.

It should be noted that "changing the execution mode of the notification process of the second determination notification means" is described in the feature A group as well.
A configuration of "changing the execution mode of the specified process by the second destination specifying means" is conceivable, and in this case,
A configuration that "changes whether or not to execute the specified process by the second destination specifying means" or
A configuration such as "changing the number of the predetermined second information that performs the specifying process by the destination specifying means" can be considered.

Further, "changing the execution mode of the notification process of the second determination notification means" is described in the feature A group as well.
A configuration of "changing the execution mode of the second special notification by the second special notification execution means" is also conceivable, and in this case,
A configuration of "changing whether or not to execute the second special notification by the second special notification execution means" or
A configuration or the like of "changing the execution timing of the second special notification by the special notification execution means" can be considered.

By applying the above configuration, it is possible to achieve the individual effects described in the feature A group.

Feature B2. The first determination notification means starts the game rotation operation by the predetermined notification means, and ends the game rotation operation as a notification result corresponding to the result of the first determination of the first determination means. As one game round, a process of controlling the predetermined notification means is executed so that the game round operation of each game round is performed according to the first information stored in the first information storage means. Equipped with a game time control means (a function of executing a game time control process by the main control device 81).
The game round control means includes an operation period setting means (a function of executing a variable display time setting process by the main control device 81) for setting an operation period of the game round operation, and is set by the operation period setting means. The game rotation operation is performed over a period of time.
The changing means changes the execution mode of the notification process of the second determination notification means according to the operation period (the hold notice setting process by the effect control device 82 in the second embodiment). The gaming machine according to feature B1, which is characterized by having a function of executing the above.

According to the above configuration, as the first notification process, a process for the game rounding operation is performed. If the operation period of the game round is long, it may be perceived as redundant depending on the player, and conversely, if the operation period is long, the game state can be changed as a staging on the game round side. There is a high possibility that such a production is being performed, and it is considered that he is highly interested in the production. On the other hand, if the operation period of the game round is short, it is considered that the first determination is frequently performed, so that the first information should be acquired frequently. Then, when the operation period of the game round is short, it is considered that the interest in the notification for the second determination regarding the variable acceptance control is reduced, and such notification is frequently performed. , It may make the player feel annoyed. Therefore, if the execution mode of the notification process of the second determination notification means is changed according to the operation period of the game times, appropriate notification can be performed according to the interest of the player. As a result, the degree of attention to the game can be suitably increased.

Feature B3. The operation period for which the information of the operation period set by the operation period setting means is specified at a timing before the game times to be set by the operation period setting means are executed by the game times control means. It is equipped with specific means (a function of executing the process of step S4903 by the staging control device 82).
The game round handling means changes the execution mode of the second notification process of the second determination notification means according to the information of the operation period specified by the prior operation period specifying means. The gaming machine according to the feature B2.

According to the above configuration, the length of the operation period can be grasped at a timing before the game round for the first determination is performed. The second notification processing by the second determination notification means also includes a special notification process relating to the prior identification of the second determination, and such advance notification (so-called look-ahead notice) on the second determination side is the first determination. By matching the length of the game times on the side, the relationship between the two judgments can be enhanced.

Feature B4. The game round handling means has a predetermined operation period for which the game round operation is executed at the timing when the second determination is performed for the second information to be specified by the prior identification means. The gaming machine according to feature B3, wherein the second special notification is changed so as to be easy to execute based on the period of the period or more.

According to the above configuration, if it is known in advance that the game times on the first determination side are long, for example, as a player, the firing of the game ball is stopped and the game times are digested. It is also conceivable to wait (so-called stop-and-shoot). However, if such a stoppage is performed, it becomes difficult for the manager of the game hall to distinguish it from a fraudulent act that adjusts the launch timing of the game ball to make it easier to obtain benefits, and as a result, the fraudulent action is performed. There is an inconvenience that it becomes difficult to detect the action.

Therefore, in such a situation, if the execution mode of the notification process on the second determination side is changed to facilitate the special notification, for example, it is possible to make it meaningful to continue the firing. It is possible to deter the stoppage of.

Feature B5. The first determination notification means is
Regarding the predetermined first information acquired by the first information acquisition means, the information corresponding to the result of the first determination when the predetermined first information is the target of the first determination is the predetermined first information. 1 First destination specifying means (confirmation processing for holding a special figure by the main control device 81, setting processing of a special figure holding command) for executing a process of specifying information at a timing before the target of the first determination. Function to execute) and
The first when the predetermined first information which is the specific target becomes the target of the first determination based on the fact that the specific result by the first first specific means becomes a predetermined special result. A function of executing a first special notification execution means (a function of executing a special figure hold notice control process by the staging control device 82) to execute the first special notification corresponding to the result of the determination by the predetermined notification means or a notification means different from the predetermined notification means. )When,
Equipped with
The changing means is a first-destination identification corresponding means for changing the execution mode of the second notifying process based on the processing result of at least one of the first-destination specifying means and the first special notification executing means. The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B4, characterized in that it is provided with a function of executing a normal drawing reservation notice setting process in the third embodiment).

According to the above configuration, as the first notification process, a process for first special notification (so-called look-ahead notice) for notifying the result of the first determination first is performed. For example, in a situation where the player predicts that the gaming state is likely to shift due to the first special notification, the gaming state shifts as a player rather than letting the game ball enter the first ball entry section. It is thought that you will want to enjoy the production until you do so, and you will also want to make a so-called stop hit to stop the launch of the game ball. However, if such a stoppage is performed, it becomes difficult for the manager of the game hall to distinguish it from a fraudulent act that adjusts the launch timing of the game ball to make it easier to obtain benefits, and as a result, the fraudulent action is performed. There is an inconvenience that it becomes difficult to detect the action.

Therefore, based on the processing result for the first special notification (the processing result of at least one of the first destination specifying means and the first special notification executing means), the execution mode of the second notification processing on the second determination side is changed. For example, if it is not notified that the situation is likely to be accepted, it is possible to make it meaningful to continue firing the game ball, and it is possible to prevent the above-mentioned stopping action. ..

Feature B6. The gaming machine according to feature B5, wherein the first destination specifying means changes the execution mode of the second notification process according to the ease with which the first special notification is executed. ..

Since the first special notification is for predicting the result of the first determination, it is considered to be of great interest to the player. Therefore, if the effect of the second determination side is changed according to the ease of execution of the first special notification as in the above configuration, the effect of the second determination side is associated with the height of interest of the first determination side. Can be performed, and both judgments can be noticed in a well-balanced manner.

Feature B7. The first destination specific response means is characterized in that when the first special notification is executed or is easy to be executed, the second special notification is changed so as to be difficult to execute. Feature The gaming machine described in B6.

According to the above configuration, the concentration of the player who is interested in the first special notification is not dispersed to the second special notification side, and the degree of attention to the effect of the first determination side can be suitably increased.

Feature B8. The first special notification is a predetermined timing (at the end of the variation display of the game times) before the target of the first determination after the predetermined first information is acquired by the first information acquisition means. It is done in
The second special notification is characterized in that it can be continuously performed from the acquisition of the predetermined second information by the second information acquisition means until it becomes the target of the second determination at least. The gaming machine according to any one of B5 to B7.

According to the above configuration, even if the effect of the second special notification side is less conspicuous than the effect of the first special notification side, the player is able to perform it because the execution period is long. Is easy to notice. As described above, since the second determination has an auxiliary role of the first determination, the player is relatively interested in the production of the first determination side. Therefore, even if the effect on the second determination side is performed, it is necessary to take care not to disperse the attention to the effect on the first determination side. For such a reason, by adopting the above configuration, it is possible to maintain a good balance between the effects of the first determination and the second determination.

<Characteristic C group>
Features C1. A game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 53) that launches a game ball into the game area based on a predetermined firing operation, and
A first ball entry portion (lower operating port 34) provided in the game area and on which a game ball can enter,
A second ball entry portion (through gate 35) provided in the game area and on which a game ball can enter,
A variable receiving means (electric accessory 34a) that can be displaced into a receiving state in which the game ball is easily accepted into the first ball entering portion and a non-accepting state in which it is more difficult to accept the game ball into the first ball entering portion than in the receiving state. )When,
A second determination means (a function of executing the normal game rotation control process by the main control device 81) for making a second determination based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second entry unit.
A variable control executing means (a function of executing accessory opening / closing processing by the main control device 81) for executing variable acceptance control in which the variable acceptance means is changed from the non-acceptance state to the acceptance state and then changed to the non-acceptance state.
Based on the result of the second determination by the second determination means being the second correspondence result, the acceptance state transition means (by the main control device 81) for transitioning to the special state (support state) in which the variable acceptance control is performed. Function to execute the normal game state transition process) and
A first period setting means (a function of executing the processing of steps S2005 and S2105 by the main control device 81) for setting a period during which the variable acceptance means is placed in the non-acceptance state in the special state as a first period.
The second period setting means (step S2007, step S2107 by the main control device 81) that sets the period in which the variable acceptance means is in the non-acceptance state in the special state as the second period, which is a period different from the first period. Function to execute the processing of) and
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the above configuration, the second determination is made based on the game ball entering the second entry section, and if the result is the second corresponding result, the ball enters the first entry section. Move to a special state that affects ease. In such a configuration, the period in which the variable receiving means in the special state is in the non-accepting state may be set in the first period, or may be set in the second period different from the first period. There is also. By doing so, it is possible to perform an effect or the like according to the set period.

Feature C2. A game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 53) that launches a game ball into the game area based on a predetermined firing operation, and
A first ball entry portion (lower operating port 34) provided in the game area and on which a game ball can enter,
A second ball entry portion (through gate 35) provided in the game area and on which a game ball can enter,
A variable receiving means (electric accessory 34a) that can be displaced into a receiving state in which the game ball is easily accepted into the first ball entering portion and a non-accepting state in which it is more difficult to accept the game ball into the first ball entering portion than in the receiving state. )When,
A second determination means (a function of executing the normal game rotation control process by the main control device 81) for making a second determination based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second entry unit.
A variable control execution means (a function of executing accessory opening / closing processing by the main control device 81) for executing unit variable acceptance control in which the variable acceptance means is changed from the non-acceptance state to the acceptance state and then changed to the non-acceptance state.
Acceptance state transition means (mainly) for shifting to a special state (support state) in which the unit variable acceptance control is performed at least once based on the result of the second determination by the second determination means becoming the second correspondence result. (Function to execute the normal game state transition process by the control device 81) and
With a first period setting means (a function of executing the processing of steps S2005 and S2105 by the main control device 81) to set the waiting period before or after the unit variable acceptance control is performed in the special state as the first period. ,
A second period setting means (step S2007 by the main control device 81) that sets the waiting period before or after the unit variable acceptance control is performed in the special state as the second period, which is a period different from the first period. (Function to execute the process of step S2107) and
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the above configuration, the second determination is made based on the game ball entering the second entry section, and if the result is the second corresponding result, the ball enters the first entry section. Move to a special state that affects ease. In such a configuration, the waiting period before or after the unit variable acceptance control is performed may be set to the first period, or may be set to a second period different from the first period. By doing so, it is possible to perform an effect or the like according to the set period.

Feature C3. A game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 53) that launches a game ball into the game area based on a predetermined firing operation, and
A first ball entry portion (lower operating port 34) provided in the game area and on which a game ball can enter,
A second ball entry portion (through gate 35) provided in the game area and on which a game ball can enter,
A variable receiving means (electric accessory 34a) that can be displaced into a receiving state in which the game ball is easily accepted into the first ball entering portion and a non-accepting state in which it is more difficult to accept the game ball into the first ball entering portion than in the receiving state. )When,
A second determination means (a function of executing the normal game rotation control process by the main control device 81) for making a second determination based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second entry unit.
A variable control execution means (a function of executing accessory opening / closing processing by the main control device 81) for executing unit variable acceptance control in which the variable acceptance means is changed from the non-acceptance state to the acceptance state and then changed to the non-acceptance state.
Acceptance state transition means (mainly) for shifting to a special state (support state) in which the unit variable acceptance control is performed at least once based on the result of the second determination by the second determination means becoming the second correspondence result. (Function to execute the normal game state transition process by the control device 81) and
In the special state, a function of executing an effect executing means (a function for executing a support state process by the effect control device 82) for executing a standby effect (opening effect or ending effect) in a standby period before or after the unit variable acceptance control is performed. )When,
A first period setting means (a function of executing the processing of steps S2005 and S2105 by the main control unit 81) for setting the waiting period as the first period, and
A second period setting means (a function of executing the processing of step S2007 and step S2107 by the main control device 81) for setting the waiting period as a second period different from the first period.
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the above configuration, the second determination is made based on the game ball entering the second entry section, and if the result is the second corresponding result, the ball enters the first entry section. Move to a special state that affects ease. In such a configuration, a standby effect is performed during the waiting period before or after the unit variable acceptance control is performed. The waiting period may be set to the first period or may be set to a second period different from the first period. By doing so, it is possible to perform a standby effect according to the set period.

Feature C4. A game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 53) that launches a game ball into the game area based on a predetermined firing operation, and
A first ball entry portion (lower operating port 34) provided in the game area and on which a game ball can enter,
A first determination means (a function of executing a hit / fail determination process by the main control device 81) that makes a first determination based on the fact that a game ball has entered the first entry portion.
Equipped with
The gaming states include at least a first gaming state (normal gaming state, low frequency support mode, low probability mode) and a second gaming state (open / close execution mode, high frequency support) that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state. Mode, high probability mode), and are set,
Based on the fact that the result of the first determination by the first determination means becomes the first correspondence result, the gaming state transition means (main control device 81) for shifting the gaming state from the first gaming state to the second gaming state. In a gaming machine equipped with a function to execute the gaming state transition process by
A second ball entry section (through gate 35) provided in the game area separately from the first ball entry section and on which a game ball can enter,
A receiving state in which the game ball is easily accepted into the first ball entry section or a predetermined ball entry section provided in the game area, and a non-acceptance state in which the game ball is less likely to be accepted into the first ball entry section than in the acceptance state. Variable receiving means (electric accessory 34a) that can be displaced to
A second determination means (a function of executing the normal game rotation control process by the main control device 81) for making a second determination based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second entry unit.
A variable control execution means (a function of executing accessory opening / closing processing by the main control device 81) for executing unit variable acceptance control in which the variable acceptance means is changed from the non-acceptance state to the acceptance state and then changed to the non-acceptance state.
Acceptance state transition means (mainly) for shifting to a special state (support state) in which the unit variable acceptance control is performed at least once based on the result of the second determination by the second determination means becoming the second correspondence result. (Function to execute the normal game state transition process by the control device 81) and
In the special state, a function of executing an effect executing means (a function for executing a support state process by the effect control device 82) for executing a standby effect (opening effect or ending effect) in a standby period before or after the unit variable acceptance control is performed. )When,
A first period setting means (a function of executing the processing of steps S2005 and S2105 by the main control device 81) that sets the waiting period as the first period according to the gaming state.
A function of executing the processing of the second period setting means (step S2007, step S2107 by the main control device 81) for setting the waiting period as a second period which is a period different from the first period according to the gaming state. )When,
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the above configuration, if the result of the first determination performed based on the entry of the gaming ball into the first entry portion is the first correspondence result, the gaming state is advantageous to the player in the second gaming state. In the gaming machine that shifts to, a variable receiving means that influences the ease of entering the game ball into the first ball entry section or the predetermined ball entry section is provided, and this variable receiving means is provided with the second ball entry section. Variable acceptance control is performed based on the result of the second determination performed based on the entry into the unit. Therefore, the ease of entering the ball to the first entry section may differ depending on the entry into the second entry section and the result of the second determination based on the result. Will have different advantages. Therefore, it is considered that the player is interested in the entry into the second entry section, which can trigger the entry into the first entry section, and the result of the second determination based on the entry into the second entry section. You should also be interested in the special conditions that will transition as a result. In particular, in this special state, it is considered that the preparation should be made before the unit variable acceptance control is performed, and the lingering sound should be enjoyed after that. Therefore, it is considered that there is a great deal of interest in the waiting staging performed during the waiting period.

On the other hand, the second determination has an auxiliary role of the first determination, and the interest of the second determination may be high or low depending on the gaming state as a result of the first determination. it is conceivable that. Then, for example, there may be a state in which the waiting effect in the waiting period should be enjoyed as described above, and a state in which the waiting period should not be enjoyed. It becomes possible to correspond to. Therefore, the degree of attention to the game can be suitably increased.

Feature C5. The second period setting means is characterized in that a period longer than the first period is set as the second period based on the gaming state being the first gaming state. The gaming machine described in C4.

In a state that is disadvantageous to the player (first game state), interest in the result of the second judgment side will be high so that the first judgment is made as much as possible, and conversely, a state that is advantageous to the player (first game state). (2 game states), it is considered that the result of the first determination side is more worrisome than the result of one second determination. Therefore, according to the above configuration, the waiting time is set longer in the first game state than in the second game state, so that the period for performing the effect (standby effect) in that period is also longer in the first game state. Can be secured. This makes it possible to suitably perform the standby effect in the first gaming state.

Feature C6. The standby effect is set according to the game state, and is set.
The gaming machine according to feature C4 or feature C5, wherein each period setting means sets each period according to the standby effect.

According to the above configuration, the waiting period can be set according to the waiting effect. A general gaming machine includes a first control device that controls a variable acceptance means in a special state in which a unit variable acceptance control or the like is performed including a standby period, and a second control device that performs an effect for the control. The second control device is controlled based on a signal (command or the like) from the first control device side to perform an effect. Therefore, as the standby effect, a configuration is generally set on the second control device side according to the standby period set on the first control device side. In this case, since the setting of the standby effect on the second control device side depends on the setting of the standby period on the first control device side, it is necessary to associate each setting with a separate control device. On the other hand, in the above configuration, since the waiting period is set according to the standby effect, the setting method is completely the opposite. By doing so, it becomes possible to associate each setting with one control device, and it is possible to reduce the control load.

Feature C7. A first control device (main control device 81) having at least the second determination means, the variable control execution means, and the acceptance state transition means.
A second control device (effect control device 82) having the effect execution means,
Equipped with
The gaming machine according to feature C6, wherein each period setting means is possessed by the first control device.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to exert the effect of the above feature C6 by a configuration completely different from the existing configuration.

Feature C8. The gaming machine according to any one of features C3 to C7, wherein the standby effect is started during the special state and ends during the special state.

According to the above configuration, the standby effect can be completed in one special state without straddling the next second determination effect or the special state. If the final standby effect in the special state is configured to straddle the effect for the next second determination, the player is confused as to whether or not the result in the next second determination is notified. There is a risk of doing it. Therefore, if the above configuration is used, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused.

Feature C9. The second correspondence result includes a first special correspondence result (for example, the first opening result A1) and a second special correspondence result (for example, the first opening result) in which the control mode of the variable acceptance control is the same in the special state. A3) is set,
Each of the period setting means is characterized in that it is possible to set a corresponding period so that the waiting period of the first special response result and the second special response result are different. The gaming machine according to any one of C1 to C8.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to make the waiting period different in a special state in which variable acceptance control of the same control mode is performed. By doing so, even when the same variable acceptance control is performed, the waiting period, that is, the period in which the waiting effect is performed can be different, and the standby effect can be diversified.

Feature C10. Each of the period setting means sets a corresponding period according to the gaming state.
The second determination means is set so that, of the second correspondence results, the probability of the first special correspondence result and the probability of the second special correspondence result differ depending on the gaming state. The gaming machine according to the feature C9.

According to the above configuration, the probability of each special response result may be different according to each gaming state, so that the effect of feature C9 can be achieved with a simple configuration.

The basic configuration of the gaming machine to which each of the above features can be applied is shown below.

Pachinko gaming machine: An operating means operated by a player (launching handle 54), a gaming ball launching means for launching a game ball based on the operation of the operating means (gaming ball launching mechanism 53), and the launched game ball. A ball passage (rail portions 51, 52) leading to a predetermined gaming area (gaming area PE) and each gaming component arranged in the gaming area are provided, and a predetermined passing portion (general prize) among these gaming parts is provided. A gaming machine that gives a privilege to a player when a gaming ball passes through a mouth 31, etc.).

Revolving gaming machine such as a slot machine: Equipped with a variable display means that displays a variable display of a symbol sequence consisting of a plurality of symbols and then displays the final stop display of the symbol sequence, and the symbol variation starts due to the operation of the starting operation means. This is a special game that is advantageous to the player on the condition that the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means or after a predetermined time has elapsed, and the final stop symbol at the time of the stop is a specific symbol. A gaming machine that generates a state (bonus game, etc.).

Ball-using belt-type gaming machine: Equipped with a variable display means that displays a variable display of a symbol sequence consisting of a plurality of symbols and then displays the final stop display of the symbol sequence. A special gaming state (bonus) that is advantageous to the player on the condition that the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped due to the operation of the operation means or the predetermined time elapses and the final stop symbol at the time of the stop is a specific symbol. A throwing device is provided with a throwing device for generating a game, etc., and further providing a ball tray to take in a game ball from the ball tray, and a payout device for paying out the game ball to the ball tray. A gaming machine configured so that the operation of the starting operation means becomes effective when the gaming ball is thrown in.

10 ... Pachinko machine, 33 ... Upper operating port, 34 ... Lower operating port, 34a ... Electric accessory, 41 ... Symbol display device, 43 ... Main display unit, 44 ... Character display unit, 54 ... Launch handle, 81 ... Main control device, 82 ... Production control device, 96 ... Payout device, 202 ... MPU, 242 ... MPU, PE ... Game area, PE1 ... Upper area, PE2 ... Left side area, PE3 ... Right side area, PE4 ... Lower area.

Claims (1)

A game ball launching means that launches a game ball into the game area based on a predetermined firing operation,
A first ball entry section provided in the game area where a game ball can enter,
A first information acquisition means for acquiring the first information based on the fact that the game ball has entered the first ball entry portion.
A first information storage means for storing the first information acquired by the first information acquisition means, and a first information storage means.
A first determination means for performing a first determination as to whether or not the first information stored in the first information storage means corresponds to a predetermined first correspondence information.
Equipped with
At least a first gaming state and a second gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state are set as the gaming state.
Based on the fact that the result of the first determination by the first determination means is the first correspondence result that the first information to be determined corresponds to the first correspondence information, the gaming state is changed to the first. A state transition means for transitioning from a gaming state to a second gaming state,
The first game round is to start the game rounding operation by a predetermined notification means and end the game rounding operation as a notification result corresponding to the result of the first determination of the first determination means. (1) A game turn control means that controls the predetermined notification means so that the game turn operation of each game turn is performed according to the first information stored in the information storage means.
In a gaming machine equipped with
A second ball entry section, which is provided in the game area separately from the first ball entry section and in which a game ball can enter,
A variable state that is provided in the game area and can be displaced into an accepting state in which the game ball is easily accepted into the first entry portion and a non-acceptance state in which the game ball is less likely to be accepted into the first entry portion than in the acceptance state. Acceptance means and
A second information acquisition means for acquiring the second information based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second entry portion.
A second information storage means for storing the second information acquired by the second information acquisition means, and a second information storage means.
A second determination means that makes a second determination as to whether or not the second information stored in the second information storage means corresponds to the second correspondence information that is predetermined.
Based on the fact that the result of the second determination by the second determination means is the second correspondence result that the second information to be determined corresponds to the second correspondence information, the variable acceptance means is described. A variable control execution means that executes variable acceptance control from the non-acceptance state to the acceptance state and then to the non-acceptance state.
A second determination notification means for executing a notification process for performing notification for the second determination of the second determination means by the predetermined notification means or a notification means different from the predetermined notification means.
Equipped with
The second determination notification means is
Regarding the predetermined second information acquired by the second information acquisition means, the information corresponding to the result of the second determination when the predetermined second information is the target of the second determination is the predetermined second information. 2 The destination specifying means for executing the process of specifying the information at the timing before the target of the second determination, and
Based on the fact that the specific result by the prior identification means becomes a predetermined special result, the second determination in the case where the predetermined second information which is the specific target becomes the target of the second determination. A special notification executing means for executing the special notification corresponding to the result by the predetermined notification means or a notification means different from the predetermined notification means.
Equipped with
The gaming machine is
A grasping means for grasping the game state and
Based on the grasping result by the grasping means, the changing means for changing the execution mode of the notification process of the second determination notification means and the changing means.
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

Images